Download - Syd-Com
Transcript
Hybrid IP PBX Feature Guide Model KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200 Please read this manual before connecting the Hybrid IP PBX and save this manual for future reference. Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, Hybrid IP PBX. Introduction About this Feature Guide This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX. It explains what this PBX can do, and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities. This manual contains the following sections: Section 1, Call Handling Features Provides details about the call handling features. Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features Provides details about the system configuration and administration features. Section 3, Programming Provides system programming instructions. Section 4, Appendix Provides tables listing tones and ring tones. Section 5, Index Provide feature titles, important words to help you access the required information easily. Terms used in this Feature Guide Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference. Feature Guide References The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference. User Manual References The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference. Abbreviations There are many abbreviations used in this manual (e.g., "PT" which stands for proprietary telephone). Please refer to Section 5 Index in this manual for the meaning of each abbreviation. 2 Feature Guide About the other manuals Along with this Feature Guide, the following manuals are available to help you install, and use this PBX: Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX. User Manual Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs, SLTs or DSS Consoles. Note There are some optional service cards, PTs, and features which are not available in some areas. Please consult your authorised Panasonic dealer for more information. Feature Guide 3 Feature Highlights Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made. Budget Management Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget. Call Charge Fee Reference Allows a user to see call charges and to print out them. Remote Extension Lock Allows a manager extension to lock an extension so that inappropriate trunk calls cannot be made. Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Ringing occurs over the external paging device; the call can be answered from any extension (station). Caller ID Allows a user to see the name or telephone number of a caller on the telephone display before answering a call. ISDN Line Service The PBX can manage calls received from ISDN lines by point-to-point or point-to-multipoint configuration. TIE Line Service A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company at different locations. E1 Line Service The E1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy. The E1 line carries 30 voice channels. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation. 4 Feature Guide Table of Contents 1 Call Handling Features............................................................... 13 1.1 1.1.1 Incoming Call Features.......................................................................................14 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY .........................................................14 Direct In Line (DIL) ............................................................................................................ 17 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) .................................................. 19 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service......................................................... 23 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution....................................................................... 25 Intercept Routing ............................................................................................................... 27 Intercept Routing—No Destination .................................................................................... 29 Collect Call Block (only for Brazil) ..................................................................................... 30 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY ......................................................................32 1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY...................................................34 Internal Call Block ............................................................................................................. 33 Ring Tone Pattern Selection ............................................................................................. 35 Call Waiting ....................................................................................................................... 37 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 Receiving Group Features .................................................................................38 Idle Extension Hunting ..........................................................................................38 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY .....................................40 Group Call Distribution ...................................................................................................... 43 Queuing Feature ............................................................................................................... 46 VIP Call ............................................................................................................................. 48 Overflow Feature ............................................................................................................... 49 Log-in/Log-out ................................................................................................................... 51 Supervisory Feature .......................................................................................................... 53 1.3 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features ..................................55 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features—SUMMARY ................55 Call Forwarding (FWD)...................................................................................................... 57 Do Not Disturb (DND)........................................................................................................ 60 1.4 1.4.1 Answering Features............................................................................................61 Answering Features—SUMMARY ........................................................................61 Line Preference—Incoming ............................................................................................... 62 Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................ 63 Hands-free Answerback .................................................................................................... 64 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 Making Call Features ..........................................................................................65 Predialling .............................................................................................................65 Automatic Extension Release ...............................................................................66 Line Preference—Outgoing...................................................................................67 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) ...................................................................68 Executive Busy Override.......................................................................................69 Intercom Call .........................................................................................................70 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY ....................................71 Call Waiting Tone .............................................................................................................. 72 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) .............................................................................. 73 Whisper OHCA .................................................................................................................. 74 1.5.8 1.5.9 1.5.10 1.5.11 1.5.12 Trunk Access ........................................................................................................75 Emergency Call.....................................................................................................77 Account Code Entry ..............................................................................................78 Dial Type Selection ...............................................................................................79 Dial Tone Detection...............................................................................................80 Feature Guide 5 1.5.13 Pause Insertion..................................................................................................... 81 1.5.14 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) ..................................................................................................................... 82 1.5.15 Special Carrier Access Code................................................................................ 84 1.6 Memory Dialling Features.................................................................................. 85 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY............................................................... 85 One-touch Dialling ............................................................................................................. 87 Last Number Redial ........................................................................................................... 88 Speed Dialling—Personal/System..................................................................................... 89 Quick Dialling..................................................................................................................... 90 Hot Line ............................................................................................................................. 91 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.8 1.8.1 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5 1.9.6 1.9.7 1.9.8 1.9.9 1.9.10 1.10 1.10.1 1.11 1.11.1 1.11.2 1.11.3 1.11.4 1.12 1.12.1 1.12.2 1.12.3 1.13 1.13.1 1.14 1.14.1 1.14.2 1.14.3 1.14.4 1.14.5 1.14.6 6 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features ................................... 92 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) ........................................................ 92 Budget Management ............................................................................................ 96 Extension Lock ..................................................................................................... 97 Dial Tone Transfer................................................................................................ 98 Remote COS Access............................................................................................ 99 Verified Code Entry ............................................................................................ 100 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features................................................... 101 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ...................................................................... 101 Conversation Features..................................................................................... 107 Hands-free Operation ......................................................................................... 107 Off-Hook Monitor ................................................................................................ 108 Mute.................................................................................................................... 109 Headset Operation ............................................................................................. 110 Data Line Security .............................................................................................. 111 Flash/Recall/Terminate....................................................................................... 112 External Feature Access (EFA) .......................................................................... 113 Trunk Call Limitation........................................................................................... 114 Parallelled Telephone......................................................................................... 115 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .................................................... 117 Transferring Features ...................................................................................... 118 Call Transfer ....................................................................................................... 118 Holding Features .............................................................................................. 120 Call Hold ............................................................................................................. 120 Call Park ............................................................................................................. 122 Call Splitting........................................................................................................ 123 Music on Hold..................................................................................................... 124 Conference Features........................................................................................ 125 Conference Features—SUMMARY.................................................................... 125 Conference ......................................................................................................... 126 Privacy Release.................................................................................................. 127 Paging Features................................................................................................ 128 Paging ................................................................................................................ 128 Optional Device Features ................................................................................ 131 Doorphone Call................................................................................................... 131 Door Open .......................................................................................................... 132 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS).......................................................... 133 Background Music (BGM) .................................................................................. 134 Outgoing Message (OGM) ................................................................................. 135 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ................................................................. 137 Feature Guide 1.15 1.15.1 1.15.2 1.16 1.16.1 1.16.2 1.17 1.17.1 1.17.2 1.17.3 1.17.4 1.18 1.18.1 Caller ID Features..............................................................................................144 Caller ID ..............................................................................................................144 Incoming Call Log ...............................................................................................148 Message Features .............................................................................................150 Message Waiting.................................................................................................150 Absent Message .................................................................................................151 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ..............................................................152 Fixed Buttons ......................................................................................................152 Flexible Buttons...................................................................................................156 LED Indication.....................................................................................................158 Display Information .............................................................................................160 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ......................161 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY ..................................161 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol ...................................................................... 165 Advice of Charge (AOC).................................................................................................. 166 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP).......................................................................... 167 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)............................................................................. 169 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN............................................................................................ 170 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN........................................................................................... 171 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)................................... 172 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)................................................................................. 174 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)............................................................. 175 ISDN Extension ............................................................................................................... 176 1.19 1.19.1 1.20 1.20.1 1.21 1.21.1 1.21.2 1.21.3 1.22 1.22.1 1.22.2 1.22.3 1.22.4 1.22.5 1.23 1.23.1 1.23.2 1.24 1.24.1 1.24.2 1.24.3 1.24.4 1.24.5 1.25 1.25.1 1.25.2 1.26 1.26.1 E1 Line Service Features..................................................................................178 E1 Line Service ...................................................................................................178 T1 Line Service Features..................................................................................180 T1 Line Service ...................................................................................................180 Voice Mail Features...........................................................................................182 Voice Mail (VM) Group........................................................................................182 Voice Mail DTMF Integration...............................................................................185 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration ....................................................................191 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features ...................................................195 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Connection....................................................195 DWX Ring Group ................................................................................................196 DWX Directory ....................................................................................................198 DWX Feature Buttons .........................................................................................199 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode ...............................................................................200 Administrative Information Output Features..................................................201 SMDR..................................................................................................................201 Charge Metre ......................................................................................................206 Extension Controlling Features.......................................................................209 Personal Password .............................................................................................209 Personal Programme Clear.................................................................................210 Walking Extension...............................................................................................211 Timed Reminder..................................................................................................212 Remote Extension Control by User.....................................................................213 Audible Tone Features .....................................................................................214 Dial Tone.............................................................................................................214 Confirmation Tone...............................................................................................215 Networking Features.........................................................................................216 TIE Line Service..................................................................................................216 Feature Guide 7 1.26.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN) ............................................................................ 235 1.26.3 QSIG Network .................................................................................................... 237 1.26.4 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network...................................................... 239 2 System Configuration and Administration Features ............. 241 2.1 2.1.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 3 System Configuration—Hardware .................................................................. 242 Extension Port Configuration.............................................................................. 242 System Configuration—Software ................................................................... 243 Class of Service (COS) ...................................................................................... 243 Group.................................................................................................................. 244 Tenant Service ................................................................................................... 247 Time Service....................................................................................................... 250 Operator Features .............................................................................................. 254 Manager Features .............................................................................................. 255 System Data Control ........................................................................................ 256 PC Programming ................................................................................................ 256 PT Programming ................................................................................................ 258 Automatic Setup ................................................................................................. 259 Quick Setup ........................................................................................................ 260 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ................................................................ 261 Floating Extension .............................................................................................. 266 Software Upgrading............................................................................................ 267 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics ............................................................................ 268 Power Failure Transfer ....................................................................................... 268 Power Failure Restart......................................................................................... 269 Local Alarm Information...................................................................................... 270 Programming Instructions ....................................................... 273 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.10 3.2.11 3.2.12 3.3 Introduction....................................................................................................... 274 PC Programming .............................................................................................. 275 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 281 System................................................................................................................ 326 Group.................................................................................................................. 349 Line..................................................................................................................... 359 Feature ............................................................................................................... 371 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) ...................................................... 377 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ...................................................................... 378 Private Network .................................................................................................. 380 Incoming Call...................................................................................................... 381 Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 385 Software Version ................................................................................................ 389 Password Change .............................................................................................. 390 PT Programming............................................................................................... 391 Date & Time..................................................................................................................... 394 System Speed Dialling Number....................................................................................... 394 System Speed Dialling Name .......................................................................................... 394 Extension Number ........................................................................................................... 394 Extension Name .............................................................................................................. 394 Personal Password.......................................................................................................... 395 Operator Assignment....................................................................................................... 395 Console and Paired Telephone Assignment ................................................................... 395 8 Feature Guide Absent Message.............................................................................................................. 395 Charge Margin................................................................................................................. 395 Charge Tax...................................................................................................................... 395 Charge Rate per Unit ...................................................................................................... 396 Flexible Numbering ......................................................................................................... 397 Time Service Switching Mode ......................................................................................... 397 Time Service Start Time .................................................................................................. 397 Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment ................................................................... 397 System Password for Dealer ........................................................................................... 397 System Password for User .............................................................................................. 398 Manager Password ......................................................................................................... 398 Verified Code Number ..................................................................................................... 398 Verified Code Name ........................................................................................................ 398 Verified Code Password .................................................................................................. 398 Verified Code COS Number ............................................................................................ 398 Decimal Point for Currency ............................................................................................. 398 Currency .......................................................................................................................... 399 Main Processor Software Reference............................................................................... 399 Hold Recall Time ............................................................................................................. 400 Transfer Recall Time ....................................................................................................... 400 Intercept Time ................................................................................................................. 400 Hot Line Waiting Time ..................................................................................................... 400 Automatic Redial Repeat Times ...................................................................................... 400 Automatic Redial Interval ................................................................................................ 400 Door Open Duration Time ............................................................................................... 401 Call Duration Count Start Time ....................................................................................... 401 DISA Delayed Answer Time ............................................................................................ 401 DISA Extend Time ........................................................................................................... 401 DISA Intercept Time ........................................................................................................ 401 TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling ............................................................ 402 TRS/Barring Denied Code............................................................................................... 402 Exception Code ............................................................................................................... 402 Special Carrier Access Code .......................................................................................... 402 Emergency Dialling Number............................................................................................ 402 ARS Mode ....................................................................................................................... 402 ARS Leading Digits ......................................................................................................... 403 ARS Routing Plan Number.............................................................................................. 403 ARS Exception Number .................................................................................................. 403 ARS Routing Plan Time Table ........................................................................................ 403 ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) Assignment .................................................................. 403 ARS Carrier Name .......................................................................................................... 403 ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access............................................................... 404 ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code ................................................................ 404 ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code ................................................................. 404 Trunk Connection ............................................................................................................ 405 Trunk Name..................................................................................................................... 405 Trunk Group .................................................................................................................... 405 Trunk Access Number Reference ................................................................................... 405 LCOT Dialling Mode ........................................................................................................ 405 LCOT Pulse Speed ......................................................................................................... 406 LCOT DTMF Duration ..................................................................................................... 406 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing ................................................................ 406 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming ................................................................ 406 LCOT Reverse Circuit ..................................................................................................... 406 LCOT Pause Time........................................................................................................... 406 Feature Guide 9 LCOT Flash Time ............................................................................................................ 407 LCOT Disconnect Time ................................................................................................... 407 BRI Automatic Configuration ........................................................................................... 407 BRI DIL/DID/MSN Selection ............................................................................................ 407 BRI Subscriber Number................................................................................................... 407 BRI Port Type .................................................................................................................. 407 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode................................................................................................. 407 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode................................................................................................. 408 BRI Configuration ............................................................................................................ 408 BRI TEI Mode .................................................................................................................. 408 BRI Network Type ........................................................................................................... 408 BRI Extension Tone......................................................................................................... 408 DIL 1:1 Destination .......................................................................................................... 408 DID Number..................................................................................................................... 409 DID Name ........................................................................................................................ 409 DID Destination ............................................................................................................... 409 Trunk Group Intercept Destination .................................................................................. 409 Host PBX Access Code ................................................................................................... 409 Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration Time ........................................................................... 409 Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Time .................................................................................. 410 DISA Silence Detection ................................................................................................... 410 DISA Continuous Tone Detection.................................................................................... 410 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection ............................................................................................ 410 Caller ID Signal Type....................................................................................................... 410 Pay Tone Signal Type ..................................................................................................... 410 Outgoing Trunk Group Number ....................................................................................... 411 TRS/Barring Level ........................................................................................................... 411 Trunk Call Duration Limitation ......................................................................................... 411 Call Transfer on Trunk Calls ............................................................................................ 411 Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls ....................................................................................... 411 Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................. 412 Executive Busy Override Deny ........................................................................................ 412 DND Override .................................................................................................................. 412 Account Code Mode ........................................................................................................ 412 Speed Dialling TRS/Barring Level ................................................................................... 412 Extension Lock TRS/Barring Level .................................................................................. 412 Manager Assignment....................................................................................................... 412 Door Open Assignment ................................................................................................... 413 Time Service Switching Mode ......................................................................................... 413 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone ......................................................... 413 Programming Mode Level ............................................................................................... 413 XDP Assignment ............................................................................................................. 414 VPS/DSS Console/PC Console Assignment ................................................................... 414 Class of Service............................................................................................................... 414 Extension Group Assignment .......................................................................................... 414 Extension Intercept Destination ....................................................................................... 414 Call Forwarding—No Answer Time ................................................................................. 415 CLIP/COLP Number Assignment .................................................................................... 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number ...................................................... 415 Delayed Ringing .............................................................................................................. 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number ........................................ 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name .......................................................................... 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Type ............................................................................ 416 Overflow Destination on Time Out................................................................................... 416 Overflow Time Assignment.............................................................................................. 416 10 Feature Guide Overflow Destination by Busy ......................................................................................... 416 Queuing Call Limit ........................................................................................................... 416 Queuing Hurry-up Level .................................................................................................. 417 Queuing Time Table Number .......................................................................................... 417 Queuing Time Table ........................................................................................................ 417 Maximum Number of Agents ........................................................................................... 417 Paging Group for Extension Group ................................................................................. 417 Paging Group for External Pager .................................................................................... 418 Pickup Group for Extension Group.................................................................................. 418 VM Group Floating Extension Number............................................................................ 418 Idle Extension Hunting Type ........................................................................................... 418 Hunting Floating Extension Number................................................................................ 418 DWX (Digital Wireless Extension) Registration ............................................................... 419 DWX Termination ............................................................................................................ 420 DWX PIN Registration ..................................................................................................... 420 External Pager Floating Extension Number .................................................................... 421 Music Source Selection for Port 2 ................................................................................... 421 Music Source Selection for Call Hold .............................................................................. 421 Music Source Selection for Transfer ............................................................................... 421 Doorphone Call Destination ............................................................................................ 421 Door Number Reference ................................................................................................. 421 Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number .................................................. 422 Outgoing Message (OGM) Name.................................................................................... 422 DISA Security Mode ........................................................................................................ 422 New Line ......................................................................................................................... 423 Baud Rate ....................................................................................................................... 423 Data Bits .......................................................................................................................... 423 Parity ............................................................................................................................... 423 Stop Bits .......................................................................................................................... 423 SMDR Port ...................................................................................................................... 423 SMDR Page Length ........................................................................................................ 424 SMDR Skip Perforation ................................................................................................... 424 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing .......................................................................................... 424 SMDR Incoming Call Printing .......................................................................................... 424 Remote Programming Assignment ................................................................................. 424 Modem Floating Extension Number ................................................................................ 424 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number ...................................................................... 424 Slot Card Type Reference ............................................................................................... 425 Slot Card Deletion ........................................................................................................... 425 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference ................................................................................ 425 OPB3 Option Card Deletion ............................................................................................ 425 4 Index .......................................................................................... 427 Feature Guide 11 12 Feature Guide Section 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 13 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY Description Incoming calls via a trunk (public line) are distributed to their destination using a suitable distribution feature. 1. Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned its networking type: Public, Private, or VPN (Virtual Private Network). Networking Type Trunk Card Type Channel Type Public (DIL/DID/ DDI/MSN) LCOT T1 E1 E&M BRI/PRI L-CO G-CO DID TIE (E & M) OPX (EXTN.) DR2 E & M-C E & M-P E & M-C E & M-P CO EXTN. Q-SIG-Master Q-SIG-Slave IP-GW Note: *1 *2 14 Feature Guide : : : Enable (default), : Enable, : Disable 1.26.1 TIE Line Service 1.26.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Private (TIE)*1 Virtual Private Network (VPN)*2 1.1 Incoming Call Features 2. Distribution Feature One of the following features can be assigned to each trunk port: Feature Description Details in Direct In Line (DIL) Directs a call to a preprogrammed single destination (e.g., Operator). Direct Inward Dialling (DID) Directs a call with a DID number from a DID line to a preprogrammed destination. • Direct In Line (DIL) Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) • Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/ Direct Dialling Directs a call with a DDI number from an ISDN Inward (DDI) line to a preprogrammed destination. Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to • Multiple a preprogrammed destination. Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 3. Destination Change with the Caller’s Identification Number The Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL/ DID/DDI/MSN features Feature Description Details in Calling Line Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller’s • Calling Line Identification identification number has been assigned to the Identification (CLI) Distribution Caller ID Table. (CLI) Distribution 4. Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Trunk Card Type LCOT T1 E1 E&M BRI PRI Note: Feature DIL DID DDI MSN Channel Type L-CO G-CO DID TIE (E & M) DR2 E & M-C E & M-P E & M-C E & M-P CO CO : Enable (default), : Enable, : Disable Feature Guide 15 1.1 Incoming Call Features 5. Available Destination Destination Availability Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group (DTMF/DPT) External Pager (TAFAS) DISA Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) 6. Intercept Routing After distribution, the following features may be required. Feature Intercept No Answer Routing (IRNA) Busy/DND Description Details in If a called party does not answer a call within • Intercept Routing a preprogrammed period time (Intercept time), it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination. If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination. No If a destination is not assigned, the call is Destination redirected to the operator. • Intercept Routing—No Destination 7. Call Blocking Feature Feature Description Details in • Collect Call Collect Call Block Rejects collect calls via the specified trunk card. Block (only for Brazil) 16 Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features Direct In Line (DIL) Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination. Each trunk has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). [Method Flowchart] A trunk call is received. Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode? No Yes CLI works. Yes Is the CLI destination assigned? No Is the DIL destination of the time mode assigned? No Yes The call is routed to the CLI destination. The call is routed to the DIL destination. The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing —No Destination). *: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution: If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table, the call will not be routed to the DIL destination, but routed to the CLI destination. Feature Guide 17 1.1 Incoming Call Features [Programming Example of DIL Table] The table can be programmed for each trunk. Trunk No. *1 *2 Tenant No.*1 CLI Day Lunch Destination*2 Break Night Day Lunch Break 01 1 Enable Disable Enable Disable 101 100 101 100 02 1 Enable Disable Disable Disable 102 100 102 100 : : : : : : : : : : : The time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the programmed tenant is applied to the trunk. : DIL 1:1 Destination Explanation: If a trunk call is received from trunk 01; In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination. In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DIL destination, extension 100. 18 Night Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID/DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. Each DID/DDI number has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night). DID and DDI are programmed the same way. The difference between DID and DDI is as follows: Feature Description Hardware Requirement Direct Inward Dialling (DID) DID number is received using a DID line. E1 or T1 Card Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) DDI number is received using an ISDN BRI or PRI Card line. Point-to-point must be selected for the ISDN configuration ( BRI Configuration). Feature Guide 19 1.1 Incoming Call Features [Method Flowchart] A trunk call is received. Is the DID/DDI number found in the DID/DDI table? No The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing—No Destination). Yes Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode? No Yes CLI works. Yes Is the CLI destination assigned? No Is the DID/DDI destination for the time mode assigned? No Yes The call is routed to the CLI destination. The call is routed to the DID/DDI destination. The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing—No Destination). *: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution: If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table, the call will not be routed to the DID/DDI destination, but routed to the CLI destination. 20 Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features [Programming Example of DID/DDI Table] DID and DDI use the same table. Locat ion DID/DDI No.*1 Tena nt No.*2 CLI Day DID/DDI Destination*3 Lunc Brea Nigh Lun Bre Nig Day h k t ch ak ht DID/DDI Name*4 0001 123-4567 1 Enab Disa Enab Disa 105 100 105 100 John White le ble le ble 0002 123-2468 1 Enab Disa le ble Disa ble Disa 102 100 102 100 Tom Smith ble 0003 123-456 1 Enab Disa le ble Disa ble Disa 101 101 101 100 A company ble : DID Number : The time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the programmed tenant is applied to the DID/ DDI number. *3: DID Destination *4: DID Name *1 *2 Explanation: If the DID/DDI number is "123-4567": 1. Checks the number in the table. Matches the number in location 0001. 2. Checks the time mode. In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination. In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DID/DDI destination, extension 100. The Inter-digit Time: When the Inter-digit time expires, the PBX stops receiving DID/DDI number and starts to check the DID/DDI table. Even if the Inter-digit time does not expire, the PBX stops receiving the DID/DDI number when the received number is found in the DID/DDI table. The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination. If the received number matches several DID/DDI numbers in the table, the DID/DDI number of the lowest numbered location has priority. [Example] If a call is received in Lunch mode; Received Number Destination Explanation 123-4567 Extn. 100 The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving "7". So the call is routed to extension 100. 123-456 Extn. 101 The Inter-digit time expired after receiving "6". The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table. So the call is routed to extension 101. Feature Guide 21 1.1 Incoming Call Features Conditions • • To use the DID or DDI service, "DID" or "DDI" must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method ( BRI DIL/DID/MSN Selection *For BRI only). DID/DDI Number Modification It is possible to modify a received DID/DDI number, which may be convenient when programming the DID/DDI table. Modification method (removed digit/added number) can be programmed on a trunk port basis. [Modification Example] Removed digit: 6 Modified DID/DDI number: 876543 21 = 1021 Added number: 10 Received DID/DDI number: 87654321 1) Remove the first 6 digits. 22 Feature Guide 2) Add "10". 1.1 Incoming Call Features Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line call with an MSN to a preprogrammed destination. One ISDN-BRI port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs. Each MSN has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Point-to-multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration ( BRI Configuration). [Method Flowchart] A trunk call is received. Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table? Yes Is the MSN found in the MSN table? Yes Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode? No The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing—No Destination). No The call is ignored. No Yes CLI works. Yes Is the CLI destination assigned? No Is the MSN destination for the time mode assigned? No Yes The call is routed to the CLI destination. The call is routed to the MSN destination. The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing—No Destination). *: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution: If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table, the call will not be routed to the MSN destination, but routed to the CLI destination. Feature Guide 23 1.1 Incoming Call Features [Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1] A table can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations. Tena nt No.* CLI MSN Destination MSN Name Locat ion MSN 01 1234567 1 Enab Disa Enab Disa le ble le ble 101 100 101 100 A Company 02 1232468 3 Enab Disa le ble : : : : 10 : : : Day Lunc Brea Nigh Day h k t Lun Brea Nigh ch k t Disa ble Disa ble 102 100 102 100 C Company : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : *: The time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the programmed tenant is applied to the MSN. Explanation: If the MSN "123-4567" is received from BRI port 1: 1. Checks the number in the table. Matches the number in location 01. 2. Checks the time mode. In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination. In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to MSN destination, extension 100. Conditions • • To use the MSN service, "MSN" must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method ( BRI DIL/DID/MSN Selection). MSN Modification It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter, which may be convenient when programming the MSN table. Modification method (removed digit/added number) can be programmed on a trunk port basis. [Modification Example] Removed digit: 6 Added number: 10 Received MSN: 87654321 • 24 Feature Guide Modified MSN: 876543 21 = 1021 1) Remove the first 6 digits. 2) Add "10". When using point-to-multipoint configuration with a BRI, do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX. As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI, the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels. 1.1 Incoming Call Features Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution Description Directs an incoming trunk call to a destination when the caller’s identification number (e.g., Caller ID) matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table which is used as the Caller ID Table. Each Caller ID (System Speed Dialling) number can have its own destination. CLI Feature Description Details in Caller ID Caller’s number is sent from an analogue trunk. • 1.15.1 Caller ID Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) Caller’s number is sent from an ISDN line. • Calling/ Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Caller’s number is sent from an E1 or T1 line. • 1.19.1 E1 Line Service • 1.20.1 T1 Line Service CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods: a) b) c) d) DIL DID DDI MSN Ringing Service Each trunk (for DIL) and the DID/DDI/MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When the call has its Caller ID and the CLI is enabled for the time mode, the call will be handled by the CLI method. [Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI] *1 *2 Location (Speed Dialling No.) System Speed Dialling No.*1 System Speed Dialling Name*2 CLI Destination 000 901234567890 ABC Company 200 001 : : : : : : : : : System Speed Dialling Number System Speed Dialling Name Feature Guide 25 1.1 Incoming Call Features Explanation: If the caller’s number is "123-456-7890" (The Trunk Access number is disregarded.): 1. Checks the number in the table. Matches the number in location 000. 2. The call is routed to the CLI destination, extension 200. Conditions • • 26 Feature Guide The Speed Dialling Number Table assigned by each tenant is applied. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification: The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number Modification. ( 1.15.1 Caller ID) 1.1 Incoming Call Features Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls. There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows: Feature Description Intercept Routing—No If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed Answer (IRNA) time period (Intercept time) ( Intercept Time), it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination. Intercept Routing— Busy/DND If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination. The available intercept destination is as follows: Type 1: The destination assigned on the extension port which the original destination joins. ( Extension Intercept Destination) Type 2: The destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call. ( Trunk Group Intercept Destination) Original Destination The Available Intercept Destination Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Type 1 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Type 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works ( Overflow Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY). The overflow destination is assigned on the incoming call distribution group which the original destination joins ( Overflow Destination on Time Out). DWX Ring Group Type 2 VM Group (DTMF/DPT) Type 2 External Pager (TAFAS) Type 2 DISA Type 2* Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Type 2 Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Not available Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Not available Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Type 2 Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) Not available Feature Guide 27 1.1 Incoming Call Features *: This is applied only when the call does not reach the DISA line (e.g., busy), in other words, when it does not reach the destination (e.g., extension) by using the DISA feature. Once the call reaches the destination by using the DISA feature, the Intercept Routing feature of the destination works. Each of them can have different intercept destinations for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night). [Available Intercept Destination] Intercept Destination Availability Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group (DTMF/DPT) External Pager (TAFAS) DISA Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) Conditions • Intercept Routing—Busy/DND on/off Each Intercept Routing—Busy and Intercept Routing—DND can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, one of the following is activated depending on the trunk card type which a call arrives through: a) LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Card: The call will be sent back to the original destination. b) Other Trunk Cards: Busy tone will be sent to the caller. • If the intercept destination cannot receive the call: a) Intercept Routing—No answer: Intercept timer will restart at the original destination, until the call is answered. b) Intercept Routing—Busy/DND: The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Card. When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear busy tone. 28 Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features Intercept Routing—No Destination Description Provides automatic redirection of an incoming trunk call which does not have a destination assigned. The intercept destination is an operator (tenant/PBX) ( Operator Assignment *For PBX operator only). Conditions • • • Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, reorder tone will be sent to the caller. However, the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature always works for calls through the LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Card even when disabled. If an operator (tenant/system) is not assigned: The lowest jack numbered extension will be the intercept destination. Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to: Calls from doorphones. Feature Guide 29 1.1 Incoming Call Features Collect Call Block (only for Brazil) Description A collect call is rejected if the destination is assigned to reject the collect call on a COS basis. This service is only provided with the following trunk cards: Type 1: The service works when a collect call is received. Type 2: The service works when a collect call is answered. Type Type 1 Trunk Card Type Description E1* A collect call is rejected before it arrives at the destination. Only assignment on a COS basis for the destination is required. LCOT A collect call is rejected by sending the Collect Call Blocking (flash) signal after going off-hook. It is required to enable the Collect Call Block mode to each trunk group first. Assignment on a COS basis for the destination is also required. If the telephone company does not support this service, do not enable the Collect Call Block mode, or normal calls are also disconnected. E1* Type 2 *: When the trunk card type is the E1 Card, Type 1 or Type 2 depends on the service of the telephone company. [Available Destination] The destinations which can receive collect calls are as follows: COS programming determines to enable or disable accepting collect calls (disable: Collect Call Block mode). Destination Receiving Collect Calls Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Required COS Assignment COS for each extension Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) 30 Incoming Call Distribution Group COS for each incoming call distribution group DWX Ring Group – VM Group (DTMF/DPT) – External Pager (TAFAS) – DISA – Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance No COS assignment required Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. – – Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. – – Feature Guide 1.1 Incoming Call Features Destination Receiving Collect Calls Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) Required COS Assignment COS for each trunk group of the destination – – Conditions [General] • • The availability of this feature is depending on the service of the telephone company. The COS assignment of the first target destination, not the answered extension, will be effective. [LCOT/DID/E1] • The Flash Signal Start time and the duration are programmable. Feature Guide 31 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY Description The following incoming calls reach their destination: Feature Description Details in Intercom Call A call from one extension to another. • 1.5.6 Intercom Call Doorphone Call When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination, the recipient can talk to the visitor. • 1.14.1 Doorphone Call [Available Destination] The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night) on a doorphone port basis ( Doorphone Call Destination). Calling from Destination Extension Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group (DTMF/DPT) External Pager (TAFAS) DISA Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) 32 Feature Guide Doorphone 1.1 Incoming Call Features Internal Call Block Description Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis. Each COS of the caller can enable or disable this feature for each COS of the called party. [Programming Example] Called Party Caller COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 ... : : : : COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 : Explanation: a) COS 1 can make calls to all extensions. b) COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only. (COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2) c) COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only. COS 1 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 COS 2 Extn. 102 COS 3 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Conditions • • Restricted extension numbers cannot be the parameter of the feature settings (e.g., Walking Extension). All extensions can make an Operator Call regardless of the Internal Call Block. Feature Guide 33 1.1 Incoming Call Features 1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY Description Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows: Type Feature Description Details in Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern Selection A telephone rings when receiving a call. The • Ring Tone ring tone patterns can be changed for each Pattern incoming call type. Selection Voice-Calling Alternate Receiving— Ring/Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming. LED (LED: Light Emitting Diode) LED Indication The light shows line conditions with a variety • 1.17.3 of light patterns. LED Indication Display (Caller’s Information) Display Information The display shows the caller’s information. • 1.5.6 Intercom Call • 1.17.4 Display Information External Pager Trunk Answer from Any Station (TAFAS) The external pager sends a ring tone when • 1.14.3 receiving a call. Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Tone/Voice during a Conversation A busy extension hears a tone, or voice from • Call the handset/built-in speaker indicating that Waiting another incoming call is waiting. Call Waiting Conditions • 34 Feature Guide Parallelled Telephone With a parallelled telephone connection, two extensions ring on one extension number. ( 1.9.9 Parallelled Telephone) 1.1 Incoming Call Features Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description A ring tone pattern can be selected for each incoming call type on a Ring Tone Pattern Table basis, which can be assigned for each extension. [Patterns] Ring Tone Pattern Telephone Type Single Double Triple S-Double* Option-1 Option-2 PT Cannot be changed. Refer to the [Ring Tone Patterns for a PT] below. Same as Single Same as Double SLT/T1-OPX Each pattern and its ringing cycle can be changed. DWX Can set the ringing pattern on the DWX based on the ring tone pattern from the PBX. *: S-Double can be assigned for call back ring only. [Ring Tone Patterns for a PT] 1 280 ms Single (Option 1) Double (Option 2) Triple S-Double [Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table] There are a specified number of programmable tables each of which allows the assignment of ring tone patterns for the following incoming call types: For trunk calls (including trunk call hold recalls) and doorphone calls, select ring tone patterns on a trunk group or a doorphone port basis. Intercom Table Call/Hold No. Recall Trunk Call/Hold Recall TRG1 TRG2 ... Doorphone Call Port 1 Port 2 1 Double Single Single 2 Single Double Double : : : : : : : Sens Alar Call LCS or m Back ... : : : : : Each extension can select one of the tables. Feature Guide 35 1.1 Incoming Call Features Conditions • 36 Feature Guide The "bell off" setting can be enabled or disabled for PT through system programming. If disabled, PT users cannot set the bell off. 1.1 Incoming Call Features Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting. The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type: a) b) c) d) Call Waiting Tone: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker Whisper OHCA: Voice from the handset Off: No notification. Notification Method Call Type DPT Other Telephone Intercom call Call Waiting tone/OHCA/ Call Waiting tone/Off Whisper OHCA/Off Trunk call* Call Waiting tone/Off *: Including a doorphone call, call from an incoming call distribution group, and a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold. This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling (BSS). Conditions • • • • • Call Waiting call for a VM group (DPT/DTMF) member is not available. Data Line Security Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. Call Waiting Tone A PT user can set different Call Waiting tones for each trunk call and intercom call through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). Caller Information With the Call Waiting tone, the caller’s information flashes on the display for five seconds at 15-second intervals. Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from your telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting. He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. For details, consult your telephone company. Visual Caller ID: With the Call Waiting tone from the telephone company, the Caller ID number can be received and flash on the display twice for five seconds at 15-second intervals. Feature Guide 37 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting Description If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming ( Hunting Floating Extension Number). Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Idle Extension Hunting Type). This feature is also known as Station Hunting. Type Circular Hunting Description An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way. Incoming call Busy Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Assigned order Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension. Incoming call Extn. Busy Extn. Extn. Extn. Assigned order Conditions • • 38 Feature Guide Idle Extension Hunting applies to: Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls to a single destination. An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group. 1.2 Receiving Group Features • If all the searched extensions are busy: The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group. [Available Destination] Destination Availability Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group (DTMF/DPT) External Pager (TAFAS) DISA Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) • FWD/DND Mode While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension which has set FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group. Feature Guide 39 1.2 Receiving Group Features 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY Description An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming ( Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number). An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number. Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy, the incoming calls can wait in a queue. Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls. Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension). Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with Diagramme A through F in the table are described in the following diagramme. A Group No. 1 2 3 : Floating Extn. No.*1 290 291 Group Name*2 Sales Engineering B Distribution Method*3 Ring UCD C Answering Agent*4 3 Max D Queuing Call*5 3 8 E Hurry-up Level*6 3 8 F Overflow Time*7 60 90 Overflow Destination*8 ... ... Night Day ... ... 100 100 ... ... 200 200 Tenant No.*9 1 5 : Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number : Incoming Call Distribution Group Name *3: Incoming Call Distribution Group Type *4: Maximum Number of Agents *5: Queuing Call Limit *6: Queuing Hurry-up Level *7 : Overflow Time Assignment *8 : Overflow Destination on Time Out/Overflow Destination by Busy *9 : Tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) and the music source (for Music on Hold) for each group. *1 *2 40 Feature Guide 1.2 Receiving Group Features Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1. 7 6 D Queuing Feature F Overflow Feature a) Sends busy tone (Busy on Busy), or b) Redirects to the overflow destination. 5 Three calls are waiting in a queue. 4 3 B Group Call Distribution Calls are distributed by the assigned method. (Only three extensions [agents] can answer the call for Busy on Busy C .) 2 1 E Manual Queue Redirection *10 The longest waiting call in a queue can be redirected to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button. The button shows the Hurryup status. Supervisor Extension*11 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Monitors or controls the incoming call distribution group status. Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 A Incoming Call Extn. 105 Log-in Extn. 105 Log-out *12 Distribution Group 1 (Floating extension no.: 290, Name: Sales) Queuing Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY *11 : Supervisory Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY *12 : Log-in/Log-out in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY *10 : 1. Group Call Distribution [ Group Call Distribution in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY] Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods: Distribution Method Description Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is received. Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched in the specified order. Ring All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously. 2. Queuing Feature [ Queuing Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY] If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can Feature Guide 41 1.2 Receiving Group Features be sent to the waiting callers. 3. VIP Call [ VIP Call in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY] It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that an incoming call can be received from the groups in priority order. 4. Overflow Feature [ Overflow Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY] A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued (Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group). It is also possible to send busy tone (Busy on Busy) or disconnect the line. 5. Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature Feature Description Details in Log-in/Log-out Member extensions can join the group to • Log-in/Loghandle calls (log-in) or leave the group out for a break (log-out). They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. Supervisory Incoming Feature Call Queue Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor various information about the incoming calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display. Log-in/Logout Monitor and Remote Control • Supervisory Feature Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the group members. Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members. Conditions • • • 42 Feature Guide One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups. G-DN button A Group Directory Number (G-DN) button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group. One extension can have more than one G-DN button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups (Multiple G-DN). If all G-DN buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the G-DN is not assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button. Even though an extension can have a G-DN button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension has not been programmed to be included through system programming ( Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number), the G-DN button will not receive calls to that group. Group FWD The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis. 1.2 Receiving Group Features Group Call Distribution Description The Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents) ( Maximum Number of Agents) are available to accept a call. When incoming calls exceed the number, the calls enter a queue ( Queuing Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY). 1. Distribution Method There are three distribution methods which can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group ( Incoming Call Distribution Group Type). Distribution Method Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Description Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the extension which received the last call. Received the last call. Extn. D Extn. C Extn. B Extn. A Starts searching from extn. B. (Skips extn. A.) Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group. 1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd .... Extn. B Extn. A Extn. C Extn. D Always starts searching from the first assigned extension. Ring All extensions in the group ring simultaneously. Delayed Ringing: Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group ( Delayed Ringing). The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set. Extn. A Extn. B Extn. C Rings immediately simultaneously. Extn. D Delayed Ringing: Rings after a specified time delay. Feature Guide 43 1.2 Receiving Group Features 2. Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting) When there are no available extensions in distribute in a group, the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature: • Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution method for waiting calls. • Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. ( Call Waiting in Section 1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features— SUMMARY) [How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates] Programming Conditions Result Group Call Group Call Waiting Mode Distribution Method Distribution UCD Priority Hunting Ring All UCD/Priority Hunting/ Ring Group Call Waiting Capable Distribution Method Telephone PT/DWX with UCD idle G-DN button Priority Hunting Any telephone Ring* *: Delayed Ringing is not available. [Example] • Group Call Waiting mode: All • Group call distribution method for idle extensions: UCD All extensions hear the Call Waiting tone (Ring). [G-DN Button for Group Call Waiting] The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method as follows: a) Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions (even when the extensions do not have G-DN buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call — additional calls will wait in a queue. b) UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle GDN button located on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type; UCD or Priority Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all G-DN buttons are occupied — additional calls will wait in a queue. Note In the method b), if an extension has only one G-DN button for an incoming call distribution group, the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension. 44 Feature Guide 1.2 Receiving Group Features Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 (Floating extension no.: 200) 3 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 (Floating extension no.: 300) 1 G-DN200 (Call Waiting) G-DN200 (Call Waiting) G-DN300 (Answering the Call) 3. No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method) If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No Answer time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member, the call queues at target extension until a group member becomes available. Conditions • • FWD/DND Extension System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring the extension which has FWD or DND feature set. If it rings, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature ( VIP Call in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY) and/or Wrap-up feature ( Log-in/Log-out in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY). Because to use the VIP Call feature and/or Wrap-up feature, Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off. Feature Guide 45 1.2 Receiving Group Features Queuing Feature Description When a preprogrammed number of extensions ( Maximum Number of Agents) in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can be in the waiting queue is programmable ( Queuing Call Limit). While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) ( Queuing Time Table Number). Each Queuing Time Table has a specified number of sequences. The following procedures are provided to make up a Queuing Time Table: [Procedure Table] Command Description OGM a Condition An outgoing message (OGM) a (01-64) is sent to the caller. b × 5 sec After the outgoing message (OGM), Music on Hold will be sent and redirects to the next sequence. Puts the caller in the waiting If an outgoing message (OGM) has not queue for b (01-16) × 5 seconds. been sent to the caller, the caller hears a ringback tone. If an outgoing message (OGM) has been sent to the caller, the caller hears Music on Hold. Seq c Redirects to sequence c (01-16). None Intercept Redirects to overflow destination. None Disconnect Disconnects the line. None None Redirects to the next sequence. (No command) If assigned on sequence 01, the Time Table will not be activated. [Programming Example of Queuing Time Table] Time Table No. Sequence*1 Seq.01 Seq.02 Seq.03 Seq.04 01 OGM 01 6 × 5 sec OGM 03 Overflow : : : : ... Seq.16*2 : : 02 03 : *1 *2 46 : Queuing Time Table : The call will be disconnected if the destination is not determined after sequence 16. Feature Guide 1.2 Receiving Group Features Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01: Queuing Time Table 01 Seq. 01 The call queues. Seq. 02 OGM 01 is sent. Thank you for calling Panasonic. The department you are calling is busy. Please hold the line. We will answer your call shortly. Music on Hold is sent for 30 seconds. Seq. 03 OGM 03 is sent. We are sorry to keep you holding. The department is still busy. We are transferring you to the operator. Seq. 04 Redirects to the overflow destination. Overflow destination answers. The call is connected to the member extension as soon as he answers the queued call. Conditions • • • If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time Table: Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires. Manual Queue Redirection It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button. (When the call is already ringing on any extension, the call is not redirected.) This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer. Hurry-up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable ( Queuing Hurry-up Level). The button shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue Off No queued call Red on One up to the assigned number for Hurry-up Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry-up Feature Guide 47 1.2 Receiving Group Features VIP Call Description It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order. Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority. When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly. [Example] In the call centre, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode. Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/DDI/CLI. (The number in the circle is the queuing order.) Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 (for VIP) 6 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 (for general customers) Incoming Call Distribution Group 3 (for special customers) 5 3 3rd Priority 1st Priority Extn. 101 Extn. 102 4 2 2nd Priority Incoming Call Distribution Group 4 (for general customers) 7 6 3rd Priority Extn. 103 Distribution order: 1 6 2 4 From: Group 1 Group 3 48 Feature Guide 3 6 5 7 Groups 2 and 4 1.2 Receiving Group Features Overflow Feature Description When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity ( Queuing Call Limit), they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features: 1) Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 2) Busy on Busy 1. Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group The Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions: a) b) c) d) e) There is no space in the waiting queue. The Queuing Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in. An Intercept command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table. The Overflow time ( Overflow Time Assignment) expires. Manual Queue Redirection is performed. [Available Destination] The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). The two different destinations can be assigned, one for the a) and b) ( Overflow Destination by Busy), and one for c), d), and e) ( Overflow Destination on Time Out). Destination Availability Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group (DTMF/DPT) External Pager (TAFAS) DISA Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) Feature Guide 49 1.2 Receiving Group Features 2. Busy on Busy The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing— Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions: a) There is no space in the Waiting queue. b) The Queuing Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in. [Example of a)] When the answering agent number ( Maximum Number of Agents) is "2", and the queuing call number ( Queuing Call Limit) is "0": There are five assistants in the shop. If two of them are engaged on the phone, the next caller will hear busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed. Conditions [Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group] • If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable: If the trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Card: The line is disconnected. If the call arrives through the other cards: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again. [Busy on Busy] • 50 Feature Guide If a trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Card, busy tone will not be sent to the caller. 1.2 Receiving Group Features Log-in/Log-out Description Incoming call distribution group members can join (log-in) or leave (log-out) the groups manually. They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls. Wrap-up: While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up time). While Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that he can make some report or etc. Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button. [Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example] <When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method> Incoming call Ready Log-in Waiting for a call Press the Wrap-up button. Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Ready Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Answering a call The Wrap-up time expires. Not Ready Making a report/ temporary break Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready After completing the call Press the Wrap-up button. Wrap-up Making a report Extn. 102 Log-out Conditions • • Generally, there should be at least one extension in a group that is logged-in. However, all extensions can log-out if permitted through system programming. Log-in/Log-out Button A flexible button can be customised as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters: Light Pattern Parameter Usage Red on No parameter Used with a G-DN button — Off — Specified incoming Used to log-in or log-out from the Log-out call distribution specified incoming call distribution group. Status group number Log-in Status Feature Guide 51 1.2 Receiving Group Features Light Pattern Parameter Usage Red on (All) • • Used to log-in or log-out from all incoming After Log- After Logcall distribution groups to which you out in belong. Operation Operation If a G-DN button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group. The light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button which includes the group number. Wrap-up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows: Light pattern • • • 52 Feature Guide Off Status Slow red flashing Wrap-up Red on Not Ready Off Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel) Automatic Log-out A member extension may be logged-out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups. It is possible to return to the log-in mode manually. Log-in/Log-out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members. ( Supervisory Feature in Section 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY) Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. ( 1.23.1 SMDR) 1.2 Receiving Group Features Supervisory Feature Description An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control the each member’s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6-line display PT. Feature Description Incoming Call Queue The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming Monitor call distribution group with the display. Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote Control Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members through the corresponding DSS button light. Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button. [Example] <Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display> 31 Jan. 08:13AM FRI 250:Sales Section Waiting Calls Now :00006 Max. Waiting Time :05'10 EXIT LOG --- Date and time --- Floating extension number/name of incoming call distribution group --- The number of queuing calls --- The longest queuing time SPRVS Since 29 JAN. 09:10AM --- Monitoring starting date and time Total Calls :00996 --- Total number of incoming calls Overflow Calls :00131 --- Total number of overflowed calls Lost Calls :00039 --- The number of lost calls Average Waiting :02'12 --- Average queuing time EXIT CLEAR <Log-in/Log-out Monitor/Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light> 31 Jan. 08:13AM FRI 250:Sales Section Waiting Calls Now :00006 Max. Waiting Time :05'10 With EXIT Log-in/Log-out Monitor DSS buttons of the incoming call distribution group members show their status. Log-in/Log-out Remote Control Pressing the button changes the status as follows: Lighting pattern Status Status Light pattern Green on Log-out Red on Log-in (Ready) Slow Green Flashing Log-in (Not Ready/Wrap-up) Red on Log-out Off Extension in another incoming call distribution group Log-in (Ready) Green on Feature Guide 53 1.2 Receiving Group Features Conditions • Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a) One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group, but it need not belong to the group. b) One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call • • • • 54 Feature Guide distribution group. Available Paired DSS Console The KX-T7640 is only available for this feature. Accumulation Value Clear Accumulation value (total incoming calls/total overflowed calls/lost calls/average queuing time) can be cleared manually. The date and time of clearing is saved and it is shown on the display (monitoring starting date and time). When the value exceeds 99999, before clearing, "****" will be shown. If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed: If the display is in idle status, it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically. If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group, it will not change. Other Features while in Monitor Mode The supervisor extension can use other features (making calls, pressing the MESSAGE button, etc.) even while in monitor mode. When each operation is finished, his telephone returns to the queue monitor display. 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features—SUMMARY Description When an extension user cannot answer calls (e.g., busy, not at the desk), it is possible to forward or refuse the calls using the following features: 1) Call Forwarding (FWD) 2) Do Not Disturb (DND) 1. FWD Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations. 2. DND An extension user can send the tone to let the caller know he is not available. Conditions • • • FWD and DND features apply to: Intercom calls (including doorphone calls), and trunk calls (including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold.) FWD/DND Button Both the FWD and DND features for the extension can be customised on a flexible button. Only one of the features will work at a time. Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customised on an extension. Group FWD Button The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button. Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension. [FWD/DND Button and Group FWD Button Types] Type FWD/DND for FWD/DND—Internal Extension FWD/DND—External FWD/DND—Both Group FWD—Internal FWD for Incoming Call Group FWD—External Distribution Group Group FWD—Both Description Works for incoming intercom calls Works for incoming trunk calls Works for all incoming calls Works for incoming intercom calls Works for incoming trunk calls Works for all incoming calls [Button Status] The FWD/DND button and Group FWD button show the current status as follows: The pattern can be changed through system programming. Feature Guide 55 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Light pattern Status (default) Red on FWD on Slow red flashing DND on Off FWD/DND off [Mode Change] When either the FWD or DND feature is assigned, pressing the FWD/DND button changes the on/off setting alternately. When both the features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the settings as follows: FWD 56 Feature Guide DND Off 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Call Forwarding (FWD) Description Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations. The circumstances under which the calls are forwarded are as follows: Type Circumstance All Calls Any time Follow Me: When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension. Busy When the extension user’s line is busy. No Answer When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time ( Call Forwarding—No Answer Time). Busy/No Answer When the extension user’s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time ( Call Forwarding—No Answer Time). Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls, it is possible to set different destination for each. Intercom Calls to Extension Extension Forwards to Another Extension Forwards to Outside Party Trunk Calls to Extension Available Forwarding Type: All Calls Busy No Answer Busy/No Answer Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercom Calls to Incoming Call Distribution Group Forwards to Another Extension Trunk Calls to Incoming Call Distribution Group Forwards to Outside Party Available Forwarding Type: All Calls Feature Guide 57 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features [Available Destination] Destination Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Availability Condition for Original Extension/Incoming Call Distribution Group Only available when FWD to extension is allowed through COS programming.* Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group – VM Group (DTMF/DPT) – External Pager (TAFAS) DISA Only available when access to the resource is allowed through COS programming. Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance – Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) – Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) – *: If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis ( Internal Call Block in Section 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY), the FWD feature to the extension does NOT work. Conditions [General] • • • • 58 Feature Guide FWD for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls The FWD feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user. FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD) COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature. FWD to Trunk COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally ( Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls). The original extension’s TRS/Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call. Trunk Call Duration If a call between an extension user and an outside party, or between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer ( Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration Time and Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Time]). If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. ( 1.9.8 Trunk Call Limitation) 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features • Multiple FWD Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD: a) FWD b) Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow c) Intercept Routing d) Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow Incoming call 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E F Original destination • Boss & Secretary feature It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting. Incoming call FWD—All Calls Call or transfer a call Boss (Orignal) • • Secretary (FWD destination) Message Waiting While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The MESSAGE button light turns on at the originally called extension. Idle Extension Hunting Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group. [All and Busy] • If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call: – Doorphone call – Trunk calls via the LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Cards [No Answer and Busy/No Answer] • No Answer Time The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension ( Call Forwarding—No Answer Time). [Follow Me] • This feature is only available when the original extension is allowed on a COS basis. Feature Guide 59 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Do Not Disturb (DND) Description An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension, but arrive at other extension by using the Idle Extension Hunting feature ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting) or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature ( Intercept Routing in Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY). When a destination cannot be found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone, while the calling outside party will hear busy tone. Conditions • • • • • • • • 60 Feature Guide DND for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls The DND feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user. DSS button in DND Mode The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND. DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS ( DND Override). Paging DND It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. Intercept Routing—Busy/DND If a call arrives at the extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature. Idle Extension Hunting While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension which has DND set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination. If (1) the trunk call via the LCOT or T1 (L-CO/G-CO) Card arrives at the extension in DND mode and (2) the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group, then the original extension in DND mode will ring. Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode. 1.4 Answering Features 1.4 Answering Features 1.4.1 Answering Features—SUMMARY Description An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods: Destination At the own extension (PT only) At another extension Feature Description Details in Line Preference— Incoming A user can select the line seized when going • Line off-hook. Preference —Incoming Direct Onetouch Answering A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the flashing button. Hands-free Answerback A user can receive a call automatically and • Hands-free establish a hands-free conversation. Answerback Call Pickup, Directed/Group A user can pick up a specified extension’s • Call Pickup call or a call in a specified call pickup group. – Feature Guide 61 1.4 Answering Features Line Preference—Incoming Description A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences: Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming). Type Description No Line Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off-hook. Prime Line Answers a call arriving at a Flexible CO, G-DN (on which the "prime line" is assigned) or the INTERCOM button simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously. Ringing Line (default) Answers the longest ringing call at the own telephone simply by going off-hook. Conditions [Prime Line] • 62 Feature Guide The priority of the incoming call is as follows: 1) The call arriving at a button on which the "prime line" is assigned. 2) The call arriving at the INTERCOM button. 1.4 Answering Features Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension. The following types are available: Type Picking up Call Type Directed A specified extension’s call. Group A call within a specified call pickup group. Call Pickup Deny: Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible. Conditions • • Call Pickup applies to: Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls Internal Call Block An extension which cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis ( Internal Call Block in Section 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY) also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions. [Call Pickup, Directed] • A user can also pick up a specified extension’s call (except an ISDN extension’s call) by pressing the corresponding DSS button. COS programming determines the extensions that can use this feature. [Call Pickup, Group] • A specified number of call pickup groups can be created ( Pickup Group for Extension Group), each of which consists of extension groups. One extension group can belong to several call pickup groups. Feature Guide 63 1.4 Answering Features Hands-free Answerback Description A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset. If the user receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is established in the following method: Type Answering Method Intercom Call Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone. Trunk Call* Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension hears a beep tone and the caller hears a confirmation tone. *: Including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold. Conditions • • • • • 64 Feature Guide Hands-free Answerback applies to: Intercom calls and trunk calls to a single destination, and incoming call distribution group calls in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method. Hands-free Answerback for Trunk Calls Personal programming is required to use this feature (Hands-free Answerback Selection—for Outside Calls). Secret Monitor The beep tone which the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system programming. Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from the caller. Hands-free Answerback with Headset The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset. 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.1 Predialling Description A display PT user can check and correct the number to be dialled on-hook. The call will be initiated after going off-hook. Feature Guide 65 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Description After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the call will be terminated by the PBX and the user will hear reorder tone. To make a call, the user must go back on-hook and then off-hook. This operation applies to intercom calls only. This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release. Conditions • This feature works in the following cases: When making an intercom call a) The first digit has not been dialled within a preprogrammed time period. b) After a digit is dialled, if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period. 66 Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.3 Line Preference—Outgoing Description A PT user can select the outgoing line he prefers to originate calls on, from the following line preferences, through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing): Feature Description Intercom When an extension user goes off-hook, an intercom line is selected automatically. Idle Line When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups. No Line When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. He must select the desired line to make a call. Prime Line When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, G-DN. Conditions • • Line Preference Override A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or Memory Dialling button (e.g., One-touch Dialling) before going off-hook. To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a COS basis ( Outgoing Trunk Group Number). Also trunk groups available for Idle Trunk Access should be assigned ( Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment). Feature Guide 67 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) Description If the line is busy when a call is made, callback ringing will inform the caller when the line becomes free using this feature. After the extension answers the callback ringing, the dialled number is automatically redialled. Conditions • • • • • 68 Feature Guide If the callback ringing is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, the callback is cancelled. If the extension hears busy tone before dialling the telephone number, only the trunk or trunk group is reserved. After answering the callback ringing, the extension should dial the telephone number. An extension can set only one feature at a time. Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously. However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension. The priority of the callback is the setting order. 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.5 Executive Busy Override Description Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call. Executive Busy Override Deny: It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user. Conditions • • • COS programming determines extension users who can use the Executive Busy Override ( Executive Busy Override) and set the Executive Busy Override Deny mode ( Executive Busy Override Deny). This feature does not work if the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security. This feature is not available for a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA. Feature Guide 69 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.6 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user. Conditions • • • • • Extension Number/Name Assignment Extension numbers ( Extension Number) and names ( Extension Name) are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and a name are shown on display PTs during intercom calls. Call Directory—Extension Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored numbers and/or names on the display. Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected. Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice A caller can change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may deny voice-calling. Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following: Type 70 Feature Guide Description Ringback Tone Indicates the called party is being called. Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice-calling. Busy Tone Indicates the called party is busy. DND Tone Indicates the called party has set DND. 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.7 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension— SUMMARY Description When attempting to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), an extension user can send call waiting indication to the busy extension (Call Waiting). The notification receiving method depends on the called extension’s personal setting and the telephone type: Notification Receiving Method Description Details in Call Waiting Tone Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy extension. • Call Waiting Tone Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Talk with the busy extension using the built-in • Off-Hook Call speaker and microphone of the called extension Announcement while the existing call is made using the handset. (OHCA) Whisper OHCA Give a message to the busy extension through the handset. • Whisper OHCA Conditions • • • Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone, OHCA, Whisper OHCA, or none of these. OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension. OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types. In such cases, the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension. Calling Extension’s OHCA COS Mode • • Called Extension’s Call Waiting Mode OFF ON Cancel Call Waiting Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA Disable Call Waiting disabled Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Enable Call Waiting disabled Call Waiting tone OHCA (or Call Waiting tone) Whisper OHCA (or Call Waiting tone) The notification receiving methods (Call Waiting tone, OHCA, and Whisper OHCA) are available when the called extension is having a conversation with other party. If not, the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension become available to receive the notification. Even while waiting, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone. If none of these notification receiving methods, Call Waiting tone, OHCA, or Whisper OHCA is set at the called party, the caller will hear reorder tone. Feature Guide 71 1.5 Making Call Features Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting. Conditions • • 72 Feature Guide This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone. Call Waiting tone can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). 1.5 Making Call Features Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Description An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built-in speaker and microphone of the called party’s PT. If the existing call is using a handset, a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties. Conditions • • • • COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature. This feature is available only when the called extension uses one of the following telephones: – KX-T7620, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636 – KX-T7536 – KX-T7436 – KX-T7235 (except KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE) If the KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE are connected to the PBX, the OHCA feature for the KX-T7235 should be disabled through system programming. If the OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or called extension’s telephone type, the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension. Feature Guide 73 1.5 Making Call Features Whisper OHCA Description An extension user can give a message to a busy extension through the handset. Conditions • • • • • 74 Feature Guide COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature. This feature is available only when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones: – KX-T7600 series – KX-T7500 series – KX-T7400 series (except KX-T7451) If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type, the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension. If the called extension does not use a KX-T7600, KX-T7500, or KX-T7400 series telephone but forces Whisper OHCA, the announcement may be heard by the other party. It is possible to enable the Whisper OHCA on any telephone. However, it may not work properly. (e.g., The voice may be heard by the other party.) 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.8 Trunk Access Description There are the following features to access a trunk. Feature Description Accessing method Idle Selects an idle trunk Dial the Idle Trunk Access number. Or automatically from the assigned press a L-CO button. trunk groups. Trunk Group Selects an idle trunk from the assigned trunk group. Individual Selects the desired trunk directly. Dial the Individual Trunk Access number. Or press the S-CO button. Dial the Trunk Group Access number. Or press a G-CO button. Conditions • • • COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls ( Outgoing Trunk Group Number). An Individual Trunk Access Number can be assigned on a trunk port basis ( Trunk Access Number Reference). Button Assignment A flexible button can be customised as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows: Type • • • Assignable parameter Loop-CO (L-CO) No parameter (All assigned trunk groups through system programming are applied.) Group-CO (G-CO) A trunk group is assigned. Single-CO (S-CO) A specified trunk is assigned. It is possible to assign trunks in the following ways: – The same trunk to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button – The same trunk group to more than one G-CO button – More than one L-CO button Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button according to the priority: S-CO G-CO L-CO Direct Trunk Access By pressing an idle CO button, it automatically switches on the hands-free operation mode and allows a user to use On-hook Dialling. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, or lift the handset. Group Hunting Order for Idle Trunk Access An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Trunk Access. If multiple trunk groups are available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming. Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Trunk Access and Trunk Group Access The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group; from lowest numbered trunk, from highest numbered trunk or rotation, can be determined through system programming. Feature Guide 75 1.5 Making Call Features • • 76 Feature Guide A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis ( Trunk Name) so that the operator or extension user can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach before answering. It is possible to identify the trunk port that has a trunk connected to it ( Trunk Connection). This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk which is not connected. 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.9 Emergency Call Description An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers ( Emergency Dialling Number) after seizing a trunk regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension. Conditions • • A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored (some may have default values). Emergency numbers may be called even when: – in Account Code—Forced mode – in any TRS/Barring levels – after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached – in Extension Lock Feature Guide 77 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.10 Account Code Entry Description An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the SMDR call record. Therefore, for example, the firm uses an account code for each client so that the firm can determine what calls were made for the client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client’s account code on the SMDR call record. There are two methods of entering account codes as follows: One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis ( Account Code Mode). Mode Description Option A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired. Forced A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk so as not to forget entering the code. Conditions • • • • • • • 78 Feature Guide An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling (e.g., One-touch Dialling). Account Button A flexible button can be customised as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time, while the feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk. Account code entry after receiving a disconnection signal from a trunk must be done while hearing reorder tone. Otherwise the SMDR call record is output and entry becomes impossible afterwards. If the account code is entered more than once, the code entered last is printed out in the SMDR. Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code. PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a conversation. Verified Code Entry To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purpose, a verified code is used. This code can be used at any extension. ( 1.7.6 Verified Code Entry) 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.11 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming ( LCOT Dialling Mode) regardless of originating extension (under contract with the telephone company). There are the following modes: Mode Description DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling. DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk. Pulse Dial (Rotary) The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling. Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk. Conditions • • • Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that the user can access special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. Conversion type can be selected. This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode. It is possible to select a pulse rate for the trunk port which has been set to Pulse mode ( LCOT Pulse Speed). There are two pulse rates; Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps). It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the trunk port which has been set to DTMF mode ( LCOT DTMF Duration). Feature Guide 79 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.12 Dial Tone Detection Description A dialled number is sent to the trunk after detecting the dial tone. If the preprogrammed Detection time expires, the trunk will be disconnected. Conditions • 80 Feature Guide This feature is enabled or disabled for each trunk. 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.13 Pause Insertion Description A preprogrammed Pause time ( LCOT Pause Time) will be inserted manually or automatically. Manual Insertion: Pressing the PAUSE button. Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted between the user-dialled codes below and the following digits. a) Host PBX Access code b) Special Carrier Access code c) Second Dial Tone Waiting code Conditions • • • • The Pause time is programmable for each trunk group. Pause can be stored in Memory Dialling. Pressing the PAUSE button while dialling a number inserts a pause for a preprogrammed time. When a preprogrammed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, pauses are inserted a preprogrammed number of times after the code. Feature Guide 81 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.14 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension ports of the host PBX to trunk ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code assigned through system programming ( Host PBX Access Code) is required to access the telephone company from the host PBX. The Trunk Access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of this PBX basis. A preprogrammed Pause time ( LCOT Pause Time) will be automatically inserted between the user-dialled Host PBX Access code and the following digits. ( 1.5.13 Pause Insertion). [Example] Telephone Company Host PBX Access Code: 0 Host PBX Outside Party (01-23-4567) Idle Trunk Access Code: 9 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Dials "0-01-23-4567". TRG1 Host PBX Access Code PBX Telephone No. Dials "9-0-01-23-4567". Idle Trunk Access No. Telephone No. Host PBX Access Code Dials "9-101". Idle Trunk Access No. Extn. No. of the Host PBX Note: "0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of this PBX. 82 Feature Guide 1.5 Making Call Features Conditions • • • TRS/Barring TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX. SMDR The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code can be recorded on the SMDR when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX. To record on the SMDR only long distance calls (not local calls) originated via the specific trunk group, assign the long distance call code as a Host PBX Access code to the trunk group. Feature Guide 83 1.5 Making Call Features 1.5.15 Special Carrier Access Code Description If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming ( Special Carrier Access Code) is required every time when a trunk call is made. A preprogrammed Pause time ( LCOT Pause Time) will be automatically inserted between the user-dialled Special Carrier Access code and the following digits. ( 1.5.13 Pause Insertion) Conditions • • 84 Feature Guide TRS/Barring TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code. If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX: A special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately: these codes cannot be assigned together as one code. 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6 Memory Dialling Features 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY Description An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the PBX system data. A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation. 1. Features Feature Storing Method Details in One-touch Dialling • • Last Number Redial (Outgoing Call Log) The last dialled telephone PBX Extension • Last number(s) is automatically stored. Data Number Redial Speed Dialling Personal • • System Personal Programming System Programming (PC Programming only) Storing Place Personal Programming Personal Operation with the Feature Number System Programming PBX Extension • One-touch Data Dialling PBX Extension • Speed Data Dialling— Personal/ System PBX System Data Quick Dialling System Programming PBX System Data Hot Line • • PBX Extension • Hot Line Data Incoming Call Log Incoming call information is automatically stored. Personal Programming Personal Operation with the Feature Number • Quick Dialling PBX Extension • 1.15.2 Data Incoming Call Log 2. Valid Input Input Display while Entering Description 0-9/ /# 0-9/ /# Stores the digits, and #. PAUSE (Pause) P Stores a pause by pressing the PAUSE button. FLASH/RECALL (Hooking)* F Stores a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number. Feature Guide 85 1.6 Memory Dialling Features Input Display while Entering Description INTERCOM (Secret)* [/] Conceals all or part of the number by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed. It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on the display and SMDR. TRANSFER (Transfer)* T Stores a transfer command by pressing the TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number (used only for a one-touch dialling). [Example] Storing "T + 305"= Transferring a call to extension 305. *: Available only when in the system/personal programming mode [Example] When storing the number "9-123-456-7890" and concealing all of numbers, Enter INTERCOM 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM . Notes • • It is possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number in the beginning of the Memory Dialling numbers. It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location. Conditions • 86 Feature Guide Trunk Access by Memory Dialling A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk, the stored Trunk Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk. 1.6 Memory Dialling Features One-touch Dialling Description A PT user can access a person or feature by one-touch. This is activated by storing the number (e.g., extension number, telephone number, or feature number) in a One-touch Dialling button. Conditions • • A flexible button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button. Full One-touch Dialling There is no need to go off-hook before pressing the One-touch Dialling button. Feature Guide 87 1.6 Memory Dialling Features Last Number Redial Description Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled to allow the same number to be dialled again. Automatic Redial: If Last Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, redialling will be automatically repeated a preprogrammed number of times ( Automatic Redial Repeat Times) at preprogrammed intervals ( Automatic Redial Interval). The redial call noanswer ring duration is programmable. This feature is only available for PT users with the SP-PHONE button. Outgoing Call Log: The last ten dialled numbers are automatically stored at each extension. A display PT user can redial easily any of the stored numbers. Conditions • • • • • 88 Feature Guide The memorised telephone number is replaced by a new one. If any dialling operation is done or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial, Automatic Redial is cancelled. Automatic Redial is not available for some countries/areas when using an analogue trunk. Interrupt Redial When the called party or the seized trunk is busy, it is possible to press the REDIAL button continuously until the called party or the trunk becomes idle. There is no need to go offhook, before pressing the REDIAL button. It is possible to select the trunk to be used for redialling: idle line or the line previously used, through system programming. 1.6 Memory Dialling Features Speed Dialling—Personal/System Description An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data, or the PBX system data ( System Speed Dialling Number). Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling. Conditions [General] • • Any number (e.g., telephone number, feature number) can be stored in a speed dialling number. A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number, and System Speed Dialling number ( System Speed Dialling Name). Call Directory—Speed Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored numbers and/or names on the display. [Personal Speed Dialling] • • Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent other users from viewing the number. In this case, the Incoming Call Log information display is also locked. A Personal Password is required to use this feature. Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dialling The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO/STORE button. In this case, the extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number. [System Speed Dialling] • • TRS/Barring Override for System Speed Dialling It is possible to override the TRS/Barring using the System Speed Dialling ( Speed Dialling TRS/Barring Level). Memory Division for Tenant Each tenant can share the memory as desired through system programming. ( 2.2.3 Tenant Service) Feature Guide 89 1.6 Memory Dialling Features Quick Dialling Description An extension user can access a person or feature easily. This is enabled by storing the number (e.g., extension number, telephone number or feature number) for Quick Dialling. Conditions • Quick Dialling is convenient in the following cases: a) Room service calls in a hotel b) Calling another branch via the public network. The extension user needs to dial only • • the extension number of another branch. Quick Dialling number follows the flexible numbering plan. ( 2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering) The storing example is as follows: Location No. 90 Feature Guide Quick Dialling No. Desired Number Quick Dialling 01 110 9110 (Trunk Call) Quick Dialling 02 5 5001 (Room Service) Quick Dialling 03 2011 90123456789 (Another Branch) : : : 1.6 Memory Dialling Features Hot Line Description An extension user can make an outgoing call by only going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number or the extension number. If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone is generated for a specified Waiting time assigned through system programming ( Hot Line Waiting Time) and then dialling starts. During the Waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature. This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling. Conditions • Capable Telephone PT, SLT, and T1-OPX Feature Guide 91 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Description TRS/Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming. It is applied when the user goes off-hook, a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk. Each COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night). There are seven levels available. Level 1 is the highest level and the level 7 is the lowest. That is, level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls. Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables. Denied Code Tables An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables. If the leading digits of the dialled number (not including the Trunk Access number) are not found in the table, the call is made. There are five Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively. Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited. These numbers are defined as denied codes. Exception Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made. There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively. Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes. These numbers are defined as exception codes. TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling If the call is made using System Speed Dialling, the call can override the TRS/Barring. Each COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for System Speed Dialling ( TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling). Once this feature is set, it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling. Any extension which sets Extension Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling. 92 Feature Guide 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features TRS/Barring Level TRS/Barring level is determined by the applicable levels of Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables. Denied Code Tables*1 *1 *2 : : Exception Code Tables*2 Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 Not Programmable Not Programmable TRS/Barring Denied Code Exception Code Explanation: Level 1: Allows all calls. Level 2: Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6. Level 3: Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6. • • • Level 7: Allows intercom calls only. [Programming Example] Level for Time Mode*1 Day Lunch Break Night Level for System Speed Dialling*2 1 1 1 1 6 1 2 2 2 2 6 1 : : : : : : COS No. *1 *2 : : TRS/Barring Level Speed Dialling TRS/Barring Level Feature Guide 93 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features [Flowchart] An extension user makes a trunk call. Is the call made by System Speed Dialling ? Yes No No Is TRS/Barring Override for System Speed Dialling enabled? Yes Checks the TRS/Barring level for the time mode of the extension's COS. Level 7 What is the TRS/Barring level? Checks the TRS/Barring level for System Speed Dialling of the extension's COS. Level 1 Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables? No Yes Is the dialled number found in applicable Exception Code Tables? Yes No The call is denied. The user hears reorder tone. 94 Feature Guide The call is made. 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS/Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes. KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA. • • A COS should be assigned for each extension ( TRS/Barring checks are applied to the following: – ARS – Trunk Access (Idle/Trunk Group/Individual) • It is programmable whether " " or "#" is checked by the TRS/Barring. This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges. TRS/Barring checks the digits dialled after a flash/recall signal during a trunk call. It is programmable whether TRS/Barring checks the digits dialled after the External Feature Access signal during a trunk call. Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code TRS/Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code or a Special Carrier Access code in the following cases: • • Class of Service) Stored Type Not stored Found Host PBX Access Code Deletes the code. A TRS/Barring check is carried out on the following digits. Special Carrier Deletes the code. A Access Code TRS/Barring check is carried out on the following digits. • • • Not found The call is made (excepted from TRS/ Barring). TRS/Barring checks the whole number. TRS/Barring checks the whole number. TRS/Barring checks the whole number. ARS If ARS is applied to a dialled number, TRS/Barring will check the user-dialled number (not the modified number by ARS). In this case, a Host PBX Access code and/or a Special Carrier Access code will not be checked. Dialled Digit Restriction During Conversation Dialled digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call. If the dialled digits exceed the preprogrammed limitation, the line will be disconnected. A TRS/Barring level can be changed by some features. The priority of features, when multiple features are used, is as follows: 1) Dial Tone Transfer 2) Budget Management 3) TRS/Barring Override for System Speed Dialling 4) Remote COS Access/Verified Code Entry 5) Extension Lock Feature Guide 95 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7.2 Budget Management Description Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget. If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit, an extension user cannot make further trunk calls. A manager may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge. Conditions • • • 96 Feature Guide If the limit is reached, TRS/Barring Level 7 is applied. Budget Management for Verified Call If an extension user make a trunk call with a verified code, the call charge will be counted on the verified code (not the extension). The limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code. The pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) service is required for this feature. 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7.3 Extension Lock Description An extension user can change the TRS/Barring level of the telephone so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls. Any numeric code (10 digits max.) can be used as a password to lock the telephone. The same code is used as a password to unlock it. This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout. Conditions • • • This feature also restricts setting of DND and FWD. Remote Extension Lock Overrides Extension Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control. TRS/Barring Level COS programming determines the TRS/Barring level for Extension Lock ( Extension Lock TRS/Barring Level). Feature Guide 97 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer Description An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS/Barring level for the extension user temporarily. After that, the extension user can make his call. [Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing call (e.g., overseas calls). (3) Make a trunk call (2) Change TRS/Baring level Toll Restriction/ Call Barring button (1) Call Guest Room (Trunk call restricted) Manager Conditions • • 98 Feature Guide The changed level effective just one time. Toll Restriction/Call Barring Button A manager extension must store the desired TRS/Barring level in the Toll Restriction/Call Barring button. A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction/Call Barring button. 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7.5 Remote COS Access Description An extension user can use another extension telephone with the COS assigned on his own extension temporary. The extension accesses his own extension from another telephone and operates features with the same conditions which are assigned his own extension. It is one of the remote operations. A personal password is required to use this feature. This feature is also known as Remote COS Access. Conditions • • • The following items are applied: – COS programming – Budget Management – Itemised Billing code for ARS – Extension number recorded on the SMDR. Remote COS Access through DISA This feature is also available through the DISA. Personal Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the password against the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the password will be unlocked and cleared. This feature is also known as Station Password Lock. Feature Guide 99 1.7 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 1.7.6 Verified Code Entry Description An extension user can make a trunk call with a verified code from his own or any other extension to change the TRS/Barring level or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A verified code password is required to use this feature. Conditions • • • • The following items are applied: – COS programming – Budget Management – Itemised Billing code for ARS – The + verified code recorded on the SMDR instead of the extension number. Verified Code Entry through DISA This feature is also available through the DISA. Verified Code Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the password against the verified code will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the password will be unlocked and cleared. Budget Management for Verified Calls A limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code. [Example of Verified Codes and Their Programming] Location Verified No. Code*1 : : *3: *4: *1 *2 100 Feature Guide User Name*2 Verified Code Password*3 COS No.*4 1234 1 2323 5000Yen 3 4545 3000Yen : : : 0001 1111 Tom Smith 0002 2222 John White 9876543210 : : : Verified Code Number Verified Code Name Verified Code Password Verified Code COS Number : Itemised Budget Billing Code Management for ARS 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 1.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Description ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogrammed settings. The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier. Feature Guide 101 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features [Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart] The numbers pages. X in the flowchart correspond to the Programming Procedures on the following A trunk call is made. Is the ARS mode ( 1 ) enabled? No (Normal Trunk Access) Sends the telephone number to the userselected carrier. Yes Is the dialled number found in the Leading Digit Exception Table ( 2 )? Yes No Is the dialled number found in the Leading Digit Table ( 3 )? No Yes Checks the Routing Plan Table ( 4 ) to determine which carrier to use. Is the carrier ( 6 ) found in the appropriate time zone ( 5 )? No Yes Is there an available trunk group ( 11 )? Yes Modifies the dialled number by deleting the digits ( 9 ) and following the modify commands ( 12 ). No Because all trunk are busy? Yes No Is normal Trunk Access allowed? Yes (default) No Sends the modified number to the trunk. 102 Feature Guide Sends busy tone. Sends reorder tone. Sends the telephone number by the Idle Trunk Access. 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features [Programming Procedures] 1. ARS Mode Assignment ( ARS Mode) If "Automatic access" is selected, ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any of the Idle Trunk Access methods. If "Any method" is selected, ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method. 1 2. Leading Digit Exception Table Assignment Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature. 2 2 ARS Leading Digit Exception Table Location Leading Digit No. Exception*1 033555 001 06456 002 : : *1 : ARS Exception Number 3. Leading Digit Table 3 Assignment Store the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading digits that will be routed by the ARS feature. In this table, the Routing Plan (refer to "4. Routing Plan Table 4 Assignment") is selected for each number. The additional number of digits must be assigned only when "#", for example, is needed after a dialled number. The "#" is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number (excluding a leading digit). 3 ARS Leading Digit Table Location Leading Additional No. Digits*1 No. of Digits 0001 7 039 0002 0 03 0003 5 0444 : : : *1 *2 : : Routing Plan Table No.*2 1 4 5 : ARS Leading Digits ARS Routing Plan Number If a dialled number matches a leading digit, the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional number of digits are dialled or the Inter-digit time expires. If a dialled number matches multiple leading digits entries, the leading digit entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority. Feature Guide 103 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features [Example] Dialled Number Corresponding Routing Plan Table No. 039-123-4567 1 "039" is found in location 0001 and seven digits (assigned additional number of digits in location 0001) were dialled. The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit. 039-654-321 1 "039" is found in location 0001 and the Inter-digit time expired before the seventh digit is received. The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the Inter-digit time expired. 038 4 "03" is found in two locations (locations 0001 and 0002), so the PBX waits for the next digit "8". "038" is not found in any location, then "03" (location 0002) is selected. The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected. 03 4 The Inter-digit time expired after receiving "3". "03" is found in location 0002. The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected after the Inter-digit time expired. Description 4. Routing Plan Table 4 Assignment Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority. Time Table 5 As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day, four time zones (Time-A through D) can be programmed for each day of the week. Carrier Priority 6 Assign the appropriate carrier (refer to "5. Carrier Table 7 Assignment") and their priority in each time zone. The carrier is selected in the entry order (the order in which entries are listed). 3 ARS Leading Digit Table Location Leading Additional Routing Plan Digits No. of Digits Table No. No. 0001 03 8 1 : : : : 4 ARS Routing Plan Table Routing Plan Table 1 5 Time Table*1 SUN Time-A Time-B Time-C Time-D : : SAT Time-A Time-B Time-C Time-D *1 104 Feature Guide : ARS Routing Plan Time Table 9:00 12:00 15:00 21:00 : 9:00 12:00 15:00 21:00 6 Carrier*2 Priority 1 Priority 2 1 (A telecom) 4 (D telecom) 1 (A telecom) 2 (B telecom) 1 (A telecom) 2 (B telecom) 3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom) : : 3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom) 3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom) 3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom) 3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features *2 : ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) Assignment 5. Carrier Table 7 Carrier Name 8 Assignment A specified number of carriers can be programmed. Assign the following items for each Carrier Table: : Assign the carrier name. 9: Delete Digit Assign the number of digits to delete from the beginning of the userdialled number. Carrier Access Code Trunk Group 11 : 10 : Assign the code to access the carrier. Assign the trunk groups which connect to each carrier. Modify Commands 12 : Assign the commands to modify the dialled number to access the carrier. [Command Explanation] Command Number Description Add the number. C Add the Carrier Access code. P Insert a pause and change to tone (DTMF) signal. A Add the Authorisation code for a tenant ( 13 ). G Add the Authorisation code for a trunk group ( 14 ). I Add the Itemised Billing code ( 15 ). H Add the dialled number after the digits are deleted (Home position). [Programming Example] 7 Carrier Table 8 Name*1 9 Delete Digits*2 Carrier Access Code*3 11 Trunk Groups*4 12 Modify Command 10 1 A telecom 6 0077 1, 2, 3 CH#12 2 B telecom 0 0088 1, 2 CH [Example] Dialled number: 0123456789 (Trunk Access no. is ignored.) Modification: 12 012345 6789 0077 6789 #12 H 9 Delete 6 digits. #12 Add the number. C Add the Carrier Access code ( 10 ). *1 *2 : : ARS Carrier Name ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code Feature Guide 105 1.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features *3 *4 : : ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access 6. Optional Assignment Authorisation Code for a Tenant 13 An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant. Authorisation Code for a Trunk 14 An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier. Itemised Billing Code 15 An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension. If a call is not made from an extension (e.g., DISA or TIE) and no verified code is used, the Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verified code will be used. Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes. KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA. • • • 106 Feature Guide The Dialled Number on the SMDR It is possible to choose to print either the user-dialled number or the modified number on the SMDR through system programming. ARS Data Download/Upload It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming: – 3 ARS Leading Digit Table – 4 ARS Routing Plan Table This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge, and the updated data can be used for multiple customers. A TRS/Barring check is done before ARS is applied. 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.1 Hands-free Operation Description A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons (e.g., REDIAL) automatically activate hands-free mode. Conditions • PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands-free mode and cannot be used for hands-free conversations. Feature Guide 107 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.2 Off-Hook Monitor Description A PT user can let others listen to the user’s conversation through the built-in speaker, during a conversation using the handset. Conditions • 108 Feature Guide Capable Telephone Display PTs/all KX-T7600 series telephones To enable this feature, system programming is required. If disabled, hands-free conversation is performed instead. 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.3 Mute Description During a conversation, a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker or the handset receiver. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Mute. Only your voice will be muted. Conditions • This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button. Feature Guide 109 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.4 Headset Operation Description This PBX provides headset compatible PTs. A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset. This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection. Conditions • • • • • 110 Feature Guide A headset is an option. If the headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker. To set the headset mode on a DPT, use personal programming (Headset Operation) or press the Headset button. To set headset mode on an APT, use the handset/headset selector provided on the set and/or on the headset. Headset Button A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as the Headset button. The Headset button can be also assigned to a flexible button on an APT, but the button does not work. It is possible to switch the headset mode to the hands-free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button. 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.5 Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. Extension which have data devices connected (e.g., facsimile) may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication. Conditions • If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security, it applies to both extensions. Feature Guide 111 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate Description The FLASH/RECALL button (Disconnect mode or Terminate mode) or Terminate button (Terminate mode) is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first. It performs the same function as going on-hook and then going off-hook. [Function of Each Mode] Disconnect Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last. For example, if a trunk call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone company. Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference—Outgoing setting. Conditions • FLASH/RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected for each extension: a) Disconnect mode b) Terminate mode c) External Feature Access (EFA) mode. ( • • • • 112 Feature Guide 1.9.7 External Feature Access (EFA)) Terminate Button A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button. Disconnect Time (Only for Disconnect Mode) The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk group ( LCOT Disconnect Time). This feature outputs an SMDR call record, restarts the call timer, inserts the automatic pause, and checks the TRS/Barring level again. If the ARS mode is on, the Terminate mode will be always effective even though the Disconnect mode has been set. 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Description An extension user can have access to the features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Transfer, Hold, Call Waiting, etc. A flash/recall signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This is only available on trunk calls (including Host PBX Access). Conditions • • • Flash/Recall Time The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each trunk group ( LCOT Flash Time). EFA Button A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button. Pressing the FLASH/RECALL button which is set to EFA mode ( 1.9.6 Flash/Recall/ Terminate) or the EFA button performs this feature. It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number when the current call is placed on a Consultation Hold. (Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.) Feature Guide 113 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.8 Trunk Call Limitation Description Trunk calls are limited by the following features: Feature Description Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group ( Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration Time). Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time-limit at five second intervals. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. COS programming determines to enable or disable this feature ( Trunk Call Duration Limitation). Whether this feature is applied to outgoing calls only or all calls is also programmable. Trunk-to-Trunk Call (except Unattended Conference Call) Duration If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group ( Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Time). Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time-limit at five second intervals. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. The timer is applied for a trunk call which is made via the PBX. If both call is made by the extension (e.g., a trunk call made by an extension is transferred to an outside party), the shorter limit will apply to the call. Budget Management If the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached, an extension user cannot make further trunk calls. Whether the line is disconnected after an alarm tone is programmable. Dialling Digit Restriction While engaged on a received trunk call, the dialling of digits can during Conversation be restricted. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation, the line will be disconnected. Conditions • 114 Feature Guide During an Unattended Conference Call, both the Unattended Conference Recall time and the Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration time are applied. 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.9 Parallelled Telephone Description Two telephones can be connected in parallel to one port in the following combinations: Main Telephone Sub Telephone APT or DPT SLT APT, DPT or SLT DWX (e.g., KX-TD7XXX series) When parallel mode is used, the two telephones work as follows: • Both share one extension number (main telephone’s extension number) • Either telephone can make or answer a call • Transfers calls (If one goes off-hook while the other is on a call, the call is switched to the former.). Conditions [General] • • SLT Ring Assignment If an SLT is the sub telephone, whether it rings for incoming calls is programmable. Ring on Mode: Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands-free Answerback mode or Voice Calling mode. Ring off Mode: Only the PT rings. However, the SLT can answer the call. If one telephone is in the following situation, the call will be transferred to the other telephone by going off-hook (DPT + SLT, and APT/DPT/SLT + DWX only): – During a conversation (except during Consultation Hold, Conference, and Two-way Recording) – While hearing a ringback tone after dialling an extension or telephone number. (Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.) [APT + SLT] • • If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, a three-party call is established. If one user goes on-hook, the other user continues the call. An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is: – playing BGM – receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker. [DPT + SLT] • • • A DPT and an SLT must be connected to one super hybrid port of the DHLC Card. If the eXtra Device Port (XDP) Parallel mode is enabled, each telephone can act as completely different extensions with their own extension number ( 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration). When in the parallel mode, the XDP mode of the super hybrid port should be off through system programming. Feature Guide 115 1.9 Conversation Features [APT/DPT/SLT + DWX] • 116 Feature Guide This connection is called the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode ( Parallel Mode). 1.22.5 Wireless XDP 1.9 Conversation Features 1.9.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection Description The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from the analogue trunk when the other party is hung up. To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks, the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with reorder tone. Conditions • • • • CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls ( LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming), and for outgoing trunk calls ( LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing). If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls. If CPC signal is detected during a Conference call, the line is disconnected. The remaining parties stay connected. If CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature and an extension or an outside party, the line is disconnected. Feature Guide 117 1.10 Transferring Features 1.10 Transferring Features 1.10.1 Call Transfer Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are available: Feature Transferring method With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party. Without Announcement Transfer is completed without an announcement. After dialling the destination, while hearing a ringback tone, the originator can replace the handset. Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened. Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened. Conditions • • • • If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred. It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent ( Music Source Selection for Transfer). If the transferred destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the outside party. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party except a TIE line call ( Call Transfer on Trunk Calls). Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transferred destination party does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time ( Transfer Recall Time), the call will be redirected to the destination assigned on each extension. If the destination is not assigned, it will return to the extension who transferred the call. If the destination is engaged in a call, the hold alarm will be heard. [Available destination] Destination Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1OPX) Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group VM Group (DTMF/DPT) External Pager (TAFAS) DISA 118 Feature Guide Availability 1.10 Transferring Features Destination Availability Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Trunk Access no. + Phone no. Trunk Group Access no. + Phone no. Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) • One-touch Transfer The DSS Console and the PT user can hold a call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly. A One-touch Dialling button can also be used if the TRANSFER command is stored with a number. Feature Guide 119 1.11 Holding Features 1.11 Holding Features 1.11.1 Call Hold Description An extension user can put a call on hold. The following features are available depending on the result. Feature Description Call Hold General Any extension can retrieve a held call. Exclusive Call Hold Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it. The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and Exclusive Call Hold. Conditions • • • • • • • • 120 Feature Guide A PT user can hold an intercom call and multiple trunk calls simultaneously. An SLT user can hold either an intercom call or a trunk call. To hold multiple intercom calls on a PT simultaneously, use the Call Park feature. Call Park feature can also be used to hold multiple intercom calls and/or trunk calls simultaneously on an SLT. It is possible to put a call on hold while dialling a trunk call or hearing a ringback tone. Music on Hold Music, if available, is sent to the held party. Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time), Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call, the hold alarm will be heard. If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the call is automatically disconnected. This timer starts when Hold Recall activates. Automatic Call Hold A PT user can programme holding of the a current call when pressing another CO/G-DN/ INTERCOM button. If this feature is not enabled, the current call will be disconnected. [Example] It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing G-DN button, this puts the current intercom call (on the INTERCOM button) on hold. To return to the held call, press the INTERCOM button. Call Hold Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis ( Internal Call Block in Section 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY), he cannot retrieve the held call which the extensions made. SLT Hold Mode It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods: 1.11 Holding Features Hold Mode 1 Transfer to Trunk Transfer to Extension Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch + + + Going on-hook Trunk Access No. Extension No. Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch + + + Mode 2 Hold Feature No. Trunk Access No. Extension No. (Default) + Going on-hook Mode 3 Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch + + + Hold Feature No. Hold Feature No. Extension No. + + Going on-hook Trunk Access No. Mode 4 Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch + + + Hold Feature No. Hold Feature No. Hold Feature No. + + + Trunk Access No. Extension No. Going on-hook If the following occur frequently with an SLT, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4". a) Nobody answers when a call is received. b) Busy tone is heard even though nobody is using the trunk. If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and Mode 4. Feature Guide 121 1.11 Holding Features 1.11.2 Call Park Description An extension user can place a held call into a common parking area of the PBX. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user. Conditions • • • • • Automatic Call Park It is possible to select an idle parking area automatically. Retry If the specified parking area is occupied or there is no vacant area for Automatic Call Park, the originator will hear busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing busy tone by selecting parking area or a vacant area. Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, Call Park Recall will be heard at the extension assigned as the Transfer Recall destination. If the extension is engaged in a call, the hold alarm will be heard. If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is automatically disconnected. Call Park Button Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking area. A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset parking area as follows: Light pattern • 122 Feature Guide Status Slow red flashing Parked in the preset parking area Off No parked call Call Park Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis ( Internal Call Block in Section 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY), he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made. 1.11 Holding Features 1.11.3 Call Splitting Description An extension user can alternate between two other parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party. Conditions • While having a conversation with one party, the other party is in Consultation Hold. (Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.) Feature Guide 123 1.11 Holding Features 1.11.4 Music on Hold Description Music can be played to any party on hold. The following music sources are available: a) Internal music source b) External music source c) Cyclic tone BGM number or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold ( Music Source Selection for Call Hold). BGM numbers are the same as the external music port numbers (e.g., External music port 1 is BGM1.) However BGM2 includes internal music sources 1 and 2 as well as external music port 2. It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM2 ( Music Source Selection for Port 2). [BGM Number and the Music Source] BGM No. Music Source 1 External music port 1 2 External music port 2/Internal music source 1 or 2 : : Conditions • • • 124 Feature Guide Hardware Requirement: User-supplied music source Volume Control It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external music source. It is also possible to choose a different music source for each tenant. 1.12 Conference Features 1.12 Conference Features 1.12.1 Conference Features—SUMMARY Description A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously. The following features are available to establish a conference call: Feature Description Details in Conference During a two-party conversation, an extension user can • 1.12.2 add other parties to establish a conference call with up Conference to eight parties. Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call. Privacy Release During a conversation with an outside party on the S-CO • 1.12.3 button, a PT user can allow another extension to join the Privacy conversation. Release • 1.5.5 Executive Busy Override Conditions • One PBX supports 30 simultaneous calls which are engaged in conference calls. (e.g., 10 three-party conferences, 3 eight-party conferences + 2 three-party conferences) Feature Guide 125 1.12 Conference Features 1.12.2 Conference Description This PBX supports three through eight-party conference calls. During a two-party conversation, an extension user can add other parties to their conversation, thereby establishing a conference. More than four-party conferences are only possible when a PT user originates the conference. Unattended Conference: A PT user can leave a conference to allow other parties to continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference, if he desires. Conditions • • CONF (Conference) Button For a PT which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button. Unattended Conference Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by the Unattended Conference Recall time. The Unattended Conference Recall time consists of the following programmable timers: a) Unattended Conference Recall Start Time: When the timer expires, Unattended Conference Recall starts to be heard at the conference originator. If the originator does not return to the conference, 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start. b) 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time: When the timer expires, an alarm tone starts to be heard at parties in the Unattended Conference. If the originator does not return to the conference, 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start. c) 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time: When the timer expires, the Unattended Conference call is disconnected. If the originator returns to the conference before the Unattended Conference call is disconnected, the timer will be cancelled. If not, Unattended Conference Recall and an alarm tone will continue to be emitted until the Unattended Conference call is disconnected. 126 Feature Guide 1.12 Conference Features 1.12.3 Privacy Release Description By default, all conversations which take place on trunk, extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy (Automatic Privacy). Privacy Release allows a PT user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S-CO button in order to establish a three-party call. System programming is required to enable or disable this feature. Conditions • • • S-CO Button A flexible button can be customised as the S-CO button. Privacy Release Time Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined. This feature overrides Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny. Feature Guide 127 1.13 Paging Features 1.13 Paging Features 1.13.1 Paging Description An extension user can make a voice announcement to many people simultaneously. The message is announced over the built-in speakers of PT and/or external speakers (external pagers) which belong to the paging group. The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call. Paging Deny: It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis. Paging Group Each paging group consists of extension groups and external pagers. One extension group or external pager can belong to several paging groups. An extension can page the extension members and the external pagers of the same paging group only. If any extension group is not assigned in a paging group, any extension can page external pager(s) in the group. [Example] Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Paging Group 03 Pager 1 [Example] Extn. 104 can page the extensions in the extension groups 2 and 3, pagers 1 and 2 in paging group 2 or 3. 128 Feature Guide Pager 2 Paging Group 04 Pager 3 Any extension can page the pager 3. 1.13 Paging Features [Programming Example] Paging Group No. *2 : : External Pager No.*2 001 1 002 003 ... 2 3 ... 01 ... ... 02 ... ... 03 ... ... 04 ... ... 05 ... ... : *1 Extension Group No.*1 : : : ... : : : ... Paging Group for Extension Group Paging Group for External Pager Explanation: Paging Group No. Explanation 01 Extensions in extension group 001 can page or be paged. 02 Extensions in extension groups 002 and 003 can page or be paged. They can also page through an external pager 1. 03 Extensions in extension group 003 can page or be paged. They can also page through the external pagers 1 and 2. 04 All extensions (all extension groups) can page through the external pager 3. 05 All extensions (all extension groups) can page or be paged. All external pagers can also be paged. : : Conditions • • Extensions which cannot be paged are: – SLTs – Ringing or busy PTs – PTs in Paging Deny mode – PTs in Paging DND mode These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page. External Pager Priority External pagers can be used with the following priorities: TAFAS Paging BGM Feature Guide 129 1.13 Paging Features • • 130 Feature Guide Volume Control Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through PC programming. Paging DND When DND is set for incoming calls, it is programmable whether your extension receives paging through system programming. 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14.1 Doorphone Call Description Calls from doorphones reach the preprogrammed destination and he can talk to the visitor. Any extension user can call a doorphone. Conditions • • • • • • • • Hardware Requirement: An optional Doorphone, the OPB Card and DPH Card. Each doorphone port must be assigned to one tenant. The Time Table (day/lunch/break/ night) of the tenant is applied. Call Destination The incoming doorphone call destination(s) can be assigned for each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) for each doorphone port ( Doorphone Call Destination). Destinations can be selected. ( 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY) COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call. Ring Duration If an incoming call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and the call is cancelled. Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be disconnected. Door Open While engaged on a doorphone call, the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. ( 1.14.2 Door Open) A doorphone/door opener number can be assigned for each doorphone port ( Door Number Reference). Feature Guide 131 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14.2 Door Open Description An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone. The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in the COS programming ( Door Open Assignment) and tenant service. However, while engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. Conditions • • • 132 Feature Guide Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener on each door. The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed. Door Open Duration The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period ( Door Open Duration Time). 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Description A ring tone is sent through the external pager when an incoming call is received. Any extension user can answer the call. Conditions • • • Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager Floating Extension Number A floating extension number can be assigned for an external pager ( External Pager Floating Extension Number). It is possible to access an external pager by dialling their floating extension numbers. Pager Volume It is possible to change the volume of an external pager. Feature Guide 133 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14.4 Background Music (BGM) Description A PT user can listen to BGM through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle. BGM—External: BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers, this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager. Conditions [BGM] • • • Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio The music through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook. Each extension user can select the music source. [BGM—External] • • • 134 Feature Guide Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager Only the pagers which are assigned to be used by the tenant can be selected. External pagers can be used with the following priorities: TAFAS Paging BGM 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) Description An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the following features: Feature Usage Details in Direct Inward System Access (DISA) When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will • 1.14.6 Direct hear a message. Inward System Access (DISA) Queuing Feature • Queuing If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution group ( Queuing Time Feature Table), any caller who is waiting in a queue will hear a message. Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder alarm, the • 1.24.4 user will hear a message. Timed Reminder Conditions • • • • Hardware Requirement: The OPB Card and MSG Card. The Number of Messages and the Recording Time The number of messages and Recording time can be selected from the following patterns (The total recording time in the PBX is 16 minutes.): – 64 messages × 15 seconds – 32 messages × 30 seconds – 16 messages × 60 seconds Note If the Recording time pattern is changed, any prerecorded messages will be cleared. All necessary messages must be recorded again. A floating extension number can be assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) ( Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number). One MSG Card allows four messages to play simultaneously. The MSG Card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages. It increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously. [Example] Up to 8 messages can be played simultaneously to callers. Up to 4 messages can be played simultaneously to callers. PBX PBX MSG Card Total message recording time: 16 minutes (fixed) MSG Card MSG Card Total message recording time: 16 minutes (fixed) Feature Guide 135 1.14 Optional Device Features • • Note When the MSG Card expansion has been done, all necessary messages must be recorded again. The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers. Recording Methods a) Record voice messages through the extension telephone b) Record a back ground music through an external music source. • • • 136 Feature Guide After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation. Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time period, or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message. The longer one is applied. If someone hears a message when a manager extension is trying to record messages, a ringback tone will be sent to the manager extension before progress tone until all ports on the MSG Card(s) become idle. 1.14 Optional Device Features 1.14.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Description An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user on the PBX, when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The caller can have direct access to features such as: • Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for remote system administration, an external pager for TAFAS). • Calling an outside party via the PBX. • Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD) Outgoing Message (OGM) When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller. Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). ( 1.14.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)) DISA Intercept—No Dial If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept) ( DISA Intercept Time) following the outgoing message (OGM), the call is redirected to the operator extension. DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service) After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other DISA floating extension number as the destination (Multistep DISA AA Service). If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA), the DISA AA service is not employed. DISA Security Mode and Available Features If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security ( DISA Security Mode). The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows: TIE Line Call Security Mode Intercom Call Without PBX Code With PBX Code Trunk Call All Security Feature Guide 137 1.14 Optional Device Features TIE Line Call Security Mode Intercom Call Without PBX Code With PBX Code Trunk Call Trunk Security No Security If trunk call is available, Account Code Entry is also available. Security Mode Override: If the caller operates with the following features while hearing a DISA message, the security mode can be changed to the No Security mode temporarily: • Remote COS Access: Remote COS Access feature number + extension number + personal password • Verified Code Entry: Verified Code Entry feature number + verified code password + verified code + After changing mode, the mode remains in force for the duration of the call. Available PBX Features with Security Mode Override: After Security Mode Override is done with the Remote COS Access feature, the following features are available (It regards a remote operation from the assigned extension): • FWD • DND • Log-in/Log-out • Absent Message • Extension Lock • Time Service Mode Switch DISA Intercept Routing—Busy/DND If the destination called by the outside party is busy or in DND mode, and if (1) the busy destination does not set Call Waiting, FWD, or Idle Extension Hunting or (2) the destination is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available, one of the following can be selected through system programming: a) Busy Tone: Busy tone is sent to the caller. b) Intercept Routing: Intercept Routing—Busy/DND ( Intercept Routing in Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY) will work and the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination. c) Outgoing Message (OGM): An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller. The message for busy/DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message (OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number. 138 Feature Guide 1.14 Optional Device Features DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Intercept time) ( DISA Intercept Time) after the call is reached, the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature ( Trunk Group Intercept Destination or Extension Intercept Destination). If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected. SMDR The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers. [Programming Example] The following items can be assigned to each outgoing message (OGM): Outgoing Floating Message Extn. No.*1 (OGM) No. *1 : 01 300 02 301 : : Automated Attendant No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205 Busy/DND Message No. 04 05 : : : : : : : : : : : Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number Feature Guide 139 1.14 Optional Device Features [Flowchart] A DISA call from an outside party is received. No Is there an idle port on the MSG Cards? Yes (DISA Delayed Answer Time Time-out) Is Intercept Routing Busy/DND employed? The PBX answers the call. (DISA Mute Time Time-out) Yes The call is routed to the intercept destination. The outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling. A No Is the first digit dialled? (DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept Time-out) Yes The call is routed to the Operator. (Intercept Routing No Destination) The outgoing message (OGM) stops. Goes to C No Is the second digit dialled? (DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA Time-out) Yes No The PBX receives the following dialled digits and checks the dialled number. Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service? Yes The call is routed to the destination. What is the DISA security mode? Continued to the next page 140 Feature Guide No Busy tone 1.14 Optional Device Features Continued from the previous page None NoneSecurity B Trunk Security All Security Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number? No Yes Goes to Is the Walking COS/Verified Code Entry feature number dialled for Security Mode Override? C What is the dialled number? Yes Yes Is the correct password entered? No No Goes to Feature No.* (e.g., FWD) Trunk Access No. + Telephone No. Others D Extension No./ Floating Extension No. The feature is set. Reorder tone Does the caller press while hearing reorder tone (Call Retry)? Is the extension idle? Yes No Is the extension busy (Call Waiting mode on) and is not in DND mode? E The extension receives the call. Goes to B C The dialled number is sent to the trunk. Yes D Goes to A No No (DISA Reorder Tone Duration Time Time-out) The call is disconnected. Yes No The call waits to be received. Does the caller press while hearing a ringback tone (Call Retry)? The extension becomes idle. Yes Does the destination answer the call? Goes to A Goes to E What method is assigned for DISA Intercept Routing Busy/DND? Intercept Routing Does the caller press while hearing busy tone (Call Retry)? (Busy Tone Time Time-out) No No (DISA Intercept Time Time-out) Yes The call is established. The call is routed to the intercept destination. (DISA Intercept Routing No Answer) Yes The call is disconnected. Goes to The call is established. A The message for the busy/DND mode is sent to the caller. The call is routed to the intercept destination. (Intercept Routing Busy/DND) Does the destination No answer the call? (DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept Yes Time-out) Outgoing Message (OGM) Busy Tone Goes to Goes to A E The call is disconnected. *: Feature numbers are available only when the Remote COS Access feature is used for Security Mode Override. Feature Guide 141 1.14 Optional Device Features Conditions WARNING When you enable the Trunk-to-Trunk Call feature of DISA, and a third party discovers the password (verified code/personal password) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a) Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password. b) Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it. c) Change the password frequently. • • • • • • • • • 142 Feature Guide Hardware Requirement: The OPB Card and MSG Card. DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time ( DISA Delayed Answer Time) so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM). DISA Mute Time It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line. Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected unless the originating caller retries by pressing " " or extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling. ( 1.9.8 Trunk Call Limitation) The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period ( DISA Extend Time) and preprogramming number of times. Tone Detection The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA. – Silence Detection ( DISA Silence Detection) – Continuous Signal Detection ( DISA Continuous Tone Detection) – Cyclic Signal Detection ( DISA Cyclic Tone Detection) Call Retry While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ". During a trunk-to-trunk conversation, the result of pressing " " is programmable: retry mode or DTMF mode. DISA Reorder Tone Duration It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. Reorder tone will be sent to the caller for a preprogrammed time period. When the timer expires the call will be disconnected. Retrying the call is possible by pressing " " during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. Call Deny Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis. Verified Code Password Lock/Personal Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the password against the verified code or the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the password will be unlocked and will be cleared. 1.14 Optional Device Features • Each outgoing message (OGM) call have a name through system programming ( Outgoing Message (OGM) Name) for programming reference. Feature Guide 143 1.15 Caller ID Features 1.15 Caller ID Features 1.15.1 Caller ID Description The PBX receives caller’s information, such the caller’s name and telephone number, on trunks assigned to receive Caller ID. A display PT user can see the information. The PBX can modify the received number according to preprogrammed tables so that he can call back or memorise it. For example, if the area code is sent and it is not required to call, store the area code in the table so that the area code is deleted automatically. 1. Feature Caller ID includes the following features: Feature Caller ID Description Caller’s information which is sent from an analogue trunk. Details in – Calling Line Caller’s information which is sent from Identification an ISDN line. Presentation (CLIP) • Calling/ Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Automatic Number Identification (ANI) • 1.19.1 E1 Line Service • 1.20.1 T1 Line Service Caller’s information which is sent from an E1 or T1 Card. 2. Service Features Features 144 Feature Guide Description Details in • Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution Directs a DIL/DID/DDI/MSN call to a CLI destination if the caller’s identification (Caller ID/CLIP/ANI) has been assigned to the Caller ID Table. Incoming Call Log Caller’s information is automatically recorded • 1.15.2 Incoming Call in the call log of the called extension. This information is used for confirming the caller, Log calling back the caller, or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling. 1.15 Caller ID Features 3. Number/Name Assignment 3.1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller’s number according to preprogrammed tables. The modified number will be recorded for calling back. The PBX supports a specified number of modification tables, and each trunk group can select a table for use. Each table has ten locations for local/international call data and one for long distance call data. The PBX checks the local/international call data first. If a match is not found, the long distance call data is applied. [Example] <Table Selection> Trunk Modification Group No. Table TRG 01 1 TRG 02 3 : : <Modification Table> Modification Table 1 Local/International Call Data 1 Local/International Call Data 2 : Local/International Call Data 10 Long Distance Call Data 1 Area Code Removed Digits Added No. 012 3 Blank 00 2 001 : : : Not programmable 0 0 Feature Guide 145 1.15 Caller ID Features <Modification Flowchart> A trunk call with a caller's information is received. Checks the Table Selection. Table 1 Is the area code found in a local/international data in the modification table? Yes: e.g., 00987654321 Checks the local/ international call data. No: e.g., 3344556677 Checks the long distance call data. Matches (Data 2) Modifies the number as programmed. Removed digits: 2 Added number: 001 Received number: 00987654321 Modifies the number as programmed. (Removed digits: 0, Added number: 0) Modified number: 00987654321 = 001987654321 1) Remove the first 2 digits. 2) Add "001". Modification is completed: 001987654321. Modification is completed: 03344556677. 3.2 Caller ID Table Assignment The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table. In each location of the table, the following items can be assigned: a) System Speed Dialling number (Trunk Access number + caller’s telephone number) b) System Speed Dialling name (caller’s name) (shown on the display or SMDR) c) CLI destination (used for CLI feature) When a caller’s modified telephone number matches a System Speed Dialling number (the Trunk Access number is disregarded.) in the table, the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination. 146 Feature Guide 1.15 Caller ID Features [Example] Location System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling (Speed Name.*2 No.*1 Dialling No.) *1 *2 : : CLI Destination 000 90123456789 ABC Company 200 001 : : : : : : : System Speed Dialling Number System Speed Dialling Name 3.3 Caller’s Name Reference A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR. The PBX searches for the name in the following order: 1) Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension 2) System Speed Dialling (Caller ID) Table of the tenant 3) Caller ID name received from the public line (Caller ID Name Reference) If the name is not found, it will not be displayed. Conditions • • • Hardware Requirement: The LCOT Card and CID Card for calls from analogue trunk. Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming ( Caller ID Signal Type). The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network. Feature Guide 147 1.15 Caller ID Features 1.15.2 Incoming Call Log Description When an incoming public trunk call with the caller’s information (e.g., Caller ID) is directed to an extension, the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension. This information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller, calling back, or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling. [Example] --- Caller's name (20 digits max.) John White --- Caller's number (16 digits max.) 123456789 12 Dec.10:00AM MON --- Date and time of a call received New No Answer --- Answering Status Call Log buttons Own extension Incoming call distribution group Other extension* *: For example, this button is useful when the secretary checks the unanswered calls for the boss (Boss & Secretary Feature). Conditions • Call Log Button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension, other extensions, or an incoming call distribution group. The button light shows the current status as follows: Light pattern • • • • 148 Feature Guide Status Red on There is unchecked information. Off All information has been checked. If the answering destination is not the original extension (e.g., FWD, Call Pickup): If a call is forwarded or another extension picks up the call, the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination. Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls If a call for an incoming call distribution group is not answered, the information is logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group. If it is answered, the information is logged in the call log for the answering extension. Incoming Call Log Display Lock An extension user can lock the incoming call log display to prevent other users from referring to the call information at his extension. In this case, the Outgoing Call Log display and the Personal Speed Dialling number display is also locked. A personal password is required to use this feature. Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log 1.15 Caller ID Features • information, the Idle Trunk Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number. Incoming Call Log Memory The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX. The maximum number that can be logged is also determined for each extension and incoming call distribution group. If the memory becomes full, the new call record overwrites the oldest one. Feature Guide 149 1.16 Message Features 1.16 Message Features 1.16.1 Message Waiting Description An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user. The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages left in his mailbox of the VPS. When a message is left on a PT, the MESSAGE button on it lights or the Message/Ringer Lamp on it turns on red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on-hook shows the caller’s information as shown below: [Example] 105:Tom Smith --- Extension no. and name of who left the message MESSAGE buttons Own extension Incoming call distribution group Other extension* *: For example, this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss (Boss & Secretary Feature). Conditions • • • • • • • 150 Feature Guide MESSAGE Button A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension, other extensions, or an incoming call distribution group. Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension. ( 1.25.1 Dial Tone) SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT, if an MSLC Card is connected to the PBX. The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the twelve patterns. System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature. It is possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone. Messages are always left on the original extension. Messages cannot be sent to their FWD or intercept destination. Both the message sending extension and receiving extension can cancel a left message. If the message receiving extension calls the sending extension and is answered, the message will be cleared automatically. However, if the message has been left on the VPS, it depends on the VPS. 1.16 Message Features 1.16.2 Absent Message Description The extension users can set the message (e.g., the reason for absence, where he is) on his telephone. When display PT user calls the extension, the message is shown on the caller’s telephone. The following messages can be programmed as desired: Type System message Message No. Message (Example) 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Extn %%% (Extension Number) 4 Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) 5 Out until %%/%% (Month/Day) 6 In a Meeting Description Messages may be edited through system programming ( Absent Message). They are used for every extension user commonly. 7 8 Personal message 9 A message is programmable at each extension through personal programming (Personal Absent Message), which can only be used by that extension user. Note The "%" means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension. Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message. Conditions • An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the extension while on-hook. Feature Guide 151 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.17.1 Fixed Buttons Description PTs, DSS Consoles, Add-on key modules, and DWXs are provided with the following feature/ Line Access buttons: Depending on your device type, some buttons may not be provided. [PT and Add-on Key Module] Button Navigator Key, Jog Dial, Volume Key Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset volume and the display contrast. Navigator Key and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display. ENTER Used to confirm the selected item. CANCEL Used to cancel the selected item. PROGRAM Used to enter and exit the programming mode. FLASH/ RECALL Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up (Disconnect mode or Terminate mode) or used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features (External Feature Access mode). HOLD 152 Usage Used to place a call on hold. SP-PHONE (Speakerphone) Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch between handset and hands-free operation. MONITOR Used for a hands-free dialling. Also used to monitor the party’s voice in hands-free mode. MESSAGE Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication. REDIAL Used to redial the last dialled number. TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another party. Flexible CO (Trunk) Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button. Feature Guide 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features Button Usage INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls. AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode, or used for microphone or handset mute during a conversation. (Dual feature button) VOICE CALL/ MUTE Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a handsfree conversation is not possible). Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation. AUTO DIAL/ STORE Used for System/Personal Speed Dialling and storing programme changes. CONF (Conference) Used to establish a multiple-party conversation. FWD/DND Used to perform FWD or DND. (Dual feature button) PAUSE Used to insert a pause in a stored number. With an APT, it is used as the PROGRAM button. Soft Used to perform the feature or operation appearing above the button at the bottom line of the display. SELECT Used to select the displayed feature or to call the displayed number. SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button features. MODE Used to shift the display to access various features. [DSS Console] Button Usage ANSWER Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on hold and answer another call with one-touch. RELEASE Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer. Flexible CO (Trunk) Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button. Flexible DSS (Direct Station Selection) Used to access an extension with one-touch. Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other features. PF (Programmable Feature) Used to access a preprogrammed feature with one-touch. (no default) Feature Guide 153 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features [DWX] Button Usage INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls. TALK Used to make or receive calls. CANCEL/ POWER Used to end calls, or exit the Directory or Function modes. Also used to switch the power (ON/OFF) by pressing for about 5 seconds. CLEAR/ TRANSFER Used to clear incorrect digits while entering numbers in predialling or to return to the display to the previous step or group. And used to transfer a call to another party. AUTO/OK CLR OK Used for System Speed Dialling and storing programme changes. SELECT Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed telephone number. Navigator Key Used to adjust the volume and the display contrast or select desired items for each function. Flexible CO (Trunk) Used to make or receive a trunk call. F1 button is already assigned as a L-CO button (Default: L-CO). Pressing this button seizes an idle line automatically. F1 to F3 buttons can be used as the desired feature buttons. (Button assignment is required.) If the term is in parentheses like (DSS), it means this button has been made into the "DSS" button. FUNCTION/ KEY-LOCK Used to enter into the Function mode or access features by pressing additional keys. And used to set "KEYPAD LOCK/ UNLOCK" by pressing for about 2 seconds. UP/DOWN Used to select the ringer volume (seven levels) while onhook or ringing, or receiver volume (four levels) during a conversation. And used to shift the display. Soft Used to perform the function or operation appearing above the button at the bottom of the display. A DWX user can use some special features by a combination of buttons (button + a specified number, , or #). Feature 154 Usage TONE Used to change the dialling mode temporarily to tone. (Pulse to Tone Conversion) WAVESEARCH Used to search the best Cell Station on idle status. (Wave Search) Feature Guide 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features Feature Usage FKEY LIST Used to display the selected features of the Flexible CO Buttons. PS-PROGRAM Used to enter the PS Programming mode in the programming mode. EDIT MODE Used to select a mode to edit the Directories (except the PBX Extension Dialling Directory) or in predialling. Conditions • Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status. Feature Guide 155 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.17.2 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming. The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs, DSS Consoles, Add-on Key Modules, and/or DWXs: a) Flexible CO buttons b) Flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons c) Programmable Feature (PF) buttons [Button Usage] Button Usage Single-CO (S-CO) Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls. Group-CO (G-CO) Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making calls. Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button. Loop-CO (L-CO) Used to access an idle trunk for making calls. Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button. Direct Station Selection (DSS) Used to access an extension with one-touch. One-touch Dialling Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with onetouch. Group Directory Number (G- Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group DN) for making or receiving calls. Message Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication. FWD/DND (External/ Internal/Both) * Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension. The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both. Group FWD (Both/External/ Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call Internal) distribution group. The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both. 156 Account Code Entry (Account) Used to enter an account code. Conference Used to establish a multiparty conversation. Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up. External Feature Access (EFA) Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features. Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension. Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a PBX parking area. Call Log Used to show the incoming call information. Feature Guide 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features Button Usage Log-in/Log-out * Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode. Hurry-up Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination. Wrap-up * Used to switch the Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes. Time Service * Used to switch the assigned time modes; day, lunch, break or night. Also used to check the current time mode status. System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error. Answer Used to answer an incoming call. Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer. Toll Restriction/Call Barring Used to change the TRS/Barring level of other extension users temporarily. ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service. Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) * Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service. Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) * Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service. ISDN Hold Used to transfer a call using the telephone company. Headset Used to turn on/off the headset mode while idle. Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes during a conversation. Two-way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox. Two-way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension. One-touch Two-way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with one-touch. Live Call Screening (LCS) Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call. Voice Mail Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. *: One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature settings. The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period. Conditions • The Flexible DSS button lights of the KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 shows only "Off" or "Red On". If the button is customised as a button which shows other light patterns, the other light patterns also show only as "Red On". Feature Guide 157 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.17.3 LED Indication Description The light (LED: Light Emitted Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button) show line conditions with a variety of light patterns. Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, G-DN Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS 1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp • • • • Incoming call from a trunk: Red flashing Incoming call from another extension: Green flashing Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on No Message(s) present (no incoming call): Off 2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Line Status Button: Light Pattern Off Green on Slow green flashing Moderate green flashing Rapid green flashing Red on Slow red flashing Rapid red flashing 158 Feature Guide Intercom Line Status Trunk Status S-CO G-CO L-CO Idle Incoming Call Distribution Group Line Status INTERCOM G-DN This extension is using the line. This extension is holding the line. This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an Unattended Conference. Incoming Incoming call call/Privacy Release – Incoming – Other call for extensions another are using extension/ all trunks Another in the trunk extension group. is using the line/Another extension has the line on Exclusive Hold. – – – Another extension is holding the line. Incoming call to the incoming call – distribution group in Ring distribution method This extension is logged out of the incoming call distribution group. – – 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS Light Pattern Off Idle Red on Busy/DND for trunk calls Rapid red flashing Incoming call 4. Flashing Light Patterns 1 second Slow Flashing Moderate Flashing Rapid Flashing Conditions • The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority: G-DN S-CO G-CO L-CO INTERCOM Feature Guide 159 1.17 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 1.17.4 Display Information Description A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available: Display Item Display Example Condition 123: Tom Smith The extension number and name of the calling or called extension, or incoming call distribution group – Status of the called extension 123: Busy – The number and name of the optional device Door 02: 1st Door – The dialled telephone number 1234567890 – ABC Company 12345678 102:Mike The first line message can be either (a), (d), or (e) at each extension. The received call information a) Caller’s name b) Caller’s number c) Original Destination, if the call is forwarded d) Trunk number/name e) DDI/DID/MSN name or number Line-001: Sales Panasonic Call charge fee during a trunk call. 12.35 EUR The currency ( Currency), position of the currency symbol, and the decimal point ( Decimal Point for Currency) are programmable. Call duration during a trunk call. Line-001 12:02’28 – Conditions • • 160 Feature Guide Multilingual Display Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display Language Selection). Display Contrast It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming (Display Contrast Selection). 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features 1.18.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Description ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network. ISDN transmits voice, data, and image in digital format. ISDN lines, if available, can be connected to public line (trunk), private line (QSIG), or ISDN terminal devices (extension). 1. ISDN Interface and Configuration Interface Type Description Port Mode*1 Configuration Type*2 Point-to-Point/ Basic Rate Provides two 64 kbps B channels Trunk, QSIG (Master, Slave), Point-toInterface (BRI) for communication and one 16 multipoint kbps D channel for signalling (2B Extension + D). Point-to-Point Primary Rate Provides thirty or twenty-three 64 Trunk, QSIG (Master, Slave), Interface (PRI) kbps B channels for communication and one 64 kbps Extension D channel for signalling (30B + D/ 23B + D). *1 *2 : : BRI Port Type *For BRI only BRI Configuration *For BRI only Notes • • Point-to-Point (P-P): One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port. Point-to-multipoint (P-MP): A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port. Feature Guide 161 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features 2. ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network Service Description Details in Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. (P-P only) • Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/ Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs for routing incoming calls. (P-MP only) • Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) Sends the caller’s telephone number to the network when making a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call. Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call. The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected. • Calling/ Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Stops the caller’s CLI being presented to the Calling Line called party by the caller. Identification Restriction (CLIR) 162 Feature Guide Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) Stops COLP being sent by the answered party. Subaddressing (SUB) You may add digits after the telephone number. – These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device. User-to-user Signalling Type 1 through 3 (UUS-1 through UUS-3) Transmits a specified volume of the data through – the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1 through 3. Advice of Charge (AOC) The PBX can receive the call charge information • Advice of on ISDN lines from the telephone company. Charge (AOC) Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN service of telephone company. • Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) • Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN Puts one ISDN call on hold. • Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Service Description Details in Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party. Call • Call Transfer Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer (CT)—by without Announcement are available. ISDN Malicious Call Identification (MCID) An extension user can ask the telephone • Malicious company to trace a malicious caller. Information Call on the malicious call will be received later on. Identification (MCID) Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) If an outside called party is busy, an extension can receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. • Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 3. ISDN Centrex Service An extension user can have access to the features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company (e.g., Call Transfer). This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash/recall signal. This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port. 4. Private Networking Connection (QSIG) Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line. The QSIG mode, Master or Slave, can be enabled on an ISDN port basis. 5. ISDN Extension ( ISDN Extension in Section 1.18.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY) An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for extension connection. While the extension connection is enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 Facsimile, personal computer) or a behind PBX can be connected to the port. When the ISDN port is in P-P configuration, one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port. When the ISDN port is in P-MP configuration, a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously. Conditions • • • Overlap/En bloc ISDN call dialling mode, Overlap or En bloc, can be selected for each ISDN port. When "Overlap" is selected, the PBX sends each dialled digit individually. When "En bloc" is selected, the PBX sends all of dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises end of dialling as follows: – Dialling #, if programmed – Dialling a preprogrammed telephone number – Inter-digit timer expires. Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol ( ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol in Section 1.18.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)— SUMMARY). Extension Number An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port. Feature Guide 163 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features • • • • • • ISDN Extension Progress Tone The PBX can be programmed to send the call progress tone to ISDN extensions on an ISDN port basis ( BRI Extension Tone *For BRI only). Network Type Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country/area ( BRI Network Type *For BRI only). L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode The active mode of Layer 1 (L1) ( BRI Layer 1 Active Mode *For BRI only) and the data link mode of Layer 2 (L2) ( BRI Layer 2 Active Mode *For BRI only) can be selected individually, Permanent or Call by Call, on an ISDN port basis. TEI Assignment Mode The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis ( BRI TEI Mode *For BRI only). Bearer Mode The bearer mode can be assigned on an ISDN port basis. Automatic ISDN Configuration ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically ( BRI Automatic Configuration). The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN (BRI) port: a) b) c) d) 164 Feature Guide L1 Active Mode L2 Data Link Mode Access Mode (Point-to-Point/Point-to-Multipoint) TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00-63/Automatic) 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Description ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol, and they may require a service access code to be dialled. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service (ISDN Service Access). Conditions • • ISDN Service Button A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button. A service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation. This feature is not available to an SLT. Feature Guide 165 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Advice of Charge (AOC) Description The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company. There are the following types: Type Description Advice of Charge During Call (AOC-D) AOC is received during the call and when the call is completed. Advice of Charge At End of Call (AOC-E) AOC is received when the call is completed. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge (AOC) supplementary service Digital Subscriber Signalling System No. One (DSS1) protocol. Conditions • • • 166 Feature Guide A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call. Budget Management If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit, an extension user cannot make further calls ( 1.7.2 Budget Management). AOC for ISDN extension An ISDN extension also receives AOC. 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line. Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis. The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature. There are the following types: Type Description Call Forwarding— Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally. Unconditional (CFU) Call Forwarding— Busy (CFB) An incoming call is forwarded when the destination on the PBX is busy. Call Forwarding—No An incoming call is forwarded when the Reply (CFNR) destination on the PBX does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. When the CFB or CFNR has been set, the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once. When the CFU has been set, the network forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service. [Example] <FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-MP)> ISDN MSN:123-4567 CFU Destination: 01-23-4567 ISDN MSN: 123-4567 987-6543 PBX Outside Caller PBX Outside Party (01-23-4567) Dials "123-4567". Extn. 1011 (MSN: 123-4567 Forward Destination for Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567) Outside Caller Outside Party (01-23-4567) Dials "123-4567". Extn. 1011 Feature Guide 167 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Conditions • • • 168 Feature Guide The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company. The feature requires the MSN service. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature. 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line. The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set on the PBX as the forward destination for trunk calls; the network is instructed by the PBX. This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature. Call Forwarding—Unconditional (CFU), Call Forwarding—Busy (CFB), and Call Forwarding— No Reply (CFNR) are applied to this feature. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service. [Example] <FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) ISDN by ISDN (P-P)> ISDN CF Request to 01-23-4567 PBX PBX Outside Caller Outside Party (01-23-4567) Dials "01-45-6789". Extn. 1011 (DDI No.: 01-45-6789 Forward Destination for Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567) Outside Caller Outside Party (01-23-4567) Dials "01-45-6789". Extn. 1011 (DDI No.: 01-45-6789 Forward Destination for Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567) Conditions • • • The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company. This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX. This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call. Feature Guide 169 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature. This can be a part of a Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN. This feature allows an ISDN call to be held, and a call to be made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN. A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 141 Call Hold (HOLD) supplementary service. Conditions • • • • • • 170 Feature Guide ISDN Hold Button A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button. The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company. The TRS/Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature. ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature. It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature. The number dialled after activating this feature will not be recorded by SMDR. The call charge fee will be treated as part of the original call you made or received. 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, without occupying a second ISDN line. This feature can be used only when the network supports the "explicit linkage" option. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer (ECT) supplementary service. Conditions • • • • The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company. This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis. Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible. The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX. Feature Guide 171 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Description Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP): The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call. Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP): The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered. These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) supplementary service. ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) supplementary service. [CLIP Example] 1) Dials "87654321". 2) "12345678" is displayed. PBX ISDN Caller (CLIP/COLP No.: 12345678) Called party (CLIP/COLP No.: 87654321) [COLP Example] 1) Dials "111222333". PBX ISDN Caller 3) "111222444" is displayed. Called party (CLIP/COLP No.: 111222333) FWD, IRNA, etc. Answering party (CLIP/COLP No.: 111222444) 2) Answers the call. 172 Feature Guide 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features CLIP/COLP Number: The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP/COLP feature can be assigned as follows: • CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN port (subscriber’s number) ( BRI Subscriber Number *For BRI only) • CLIP/COLP number for each extension ( CLIP/COLP Number Assignment) • CLIP/COLP number for each incoming call distribution group Each extension can select either the CLIP/COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used. The CLIP/COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the G-DN button or receiving a call which arrives at the G-DN button. Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR): It is possible for each extension to restrict to send his telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number. These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) supplementary service. ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) supplementary service. Conditions • • • • • • The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company. The CLIP/COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP/COLP number, such as a doorphone. COLP/CLIR/COLR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX. CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button. The CLIP/COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company. Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number. The CLIP/COLP method differs when using a private network. ( 1.26.1 TIE Line Service) Feature Guide 173 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Malicious Call Identification (MCID) Description An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up. Information on the malicious call will be received later on. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) supplementary service. Conditions • 174 Feature Guide MCID Signal Waiting Time The time allowed for sending an MCID signal while hearing reorder tone is programmable. 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) Description If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line, an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that party’s number is automatically dialled. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) supplementary service. Conditions • This feature is available under the following conditions: a) The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network. b) The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS. • • • • To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming. An extension user can set only one CCBS at a time. The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds. CCBS Signal Waiting Time The time allowed for sending a CCBS signal while hearing busy tone is programmable. Feature Guide 175 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ISDN Extension Description An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for either trunk or extension connection. When extension connection is enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 facsimile, personal computer) or a behind PBX can be connected to the port. If the ISDN port is in point-to-point (P-P) configuration, one terminal device can be connected to the port. If the ISDN port is in point-to-multipoint (P-MP) configuration, a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously. Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN). The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit, 0 through 9 or 00 through 99. [Example] ISDN Port for EXTN. (P-MP) Extn. No.: 1234 1234: Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port and receive a call simultaneously. ... PBX (1234) ISDN Port for EXTN. (P-MP) (1234) ... (1234) Extn. No.: 13X (MSN) 131-139: Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port. ... (131) (132) ... 130: All terminals receive a call simultaneously. (139) Extn. No.: 14XX (MSN) ISDN Port for EXTN. (P-P/P-MP) ISDN Port for EXTN. (P-P/P-MP) Behind PBX Extn. No.: 15XX (MSN) ... (1400) Idle Extension Hunting is available. (1401) ... (1499) 1400-1499: Each terminal receives a call. (Use the DDI/MSN feature of the behind PBX.) Conditions • • 176 Feature Guide Subaddressing Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices. The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned. 1.18 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features • If the last digit of the MSN is "0", all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously, if the specification of each terminal device is available. To use the MSN whose last digit is "0" as an individual MSN, system programming is required for each ISDN port. Feature Guide 177 1.19 E1 Line Service Features 1.19 E1 Line Service Features 1.19.1 E1 Line Service Description The E1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy. The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbs-voice channels at 2.048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM). 1. Channel Type [DR2 (Digital System R2)/E & M-C (Continuous E & M)/E & M-P (Pulsed E & M)] The E1 Card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the three channel types can be assigned to one of the 30 channels of the E1 Card individually according to tariffs and customer needs. 2. E1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type: [Feature Table] Channel Type (1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) ANI DR2 *1 E & M-C *2 E & M-P *2 (5) Call Charge Information : The feature is available. : Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC-R2. *2 : Available only when this PBX is connected to the KX-TDA100, KX-TDA200, or KX-TD500. *1 178 Feature Guide 1.19 E1 Line Service Features [Explanation] Number in the table Feature Description (1) TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. ( Service) 1.26.1 TIE Line (2) Direct Inward Dialling (DID) Refer to the DID feature. ( Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/ Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) in Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY) (3) Direct In Line (DIL) Refer to the DIL feature. ( Direct In Line (DIL) in Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY) (4) Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Outgoing ANI: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line. The sending method is the same as ISDN CLIP service. ( Calling/ Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) in Section 1.18.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY) Incoming ANI: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number. ( 1.15.1 Caller ID) (5) Call Charge Information The call charge meter pulses can be received during a conversation. ( 1.23.2 Charge Metre) Conditions • • Hardware Requirement: an optional E1 Card If an E1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company. Feature Guide 179 1.20 T1 Line Service Features 1.20 T1 Line Service Features 1.20.1 T1 Line Service Description The T1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy. The T1 line carries twenty-four 64 kbps-voice channels at 1.5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM). 1. Channel Type [LCO/GCO/DID/TIE/OPX] The T1 Card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the T1 Card individually according to tariffs and customer needs. 2. T1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type: [Feature Table] Channel Type (1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) OPX (5) ANI LCO GCO DID TIE (E & M) OPX : The feature is available. [Explanation] Number in the Table 180 Feature Guide Feature Description (1) TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. ( Service) 1.26.1 TIE Line (2) Direct Inward Refer to the DID feature. ( Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/ Dialling (DID) Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) in Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY) (3) Direct In Line Refer to the DIL feature. ( Direct In Line (DIL) in (DIL) Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features— SUMMARY ) 1.20 T1 Line Service Features Number in the Table (4) Feature Off Premise Extension (OPX) Description An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were installed locally. The SLT makes and receives a call through the PBX. An extension number can be given to the OPX, and extension data such as COS is also applied. When incoming calls reach the OPX, the ringing pattern is the same as the pattern for an SLT installed directly into the PBX. [Example] Telephone Company SLT T1-LCO T1-OPX T1 Card Extn.103 PBX Dials "103". Extn.101 (5) Extn.102 Automatic Receives the caller’s number from the T1 line. Number When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the Identification same as a Caller ID number. ( 1.15.1 Caller ID) (ANI) Conditions • • • Hardware Requirement: an optional T1 Card If a T1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company. For the TIE (E & M) channel type, it is programmable whether the PBX sends a dial tone to extensions when a trunk is seized on a trunk basis. Feature Guide 181 1.21 Voice Mail Features 1.21 Voice Mail Features 1.21.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group Description A VPS can be connected to extension ports on the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM group. This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for transferred calls and incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls. 1. VM Group Type Type Description VM (DTMF) Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features. VM (DPT) Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration features. A maximum of 12 ports (24 channels) of the VPS can form each group. One Panasonic KX-TVS/KX-TVP system can be in only one group. A maximum of two VPSs can be connected to each PBX. One VPS must be in its own VM (DTMF) group and/or VM (DPT) group. Thus each PBX can support a maximum of two VM (DTMF) groups and two VM (DPT) groups. [Example] PBX DPT Port SLT Port VM (DPT) Group Floating extn. no. 100 VM (DTMF) Group Floating extn. no. 250 Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104 Extn.117 Extn.118 Extn.119 Extn.120 DPT Port DPT Port DPT Port DPT Port VPS ( DPT [Digital] Integration) 182 Feature Guide SLT Port SLT Port SLT Port SLT Port VPS (DTMF Integration) 1.21 Voice Mail Features [VM (DTMF) Group Assignment] Assign a floating extension number to the desired VM (DTMF) group. Incoming calls will hunt starting at the lowest location number. A name can be assigned to each VM (DTMF) group. [Example] VM Group 1 Floating Extn. No. Group Name Location No. -01 -02 : 250 A Company (VPS) Extension No. 117 118 : [VM (DPT) Group Assignment] Assign the VM (DPT) group number and the location number to the desired extension port as its attribute. Incoming calls will hunt starting at the lowest location number. A floating extension number and a name can be assigned to each VM (DPT) group. All extension ports for one VM (DPT) group should be connected to only one DHLC Card or only one DLC Card. The PBX port which assigned the DPT attribution as "01" in a VM (DPT) group (e.g., VPSG 02-01) must be connected to VPS port 01. The digital integration is performed between these ports. [Example] Extn. Port No. 10101 10102 10103 10104 10105 : *1 *2 : : Attribute*¹ VPSG1-01 Normal VPSG1-02 VPSG2-01 DSS-Console VM Group 1 Floating Extn. No.*² Group Name Location No. -01 -02 : 100 B Company (VPS) Extn. Port No. 10101 10103 : VPS/DSS Console/PC Console Assignment VM Group Floating Extension Number 2. Incoming Calls to VM Group When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt starting at the lowest location number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings for each extension port are disregarded. It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming. If "Disable" is selected, the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing feature. If "Disable" is selected and Intercept Routing feature is not set, busy tone will be sent. Conditions • It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g., FWD, Idle Extension Hunting) on the extension in the group. The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the extension. Feature Guide 183 1.21 Voice Mail Features • 184 Feature Guide One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature. For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123) of the VPS (extension number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialling button. When pressing this button, the outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard. 1.21 Voice Mail Features 1.21.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Description The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other. The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform the extension status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT. The following answering services and features are available: 1. Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox. [Example] The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for." The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the PBX. The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike's voice mail. I am sorry I cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back." The caller leaves a message. If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM (DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller-dialled number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number. [Available Features for Follow on ID] a) b) c) d) FWD to a Mailbox Intercept Routing to a Mailbox Call Transfer to a Mailbox Listening to a Message in a Mailbox 2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance. 3. VM AA Service, AA VM Service It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service or vice versa. Feature Guide 185 1.21 Voice Mail Features System Explanation 1. Service Mode Assignment Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to correspond with the assignment of the VPS. 2. DTMF Command Assignment Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings. Command (Default) Switching to VM #6 Switching to AA #8 Recording message H Listening message H Note: H = Mailbox Number 3. VM Service a) FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number. [FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection] If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS. It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by selecting "AA" through system programming. Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Mailbox (Default) Switching to VM command + Recording message command Recording message command (H [H = Mailbox No.]) (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.]) AA Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8) None (DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.) b) Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number. [Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection] If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS. It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by selecting "AA" through system programming. 186 Feature Guide 1.21 Voice Mail Features Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command + Recording message command Recording message command (H [H = Mailbox No.]) (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.]) AA Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8) None (Default) (DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.) [Example of a) & b)] Trunk Call Sent "#6" + "102". PBX mailbox number Switching to VM command FWD, Intercept Transfer VPS (In AA service mode) Operator Extn. 102 VM Port 1 VM Port 2 VM (DTMF) Group VM Port X VM Port 3 c) Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. The extension user should use the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number. Feature Guide 187 1.21 Voice Mail Features [Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number] Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode Switching to VM command + Recording message command (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.]) In VM Service Mode Recording message command (H [H = Mailbox No.]) [Example] Trunk Call Sent "#6" + "103". PBX mailbox number Switching to VM command Transfer with VM Transfer button + extension number (103) Extension (Operator) VPS (In AA service mode) VM Port 1 VM Port 2 VM (DTMF) Group VM Port X VM Port 3 d) Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the MESSAGE button light) on the corresponding telephone as notification. Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the MESSAGE button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button light). When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox. 188 Feature Guide 1.21 Voice Mail Features [Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button] Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode Switching to VM command + Listening message command (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.]) In VM Service Mode Listening message command ( H [H = Mailbox No.]) [Example] PBX Pressing the MESSAGE button Extn. 102 Sent "#6" + " ", "102". Listening message command, mailbox number Switching to VM command VPS (In AA service mode) Mailbox for Extn. 102 4. AA Service If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone). Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings. [The DTMF Status Signal and Condition] Status Condition Default Command RBT (ringback tone) The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension. 1 BT (busy tone) The called extension is busy. 2 ROT (reorder tone) The dialled number is invalid. 3 DND (DND tone) The called extension has set DND. 4 Answer The called extension has answered the call. 5 FWD VM RBT The called extension has set FWD to (FWD to Voice Mail VPS and the PBX is calling another port ringback tone) of the VPS. 6 FWD VM BT (FWD The called extension has set FWD to to Voice Mail busy VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy. tone) 7 Feature Guide 189 1.21 Voice Mail Features Status Condition Default Command FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone) The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialled. FWD or Idle Extension Hunting may be assigned by the called extension. 8 Confirm (confirmation tone) The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has been successfully set or cancelled (e.g., Message Waiting) on the extension. 9 Disconnect The caller has hung up. #9 [Example] 1 1 An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS greets the caller: "Thank you for calling Panasonic. If you know the extension number of the person you wish… ". 2 The caller dials the extension number (extn. 102). The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the PBX. 3 If the extension is not available, the PBX sends DTMF status signal of the extension (busy status) to the VPS. 4 The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller: "Sorry. The extension is busy. Would you like to leave a message… ". PBX 2 Transfer 3 Sent "2". Busy Status Busy Extn. 102 4 VPS Conditions • • • • • • • 190 Feature Guide Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter. It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the Follow on ID to the VPS. It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS. It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox Access ID). The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command is programmable. The Pause time for the VPS is programmable. Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper recording. 1.21 Voice Mail Features 1.21.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Description A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion. DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX. Feature Explanation 1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically. 2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number. 3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS. If the Intercept to Mailbox setting is enabled through system programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number. 4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. The extension user should use the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number. 5. Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access) If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the MESSAGE button light) on the corresponding telephone as notification. Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the MESSAGE button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox. When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox Access). It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS. 6. VPS Trunk Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the VPS trunk group number (message number) and time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant assigned for the call to the VPS. Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message (company greeting) to the caller. Corresponding VPS trunk group number and Feature Guide 191 1.21 Voice Mail Features tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming trunk call as follows: a) DIL/TIE: the setting of each trunk port b) DID/DDI: the setting of each location number for DID/DDI c) MSN: the setting of each MSN [Example] For DID Calls: Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number (message number) and tenant number. [DID Programming Example] DID Destination VPS Trunk Tenant Location DID No. DID Name Group No. No. No. Day Lunch Break Night 0001 123-4567 105 100 105 100 John White 1 1 0002 123-2468 102 100 102 100 Tom Smith 2 3 : : : : : : : : : [VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment] Trunk Group No. 1 2 : Company Greeting No. Incoming Call Service ·· Day 1 Custom Service 11 ·· Lunch 2 Custom Service 29 ·· Break 3 Custom Service 31 ·· Night 4 Custom Service 12 ·· Day 5 Custom Service 21 ·· Lunch 6 Custom Service 15 ·· Break 7 Custom Service 42 ·· Night 8 Custom Service 30 ·· : : : ·· Explanation: A DID call reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature. According to the [DID Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS. Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number. 192 Feature Guide 1.21 Voice Mail Features Trunk Call Trunk Call 123-4567 123-2468 Sends the following information: · VPS Trunk Group: 1 · Time mode: Day PBX Intercept Sends the following information: · VPS Trunk Group: 3 · Time mode: Night Tenant 1 Tenant 3 (Company A) (Company B) VPS (Floating Extn.No.100) Extn. 105 Extn. 102 7. Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call, the PBX sends the caller’s identification number/name to the VPS. 8. Status Notification to the VPS After the call is transferred by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the transferred extension (e.g., busy) to the VPS. 9. Paging by the VPS The VPS can perform the paging feature using the recorded message. 10. Live Call Screening (LCS) PT users can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring can be carried out in two ways: Each extension user may choose which through personal programming (Live Call Screening Mode Set). Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker. Private mode: The user will hear an alarm tone. To monitor the call, the user goes offhook with the handset or speakerphone. 11. Two-way Recording into the VPS A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone. Use the Two-way Record button to record into his own mailbox. Use the Two-way Transfer button to record into someone else’s mailbox. Feature Guide 193 1.21 Voice Mail Features Note When you record Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded. 12. VPS Data Control by the PBX The data of date and time is controlled by the PBX. 13. Remote PBX Data Control by the VPS The FWD of an extension can be controlled by the VPS. Conditions [General] • • Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter. If there are extensions with five-digit extension numbers, DPT (Digital) Integration does not work. [Live Call Screening (LCS)] • • • • An SLT, which is connected to an LCS activated PT in parallel, can also be used to monitor message recording. Even if the SLT user is using a cordless telephone, an alarm tone through the handset lets him know that a message is being recorded. To intercept the call, press Flash/Recall button or flash the hookswitch. LCS Button A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button. Live Call Screening Password Control To prevent unauthorised monitoring, a personal password must be set by the LCS user. If the user forgets the password, it can be cleared by a manager. Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set [After Answering]). [Two-way Recording into the VPS] • • Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An extension number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch record button for the mailbox of the specified extension. When all of the VPS ports are busy: a) Pressing the Two-way Record button sends an alarm tone b) Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone. 194 Feature Guide 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 1.22.1 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Connection Description This PBX supports the connection of a DWX (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690). It is possible to use the PBX features using the DWX like a PT. DWX is also known as the Digital Portable Station (PS). Conditions • • • Hardware Requirement: CSIF Card and a Cell Station (CS). The DWX registration is required through the system programming ( DWX (Digital Wireless Extension) Registration). The registration can be cancelled ( DWX Termination). Handover Even if a DWX user moves during a conversation, the portable will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call (Handover). Handover is not available when a cell is busy or there is no CS within range. PBX CS Handover: Calls will not be disconnected. CS Interface CS Feature Guide 195 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 1.22.2 DWX Ring Group Description DWX ring group is a group of DWX extensions which receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. If all DWXs are called using the extension number assigned for each DWX ( DWX (Digital Wireless Extension) Registration), all channels for the DWX ring group may be used and a DWX user in the group may not be able to make another call. If the multiple DWXs in a DWX ring group will be called using a floating extension number assigned to the group, only one channel will be used. One DWX can belong to multiple groups. DWX Ring Group 01 DWX Ring Group 02 DWX Ring Group 03 ·· Floating Extn. No. 301 302 303 ·· Group Name Sales 1 Sales 2 Sales 3 ·· DWX01 ·· DWX02 ·· DWX03 ·· DWX04 ·· DWX05 ·· DWX06 ·· ·· DWX07 : : : DWX Ring Group 1 (Floating Extn. No. 301 Name: Sales 1) DWX01 DWX03 DWX02 : : DWX Ring Group 2 (Floating Extn. No. 302 Name: Sales 2) DWX04 DWX06 DWX05 Conditions • • DWX Ring Group; A maximum of 24 groups for the KX-TD7580 and 32 groups for other DWXs can be created. When a DWX joins a DWX ring group, the following personal settings are disregarded: a) When the DWX ring group is called: – Delayed Ringing – Display information when the incoming calls arrive; The settings (e.g., display priority) are disregarded. It is also not possible to switch the displayed items manually. 196 Feature Guide 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features – The setting which is assigned on the DWX (e.g., FWD) – The status of the DWX (e.g., busy) b) Log-in/log-out setting (from the DWX ring group/from the incoming call distribution group which the DWX ring group belongs to). Note Log-in/log-out setting of the DWX ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded. DWX Ring Group Log-out Log-in DWX Ring Group Log-out Incoming Call Distribution Group DWX Ring Group Log-in Log-out Log-in • When the DWX ring group is called using the floating extension number, the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number. However, the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number. Feature Guide 197 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 1.22.3 DWX Directory Description A DWX user can store numbers and/or names in the directory. A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in the directory. The DWX user will use the following directories for easy operation depending on the DWX type: Type Description DWX Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers. 198 PBX System Speed Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names ( System Speed Dialling Name) and numbers ( System Speed Dialling Number). PBX Extension Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension names ( Extension Name). Shortcut Directory Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature names and numbers. Feature Guide 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 1.22.4 DWX Feature Buttons Description A DWX user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons (button + a specified number, , or #) and/or display operation. The flexible buttons and the display are customised through DWX programming. The button assignment is the same for PT. ( 1.17.2 Flexible Buttons). Some special feature buttons (e.g., WAVESEARCH button) may be customised depending on the DWX type. Feature Guide 199 1.22 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 1.22.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Description A DWX can be used in parallel with a wired telephone (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the DWX is the sub telephone. When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled, the two telephones share one extension number (main telephone’s extension number) like XDP Parallel mode for a DPT and an SLT. Conditions • • • If one of the telephones goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the telephone going off-hook. Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a DWX. The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature through COS programming ( Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone). Once this feature is set, the setting at the wired telephone cannot be changed unless a DWX changes the setting. PT extensions with XDP Parallel mode (DPT + SLT) cannot be paired with a DWX. PBX Cell Station DHLC XDP Parallel mode Cordless Phone Proprietary Telephone (PT) Extn. 102 200 Feature Guide Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Proprietary Telephone (PT) Extn. 103 DWX 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features 1.23.1 SMDR Description Automatically records detailed information for each extension. 1. SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output the SMDR data. The following devices can be connected: • Serial Interface (RS-232C) port: Personal computer, printer, etc. 2. SMDR Output Data The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port: a) b) c) d) Trunk call information (incoming/outgoing) Intercom call information (outgoing) Log-in/Log-out information System error log ( 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information) Memory for SMDR: A specified number of call information can be memorised for each PBX. If more calls are originated or received, the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one. Feature Guide 201 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features 3. SMDR Format Type and Contents There are the following three types of output format which can be selected through system programming: Pattern A: 80 digits without call charge information Date Time (8 digits) (7) Ext (5) CO Dial Number (2) (25) Ring Duration ACC Code (4) (8) (10) 01/02/02 10:03AM 12005 01/02/02 10:07AM 12005 01/02/02 10:15AM 12005 01/02/02 10:30AM *123 01 01 01 01 <I>12345678901234567890 <I> 1234567890123456-123 1234567890123456 5'15 0'05 01/02/02 01:07PM 12345 01/02/02 01:07PM 12345 01/02/02 01:07PM 12345 01/02/02 01:07PM 12345 01/02/02 01:07PM 12345 01 01 01 01 01 <I>ABC COMPANY12345678 0'05 <D>CDE9876<I>Q COMPANY 0'05 ABC COMPANY12345678 123.............. 123456XX 01/02/02 08:33AM 12345 01/02/02 01:07PM 12345 01/02/02 03:35PM 12345 01/02/02 03:45PM 12345 (1) (2) (3) CD (3) 00:00'00 NA 00:01'05 9876543210 00:01'05 9876543210 TR 00:01'05 9876543210 00:01'05 9876543210 00:01'05 9876543210 00:01'05 00:01'05 00:12'05 98765 In the office LOG IN LOG OUT EXT12355 (4) (6) (5) (7) (8) (9) ACC Code (10) CD (3) Pattern B: 80 digits with call charge information Date Time (8 digits) (7) Ext (5)* CO Dial Number (2) (20) 01/02/02 10:03AM12101 01 01/02/02 10:07AM 2005 01 (1) (2) (3) (4) Duration Cost (8) (8+2) <I> NA 12345678901234567890 00:00'05 00560.00EU 9876543210 (7) (5) (10) (8) (9) *: If an extension number is five digits long, there is no space between "Time" and "Ext". Pattern C: 120 digits Date Time (8 digits) (7) Ext (5) CO (4) Dial Number (50) Ring Duration Cost (4) (8) (8+3) ACC Code CD (10) (3) 01/02/02 10:03AM 12301 0001 123456789012345678901234567890 00:00'05 00560.00EUR 9876543210 TR 01/02/02 10:07AM 12301 0001 <I>1234567890123456789012345 0'05 00:00'05 9876543210 TR (1) 202 Feature Guide (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (10) (8) (9) 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features [Explanation] The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples. For the programmable items, refer to the following [Programmable Items]. Number in the Pattern Item Description (1) Date Shows the date of the call. (2) Time Shows the end time of a call as Hour/Minute/AM or PM. (3) Ext (Extension) Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc., which was engaged in the call. Also shows the following codes: Dxxx: Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone (xxx=doorphone number) Txxx: Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service (xxx=trunk group number) *xxx: Verified call (xxx=verified code) (4) CO (Trunk) Shows the trunk number used for the call. For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred. (5) Dial Number [Trunk Call] Outgoing Trunk Call Shows the dialled telephone number. Valid digits are as follows: 0 through 9, , # P: Pause F: Flash/recall/EFA signal =: A Host PBX Access code . (dot): Secret dialling X: Privacy dial Incoming Trunk Call Shows <I> + the caller’s identification name/number. It is also possible to show the DDI/DID/MSN call information. In this case, <D> + DDI/DID/MSN name/number is added before <I> . [Outgoing Intercom Call] Shows the dialled extension number followed by "EXT". [Log-in/Log-out] Shows the log-in or log-out status. (6) Ring Shows the ring duration before answering a call in Minutes/Seconds. (7) Duration Shows the duration of the call in Hours/Minutes/Seconds. (8) Acc Code (Account Code) Shows the account code appended to the call. Feature Guide 203 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features Number in the Pattern Item Description (9) CD (Condition Code) Shows other call information with the following codes: CL: Collect call TR: Transfer FW: FWD to trunk D0: Call using DISA or TIE line service RM: Remote maintenance (modem) NA: Not answered call (10) Cost Shows the call charge. [Programmable Items] Item 204 Feature Guide Description Outgoing trunk call Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown. This setting is common throughout the PBX ( SMDR Outgoing Call Printing). COS programming is also required. Incoming trunk call Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown ( SMDR Incoming Call Printing). Outgoing intercom call Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded. Log-in/Log-out status Controls whether the log-in/log-out status is recorded. ARS code Controls whether the user-dialled number or the modified number is shown. Caller’s identification Controls whether the caller’s identification number, name, number and name, or none is shown. If "none" is selected, only <I> will be shown. DID/DDI/MSN number Controls whether the DID/DDI/MSN number, name, number and name, or none is shown. If "none" is selected, <D> will not be shown. Secret dialling Controls secret dialling. If enabled, the dialled number will be shown as dots. Privacy dial Enables or disables privacy dial. If enabled, the last two digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as "X". (e.g., 123-456-78XX) Date order The date order is changeable; month/day/year, day/month/ year, year/month/day, year/day/month. Language The display language can be selected. 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features Conditions • SMDR Format The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer: a) Page Length: determines the number of lines per page ( SMDR Page Length). b) Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page ( SMDR Skip Perforation). c) Character Code: determines which code to be used; IBM ASCII or ISO-8859-1. • • • • The SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset. If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be recorded on the SMDR. If "*" marks are displayed for the date, time, ring, and duration (e.g., **/**/** **:****), the date and time setting has been changed four or more times during the ring and duration are counted. The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR: a) Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation b) Trunk-to-trunk calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (recording each as "incoming • • call" and "outgoing call") The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period ( Call Duration Count Start Time) between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the PBX starts counting the call. A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR. If the reverse signal detection has been set ( LCOT Reverse Circuit), the PBX will start counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer. Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS232C) port ( New Line, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits). a) New Line Code: Select the code for the personal computer or printer. If the personal computer or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR." If not, select "CR+LF." b) Baud Rate: A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the personal computer or printer. c) Word Length: A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character. d) Parity Bit: A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the personal computer or printer. e) Stop Bit Length: A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the personal computer or printer. Feature Guide 205 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features 1.23.2 Charge Metre Description The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party. The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and the SMDR. 1. Call Charge Signal Service Call charge signal service from the telephone company depends on the trunk being used. Trunk Service Analogue trunk Pay Tone* (CID/Pay Card is required.) ISDN line Advice of Charge (AOC) E1 line Metre Pulse *: When the pay tone service is used, pay tone type (12 kHz/16 kHz) should be selected ( Pay Tone Signal Type). 2. Call Charge Display – Up to 7 digits (e.g., 88888.75) – The decimal point position (the number of significant decimal digits) for currency is programmable. ( Decimal Point for Currency) – Up to 3 currency characters are programmable. (e.g., EUR or for Euro) ( Currency). – The currency position either front or back of the call charge is programmable. (e.g., 45.12 or 45.12 ) 3. Margin/Tax Rate Assignment It is possible to add a margin ( Charge Margin) and the tax ( Charge Tax) to the call charges. The call charge rate per meter indication is programmable on a trunk group basis ( Charge Rate per Unit). [Calculation Method] The margin or tax rate must be xx.xx % (whole number part: two digits, decimal fraction: two digits). A calculation method depends on the information which is sent from the telephone company; meter indication or charge. a) Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication: [Meter indication received from the telephone company] [1 – Tax Rate] [Call Charge Rate] [1 – Margin Rate] b) Call charge with tax and margin in charge: [Charge received from the telephone company] [1 – Tax Rate] [1 – Margin Rate] The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit. 4. Total Call Charge – A PT user can show the total call charges on the display. – The call charge is totalled on an extension, trunk, or verified code basis. 206 Feature Guide 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features – The call charge on a verified code is not totalled for each extension. 5. Budget Management It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verified code. For example, an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for the telephone usage. If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further trunk calls. A manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge [ 1.7.2 Budget Management]. 6. Call Charge Management An extension assigned as the manager can use the following call charge management features in Manager Programming mode: a) b) c) d) e) f) Call Charge Fee Reference and Clear, for Each Extension/Verified Code Call Charge Fee Reference for Each Trunk Call Charge Rate Set for Each Trunk Group All Clear Call Charge Fee Print Out Budget Management for Each Extension/Verified Code. [Examples of Call Charge Fee Reference] ****************************************************** * Charge Meter Print Out - Total & All CO * ****************************************************** Total Charge: 00175.95 CO Line 001: 003: 00161.00 ******************************************************* * Charge Meter Print Out - All Extensions * ******************************************************* Extension & Verified Code *775: 00194.00 *102: 00073.00 *776: 00161.00 106: 00161.00 104: 00194.00 00194.00 002: 105: 00073.00 00073.00 004: 00033.00 (Verified Code) 107: 00033.00 Note: *XXX : Call Charge Fee Reference for a verified code (XXX = verified code) Conditions [General] • • Call Charge Fee Reference by Charge Reference Button A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the Charge Reference button. A flexible button can be customised as the Charge Reference button. It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line after an alarm tone or only to send an alarm tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit Feature Guide 207 1.23 Administrative Information Output Features during a conversation. However even if disconnecting the line after an alarm tone is selected, the line will not be disconnected properly when multiple callers, who used the same extension number or the same verified code to make a trunk call, are in a conversation. [Pay Tone Service] • • 208 Feature Guide It is possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company. It is possible to enable the PBX sends the flash/recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation (in on-hook status) to receive the call charge information. 1.24 Extension Controlling Features 1.24 Extension Controlling Features 1.24.1 Personal Password Description Each extension user can have his own password through system programming ( Personal Password) or personal programming (Personal Password) to set features or access his own telephone remotely. The following features cannot be used without the password: a) b) c) d) e) Live Call Screening (LCS) Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock, Personal/Speed Dialling Display Lock Walking Extension Remote Extension Control and Remote COS Access Remote Extension Control and Remote COS Access using DISA Conditions • • • Personal Password Lock If the wrong password is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect password is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the password against the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the password will be cleared. Remote Personal Password Clear If an extension user forgets his password, a manager can clear the password. Then the extension user can assign a new password. Personal Password Display It is possible to select whether to show the personal password on the display through system programming. By default, it is shown as dots. Feature Guide 209 1.24 Extension Controlling Features 1.24.2 Personal Programme Clear Description Extension users can cancel all the following features set on their own telephone at once: Features After Setting Absent Message Off Automatic Callback Busy Cleared BGM Off FWD*/DND* Off Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Waiting* Disable Data Line Security Off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Log-in/Log-out Log-in Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared. Paging Deny Allow Parallelled Telephone Paired SLT will ring. Hot Line* Off Timed Reminder Cleared Note: The features with "*" can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature. This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear. Conditions • 210 Feature Guide Extension Lock and the personal password will not be cleared by this feature. 1.24 Extension Controlling Features 1.24.3 Walking Extension Description It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you. Settings such as extension number, one-touch dialling memory, and COS are all available to you at the new location. [Example] This feature is useful when; • Moving location • There is no specific desk for your use. This feature is also known as Walking Station. Conditions • • • This feature is available by switching the telephone between PT and PT, SLT and SLT, PT and SLT. Moving across the tenants is also possible. The incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location. A personal password is required to use this feature. Feature Guide 211 1.24 Extension Controlling Features 1.24.4 Timed Reminder Description Each extension user can set an alarm for any time as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, he hears special dial tone. If a voice message is used, he hears a prerecorded voice message. Conditions • • • • 212 Feature Guide Be sure that the PBX clock works. Setting a new time clears the previous time. Programmable Time The Alarm Ringing Duration time, the number of alarm repeat times, and intervals are programmable through system programming. To use the voice message feature: The MSG Card is required and the message must be recorded. An extension assigned as the manager can record messages. ( 1.14.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)) The different message can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). 1.24 Extension Controlling Features 1.24.5 Remote Extension Control by User Description A user can remotely change the feature settings (e.g., FWD) and time service mode for his own extension from inside or outside the PBX using DISA. This feature can be used only on the extensions which are allowed to be controlled remotely on a COS basis. The following features are available: a) b) c) d) e) FWD/DND Log-in/Log-out Absent Message Extension Lock Time Service Mode Switch This feature is also known as Remote Station Control by User. Conditions • • • Personal Password A personal password ( Personal Password) is required to use this feature. If the wrong password is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the feature number for changing the personal password is entered after entering the verified code ( + verified code), the password for the verified code will be changed. Remote operation is not available for the extensions in the Internal Call Block mode ( Internal Call Block in Section 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY). Feature Guide 213 1.25 Audible Tone Features 1.25 Audible Tone Features 1.25.1 Dial Tone Description The following dial tones inform extensions about features activated on the extensions: Each dial tone type has two frequencies (e.g., dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B). Type Description Tone 1A/1B A normal dial tone is heard when: a) No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set, or b) ARS is used. Tone 2A/2B Any one of the features below is set. • Absent Message • BGM • FWD • Call Pickup Deny • Call Waiting • DND • Extension Lock • Executive Busy Override Deny • Hot Line • Timed Reminder Tone 3A/3B Any one of the features below is performed. • Account Code Entry • Consultation Hold • Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message • Answering a DISA call with no message Tone 4A/4B Messages are waiting for the extension. Conditions • • • • 214 Feature Guide Dial Tone Type A/B It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4. If "Type A" is selected, all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A. The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "Type A" is selected for the ARS, dial tone 1A will be heard. If "Type B" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard Distinctive Dial tone Distinctive dial tone mode can be disabled. In this case, dial tone 1 will be sent. Tone Patterns and Frequencies All tone patterns and frequencies can be arranged as desired. For default patterns, refer to the Appendix in Section 3.1. Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM (DPT/DTMF) group. 1.25 Audible Tone Features 1.25.2 Confirmation Tone Description At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users. Type Description Tone 1 a) Sent when the setting is accepted. b) Sent when a call is received in Voice Calling mode. The caller’s voice will be heard after the tone. Tone 2 a) Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged. b) Sent when a call is received in Hands-free Answerback mode. Tone 3-1 a) Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature. b) Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation: • Hands-free Answerback mode • Voice Calling mode Tone 3-2 Sent just before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers: • Call Park Retrieve • Call Pickup • Hold Retrieve • Paging Answer • TAFAS Tone 4-1 Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call. (e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Two-way Recording.) Tone 4-2 Sent when moving from a three-party call to a two-party call. (e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Two-way Recording.) Tone 5 Sent when a call is placed on hold (including Consultation Hold). Conditions • • Confirmation Tone Patterns and Frequencies All confirmation tone patterns and frequencies can be arranged as desired. For default patterns, refer to the Appendix in Section 3.1. It is possible to eliminate each tone. Feature Guide 215 1.26 Networking Features 1.26 Networking Features 1.26.1 TIE Line Service Description A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system (PBX or telephone company). By using TIE lines, the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included. Interface The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network: Interface Network Type E&M Analogue T1 (E & M) Digital (64 kbps × 24 channels) E1 (E & M) Digital (64 kbps × 30 channels) BRI/PRI (QSIG) Digital (ISDN 2B+D/30B+D/23B+D) VoIP Internet Protocol (IP) A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned "Private" as the networking type. ( 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY) Explanation 1. Making a TIE Line Call One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call. a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code) Dial the [Extension Number] only. 216 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features [Example] PBX-1 TIE Line Interface Extn.1011 TIE Line Interface Interface Extn.1012 Dials "3011". PBX-3 PBX-2 Interface Extn. 3011 Extn. 2011 Dials "2011". Explanation: To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX (e.g., 10XX for PBX-1, 20XX for PBX-2) to avoid having the same extension number. Case 1: Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2011". Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "2011" of PBX-2. Case 2: Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials extension number "3011". Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "3011" of PBX-3. b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code) Dial the [TIE line access number] + [PBX Code] + [Extension Number]. [Example] PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX-3 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 PBX Code 953 TIE Line Interface Extn.1011 Dials "7-953-1011". TIE Line Interface Interface Extn.1012 Extn. 1011 Interface Extn. 1011 Dials "7-952-1011". [PBX code] [TIE line access no.] [Extn. no.] Feature Guide 217 1.26 Networking Features Explanation: To use this method, it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension. Case 1: Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011". Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "1011" of PBX-2. Case 2: Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "953", and extension number "1011". Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "1011" of PBX-3. 2. TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 2.1 To Make a TIE Line Call The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network. The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number. There are two system programmes for the tables: TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the leading digits (PBX code or extension number) and trunk group hunt sequence. TIE Modify Removed Digits/Added Number: used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call. This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration. [Programming Examples] Your PBX is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network. To identify the trunk route as illustrated, you should make the following tables. a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code) TIE Line Network PBX-4 PBX-3 Extn. 4xxx b-2nd) 3xxx TRG 2 c) 4xxx If you dial: a) 2xxx b) 3xxx c) 4xxx (2, 3, 4: Other PBX Extension Number [TIE] in the Flexible Numbering Plan)* *: 218 Feature Guide Extn. 3xxx TRG 1 a) 2xxx b-1st) 3xxx Extn. 1xxx PBX-1 2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Extn. 2xxx PBX-2 1.26 Networking Features [TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1] Priority 1 Priority 2 .. Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification . . Trunk No. Digits Trunk Group Removed Added Group Removed Added . . Digits No. Digits No. 01 2 1 0 02 3 1 0 03 4 2 0 : : : : .. 2 0 .. .. : : : : : Explanation: Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [2XXX]: The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 2XXX Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [3XXX]: The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 3XXX The 2nd route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 3XXX Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [4XXX]: The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 4XXX b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code) TIE Line Network PBX-4 PBX-3 PBX Code 954 PBX Code 953 Extn. xxxx If you dial: a) 7-952-xxxx Extn. xxxx b-2nd) 953#-xxxx c) 954#-xxxx TRG 2 b) 7-953-xxxx c) 7-954-xxxx (7: TIE Line Access Number in the Flexible Numbering Plan)* *: TRG 1 a) 952-xxxx b-1st) 953-xxxx Extn. 1xxx PBX-1 PBX Code 951 Extn. xxxx PBX-2 PBX Code 952 2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Feature Guide 219 1.26 Networking Features [TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1] Priority 1 Location Leading Dial Modification No. Digits Trunk Group Removed Added Digits No. 01 952 1 0 02 953 1 0 03 954 2 3 954# : : : : : Priority 2 .. Dial Modification Trunk Group Removed Added Digits No. .. .. 2 3 : : Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 952+XXXX]: The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 952–XXXX Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 953+XXXX]: The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 953–XXXX The 2nd route — trunk group (TRG) 2 953#–XXXX Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 954+XXXX]: The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 220 Feature Guide 953# . . .. Explanation: Sending no. to PBX-4: .. 954#–XXXX : : 1.26 Networking Features 2.2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code) [Example] PBX-4 PBX-3 1 PBX-2 removes digits from and/or adds number to the number sent from PBX-1 "3011" according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX-2. If the modified number is an extension number of PBX-2 (e.g., 2011), the call will be received at extension "2011". If not, PBX-2 checks the modified number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX-2. 2 If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX (PBX-3). 3 PBX-3 removes digits from and/or adds number to the number sent from PBX-2 "3011" according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX-3. The modified number "3011" is an extension number of PBX-3. The call is received at extension "3011". 3 Extn. 3011 2 3011 1 3011 Extn. 2011 Extn. 1011 Dials "3011". PBX-1 PBX-2 Feature Guide 221 1.26 Networking Features b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code) [Example] PBX-4 PBX-3 1 PBX-2 removes digits from and/or adds number to the number sent from PBX-1 "9531011" according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX-2. If the modified number has the PBX code of PBX-2 "952", the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX-2 (e.g., 1011of PBX-2). If not, PBX-2 checks the modified number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX-2. 2 If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX (PBX-3). 3 PBX-3 removes digits from and/or adds number to the number sent from PBX-2 "9531011" according to the assignment for each trunk port of PBX-3. The modified number "953-1011" has the PBX code of PBX-3 "953". The call is received at extension "1011" of PBX-3. PBX Code 953 PBX Code 954 3 Extn. 1011 2 953-1011 1 953-1011 Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 PBX-1 Dials "7-953-1011". PBX Code 951 PBX-2 PBX Code 952 3. TIE Line and Trunk Connection To connect the TIE line with the trunk, the following patterns are available: 1) Trunk-to-TIE Access 2) TIE-to-Trunk Access 3) Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access 3.1 Trunk-to-TIE Access It is possible to assign an extension of other PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX. 222 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features a) Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment [Example] Telephone Company Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-1 Trunk PBX-2 DID No: 123-4567 Destination: 2011 TIE Line Interface Interface Outside Caller Dials "123-4567". Extn. 2011 Extn. 1011 (DID No.:123-4567) Explanation: An outside caller dials the DID number "123-4567". The call is sent to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID call destination ( DID Destination) of PBX-1. b) FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the TIE Line [Example] Telephone Company Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-1 PBX-2 Trunk TIE Line Interface Interface Forwarded/Transferred /Intercepted to 2011 Outside Caller Extn. 1011 Dials "123-4567". Extn. 2011 (DID No.:123-4567) Feature Guide 223 1.26 Networking Features Explanation: An outside caller dials the DID number "123-4567". The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-1), and the call is forwarded, transferred, or intercepted to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line. 3.2 TIE-to-Trunk Access The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines. a) Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by Making a TIE Line Call Method [Example] <Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)> Telephone Company Trunk 01-23-4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-2 PBX-1 9-01-23-4567 Interface TIE Line TRG 2 Interface Outside Party Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011 (01-23-4567) Dials "802-9-01-23-4567". Explanation: 1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. PBX-1 sends the call to PBX-2 through the trunk group (TRG) 2 (TIE line). 3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567". 224 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features <PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)> Telephone Company Trunk 01-23-4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952-9-01-23-4567 Interface TIE Line TRG 2 Interface Outside Party Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 (01-23-4567) Dials "7-952-9-01-23-4567" or "802-952-9-01-23-4567". Explanation: 1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567"; or dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), PBX code "952", Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. The call is connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952". Feature Guide 225 1.26 Networking Features b) Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by the ARS feature [Example] <Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)> Telephone Company Trunk 01-23-4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-2 PBX-1 9-01-23-4567 Interface TIE Line TRG 2 Interface Outside Party Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011 (01-23-4567) Dials "9-01-23-4567". Explanation: 1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1. 3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567". 226 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features <PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)> Telephone Company Trunk 01-23-4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952-9-01-23-4567 Interface TIE Line TRG 2 Interface Outside Party Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 (01-23-4567) Dials "9-01-23-4567". Explanation: 1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1. 3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567". Feature Guide 227 1.26 Networking Features c) Blocking of Trunk Call through Other PBXs and How to Override It To prohibit a TIE line call to go through PBX-2 for making a trunk call, if PBX-2 is Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX (e.g., KX-TDA100 or KX-TDA200), PBX-2 should disable the trunk group of the outgoing call from PBX-2 against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to PBX-2 ( Outgoing Trunk Group Number) like the programming example shown below. TRS/Barring applies to a TIE line call on a COS of the trunk group of the incoming call basis. To override this prohibition, access the DISA floating extension number of PBX-2 and enter a verified code to change to the COS temporarily. [Programming Example of PBX-2] Trunk Group No. COS No. 1 3 2 2 3 2 : : TRG of Incoming Call Outgoing Call TRG 1 TRG 2 TRG 3 … : : : : COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 : 228 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features [Example] Telephone Company Trunk Trunk 01-23-4567 TRG 3 of PBX-2 TIE Line Network PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX-Code 951 Interface 952-9-01-23-4567 TIE Line TRG 2 of PBX-1 TRG 1(COS 3) of PBX-2 PBX-Code 952 Interface DISA 952-(DISA Floating extn. no. + verified code entry feature no. + + verified code + verified code password)-9-01-23-4567 Outside Party (01-23-4567) Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012 Dials "7-952-9-0123-4567". Dials "7-952-(DISA Floating extn. no. + verified code entry feature no. + + verified code + verified code password) -9-01-23-4567". Explanation: Case 1: 1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. The call is not connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" due to the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX-2. Case 2: 1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", "DISA floating extension number of PBX-2 + verified code entry feature number + + verified code + verified password", Idle Trunk Access/ ARS number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. The call overrides the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX-2, and the call is connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952". Feature Guide 229 1.26 Networking Features d) FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the Trunk [Example] Telephone Company Trunk Forwarded/Transferred/ Intercepted to 01-23-4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX-Code 951 PBX-Code 952 Interface 952-1011 TIE Line Extn. 1011 Interface Extn. 1011 Outside Party (01-23-4567) Dials "7-952-1011". Explanation: 1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011". 2. The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-2) through the TIE line, and the call is forwarded, transferred or intercepted to the outside party "01-23-4567" through the trunk. 230 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features 3.3 Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature. [Example] Telephone Company Trunk Trunk TIE Line Network Trunk PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX-Code 951 PBX-Code 952 01-234567 Trunk 952-9-01-23-4567 DISA Interface TIE Line Interface TRG 2 Outside Party Outside Caller (01-23-4567) Dials "(DISA phone number)-9-01-234567". Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 Explanation: 1. The outside caller dials the "DISA phone number of PBX-1", Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-1 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567". 2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Trunk Access/ARS number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1. 3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567". Feature Guide 231 1.26 Networking Features 4. TIE Line Routing Flowchart [Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension] A TIE line call is made as follows: PBX Code Method: 7-abc-xxxx Extension No. Method: dexx Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no. or an other PBX extension no. in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX? No Not treated as a TIE line call. Yes: A TIE line access no.: 7 Other PBX extension no.: de Are the leading digits (abc or de) found in the TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX? No Reorder tone Yes Selects the corresponding trunk group, and the dialled number is modified if a removed digits and/or added number is assigned. Is the trunk group available? No Reorder tone Yes Is there an idle trunk in the trunk group? Yes Routes to other PBX or trunk. 232 Feature Guide No Busy tone 1.26 Networking Features [Receiving a Call through a TIE Line] <Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)> <PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)> A call is received through a TIE line as follows: A call is received through a TIE line as follows: # 1021 ## 0511033 The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port. The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port. Removed digits: 1 Added number: None Received number: # 1021 Removed digits: 3 Added number: 9 Received number: ## 0511033 Modified number: # 1021=1021 Modified number: ##0511033= 9511033 Remove the first 1 digit. 1) Remove the first 3 digits. 2) Add "9". No Does the modified number have the own PBX code "951"? Yes: 9511033 Removes the own PBX code "951". 1021 1033 Goes to A ( A is in the flowchart of [Making a TIE Line Call from a Extension].) Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX. Others Extension No. of the Own PBX Extension No. of Other PBX Reorder tone. Goes to Does the corresponding extension exist? Yes No Is the corresponding extension idle? Yes Calls the extension. Call Waiting Busy tone Intercept Routing —Busy/DND No A Idle Trunk Access/ ARS No., or Trunk Group Access No. ( A is in the flowchart of [Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension].) Is the trunk group of the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX? Sends reorder tone, or sends the call to the operator (Intercept Routing —No Destination). Yes No Reorder tone TRS/Barring applies. Sends the call to the trunk. Feature Guide 233 1.26 Networking Features Conditions • • 234 Feature Guide When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting, the caller will hear busy tone. If required, Intercept Routing—Busy/DND can be activated. The Inter-digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls. 1.26 Networking Features 1.26.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Description Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line. There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company. Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line. Public/Private Discrimination: a) When making a call: The public/private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company. The public/private discrimination number can be dialled manually, or automatically by ARS programming ( 1.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) and/or TIE line service programming ( 1.26.1 TIE Line Service). b) When receiving a call: The telephone company distinguishes the call type. If it is a private call, the call is received by the TIE line service method. If it is a public call, the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call Distribution method (DIL/DDI/MSN) which is assigned on the trunk. [Example] Public ISDN <Public Discrimination> VPN 9-0-01-23-4567 01-23-4567 Public No. <Private Discrimination> PBX-1 PBX Code 111 Head Office 113-401 Private No. Extn.201 Extn.202 Dials "9-01-23-4567". (ARS) Dials "401". (TIE) Dials "01-45-6789". PBX-2 PBX-3 PBX Code 112 PBX Code 113 Branch Office Branch Office Extn.301 Extn.302 Extn.401 Extn.402 (DDI No.: 01-45-6789) Note: Public Call Private Call Feature Guide 235 1.26 Networking Features Conditions • • Each trunk has its service type; public, private, or VPN. Select VPN to use this service through system programming. Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service, it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming, and/or Quick Dialling programming ( Quick Dialling in Section 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features— SUMMARY). [Quick Dialling Programming Example] Location No. Quick Dialling No. Quick Dialling 01 2345 (extension no. of other PBX) : : Desired No. 9-123-4321 (Public no. of extension 2345) : Explanation: When an extension user dials "2345", he is connected to extension "2345" of other PBX whose public number is "123-4321". 236 Feature Guide 1.26 Networking Features 1.26.3 QSIG Network Description QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931), and it offers enhanced PBX features in the private network. QSIG service can be used as a standard for ISDN-TIE line network. To establish a QSIG network, a master and slave PBX must be determined for each ISDN port between PBXs. The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method. ( 1.26.1 TIE Line Service) [Connection Example] Extn.1000 : PBX-1 (A) Master (A) Slave PBX-2 Extn.2000 : Extn.2999 Extn.1999 (B) Master QSIG Network (C) Slave (C) Master (B) Slave PBX-3 Extn.3000 : Extn.3999 System programming controls the following services individually for each ISDN port. [Service Table] Service Description Details in Calling Line Sends the caller’s number to the QSIG network when • Calling/ Identification making a call. Connected Presentation (CLIP) Line Identification Connected Line Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG Presentation Identification network when answering a call. (CLIP/COLP) Presentation (COLP) Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) Stops the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller. Connected Line Stops COLP being sent by the answered party. Identification Restriction (COLR) Feature Guide 237 1.26 Networking Features Service Description Calling Name Sends the caller’s name to the QSIG network when Identification making a call. Presentation (CNIP) Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNOP) Sends the name of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call. Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) Stops the caller’s name being presented to the called party by the caller. Details in – Connected Name Stops CNOP being sent by the answered party. Identification Restriction (CNOR) Call Forwarding (CF) Forwards a call in the private network using the Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) feature. • Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) Call Transfer (CT) Transfers a call to an extension in another PBX. • Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN Completion of Calls Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on • Completion of Calls to to Busy Subscriber the private network becomes free. Busy (CCBS) Subscriber (CCBS) Advice of Charge (AOC) 238 Feature Guide Sends the call charge information of the public ISDN • Advice of to the private network. Charge (AOC) 1.26 Networking Features 1.26.4 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network Description The PBX can connect to another PBX or outside party by Internet Protocol (IP). In this case, voice communication is converted to IP and send as packets of the data onto the IP network. VoIP network supports the private network communications by the TIE line service method. [Example] PBX-1 PBX-2 Extn.1000 Extn.2000 IP Network IP-GW : Router Extn.1999 IP-GW : Router Dials "2999". Extn.2999 PBX-3 Extn.3000 IP-GW : Router Extn.3999 [Required Programming] Device PBX IP-GW (IP Gateway Circuit) Programming For making a call: • ARS programming ( Section 1.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) or TIE line service programming ( 1.26.1 TIE Line Service) For receiving a call: • TIE line service programming • IP address assignment for the own PBX and other PBXs. Conditions • • Hardware requirement: the IP-GW (IP Gateway Circuit) Card QSIG service is available. Feature Guide 239 1.26 Networking Features 240 Feature Guide Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 241 2.1 System Configuration—Hardware 2.1 System Configuration—Hardware 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Description There are three types of extension ports as follows: a) DPT Port: DPT, DSS Console, or Panasonic VPS (KX-TVS/TVP series [DPT (Digital) Integration]) can be connected. b) SLT Port: SLT or KX-TVS/TVP series (DTMF Integration) can be connected. c) Super Hybrid Port: DPT, APT, DSS Console, KX-TVS/TVP series, or SLT can be connected. EXtra Device Port (XDP) of Super Hybrid Ports: A DPT and SLT can be connected to one super hybrid port (TR: SLT, HL: DPT). In this case, the SLT port (TR) of the super hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone. There are two modes for the XDP port as follows: Mode Description Parallel Mode The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension. They use the main telephone’s (DPT’s) extension data (e.g., extension number, COS). ( 1.9.9 Parallelled Telephone) XDP Mode The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions. To use XDP mode, XDP mode must be enabled (on) the port through system programming ( XDP Assignment). Conditions • • • • • 242 Feature Guide Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port A DPT, APT, or SLT can be connected to a super hybrid port without programming. A DSS Console or a VPS (Panasonic KX-TVS/TVP series [DPT (Digital) Integration]) can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode. APT and SLT in Parallel Mode An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a super hybrid port and used in parallel mode. Wireless XDP Parallel Mode A DWX can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone. ( 1.22.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode) DSS Console and Pared Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected, a pared extension must be assigned through system programming ( Console and Paired Telephone Assignment). 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Description Each extension is assigned a COS number ( controlled on a COS basis. Class of Service). Several features are Conditions • Remote COS Access Extension users can make a call from other extensions of the lower level COS by using their own higher level COS temporarily. Feature Guide 243 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.2 Group Description This PBX supports various types of groups. 1. Trunk Group Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups (e.g., for each carrier, trunk type, etc.) ( Trunk Group). Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis. All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group. One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis. Port basis: LCOT/DID/E & M/ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI23/ISDN-PRI30 Channel basis: E1/T1 2. Extension Group The PBX supports extension groups ( Extension Group Assignment), each of which is used to compose the following groups: a) Tenant ( 2.2.3 Tenant Service) b) Call Pickup Group (See below.) c) Paging Group (See below.) Every extension must belong to one extension group, but cannot belong to more than one extension group. Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/DWX/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX [Example] Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 2.1 Call Pickup Group ( Pickup Group for Extension Group) Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within a specified group. One extension group can belong to several call pickup groups. ( Call Pickup in Section 1.4.1 Answering Features—SUMMARY) [Example] Call Pickup Group 1 244 Feature Guide Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3 Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2 Paging Group ( Paging Group for Extension Group) Using the Paging feature, extensions can page or answer a page within their groups. One extension group or external pager can belong to several paging groups. ( 1.13.1 Paging) [Example] Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2 Paging Group 4 Pager 3 3. Incoming Call Distribution Group An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group ( Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number). Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number ( Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number) and name ( Incoming Call Distribution Group Name). One extension can belong to multiple groups. In the case of multiple connection, an incoming call distribution group must be composed of the extensions in one system. Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/DWX/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX/DWX Ring Group ( 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY) [Example] Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 (Floating extn. no. 280, Name: Sales 1) Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 (Floating extn. no. 290, Name: Sales 2) Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 4. VM Group There are two types of VM groups as follows: Type ( Description VM (DTMF) Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features. One SLT port can belong to only one group. VM (DPT) Group A group of DPT ports ( VM Group Floating Extension Number) which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration features. One DPT port can belong to only one group. 1.21.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group) Feature Guide 245 2.2 System Configuration—Software [Example] PBX DPT Port 246 Feature Guide SLT Port DPT Port DPT Port DPT Port DPT Port SLT Port SLT Port SLT Port VM (DPT) Group VM (DTMF) Group VPS (DPT [Digital] Integration) VPS (DTMF Integration) SLT Port 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.3 Tenant Service Description This PBX can be shared with certain number of tenants. When tenant service is used, each tenant can use the resources differently and independently from other tenants. This enables the PBX to be configured like multiple PBXs which, in each case, are suited to different tenants. Some resources can be common and some can be divided among tenants. 1. Tenant Configuration 1.1 Tenant Member The tenant members consist of extension groups. One extension group can belong to only one tenant. Therefore, one extension can belong to only one tenant. 1.2 Time Service Each tenant has a Time Table. The Start and/or End time of each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively. [Example] Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Extn. Group 1 Extn. Group 5 Extn. Group 2 Extn. Group 6 Extn. Group 3 Extn. Group 4 Use Time Table 1 Use Time Table 2 2. System Management Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant. a) Tenant Operator (extension number/incoming call distribution group number/none [due to the system assignment ( Operator Assignment)]) b) ARS Mode (Off/Local Access/All Access/System [due to the system assignment ( ARS Mode)]) c) Music Source for Music on Hold (System [due to the system assignment ( Music Source Selection for Call Hold)]/BGM Number/Cyclic Tone) [Programming Example] Tenant No. Operator ARS Mode Music Source 1 Extn.101 Local Access System 2 None System Cyclic Tone 3 Floating extn. no. 200 Off BGM1 : : : : Feature Guide 247 2.2 System Configuration—Software 3. Resource Use 3.1 Resources which can be divided Each of the following resources can be enabled or disabled for each tenant. If enabled, the resource can be used by extensions within the tenant. a) Outgoing Message (OGM) b) External Pager for TAFAS [Programming Example] Resource Tenant 1 Tenant 2 ... OGM 1 Enable Enable ... OGM 2 Disable Enable ... : : : : 3.2 Doorphone/Door Opener Each doorphone port can be assigned to one tenant. Calling a doorphone and opening the door can be performed only by the extensions in the assigned tenant. A call from a doorphone can be received by the extensions regardless of tenancy. [Programming Example] Resource Tenant No. Doorphone 1 3 Doorphone 2 2 : : 4. System Memory Division for the System Speed Dialling Location numbers for the System Speed Dialling can be divided for each tenant. [Programming Example of System Memory Division] 248 Feature Guide Data Location No. Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Tenant 3 ... System Speed Dialling From 000 101 401 ... To 100 500 999 ... 2.2 System Configuration—Software [System Memory Division Example] Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Tenant 3 System Memory Speed Dialling No. 000 : For Tenant 1 100 101 : For Tenant 2 400 401 : 500 501 For Tenant 3 : 999 Conditions • Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block The following can be restricted on a COS basis by the Internal Call Block feature ( Internal Call Block in Section 1.1.2 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY): a) Calling extensions in the restricted tenant(s) b) Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant(s) c) Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant(s). • An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis: a) Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue b) The Time Table which determines the overflow destination. Feature Guide 249 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.4 Time Service Description This PBX supports day, night, lunch, and break modes of operation. TRS/Barring can be arranged separately. The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode. 1. Time Service Switching Mode Day/lunch/break/night mode can be switched either automatically or manually ( Service Switching Mode). The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant. Type Time Description Automatic The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time Table. Manual A manager, or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis ( Time Service Switching Mode) can switch mode by dialling the feature number or pressing the Time Service button. Even while in the Automatic Switching mode, day/lunch/break/night mode can be changed manually. 2. Time Table Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode. The Start and/or End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively. 250 Feature Guide 2.2 System Configuration—Software [Time Table Example] Time Table No. (Tenant No.) 1 2 3 4 08:00 11:00 08:00 08:00 12:00 NONE 16:00 12:00 13:00 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 16:00 20:00 12:00 NONE 08:00 11:00 08:00 08:00 12:05 NONE 13:00 13:00 13:00 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 16:31 20:00 17:00 NONE : : : : Time Schedule MON Day start Lunch start Lunch end (Day restart) Break start Break end (Day restart) Night start TUE Day start Lunch start Lunch end (Day restart) Break start Break end (Day restart) Night start : : … … … … … … … … … … … … … … <Time Service Image of Monday and Tuesday> Time Table No. 00:00 1 08:00 Night 11:00 12:00 13:00 Day Lunch 16:00 Day Night 2 20:00 Night Day 3 Night Day 4 Night Day 24:00 08:00 Day Night Night Day Lunch Day Lunch 3. Features Using Time Service The following features can be set in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night): a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Destination of incoming trunk calls (DIL/DID/DDI/MSN) Destination of the Intercept Routing Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups Destination of incoming doorphone calls PBX operator COS for TRS/Barring and for Trunk Access Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder [Programming Examples of DID/DDI Table and DIL Table] DID/DDI table can be programmed for each DID/DDI number, and a tenant (Time Table) number is assigned to each DID/DDI number. DIL table can be programmed for each trunk, and a tenant (Time Table) number is assigned to each trunk. Feature Guide 251 2.2 System Configuration—Software <DID/DDI Table> Location DID/DDI No. Tenant (Time Table) No. 001 123-4567 002 : DID/DDI Destination Day Lunch Break Night 1 105 100 (VPS) 105 100 (VPS) 123-2468 1 102 100 (VPS) 102 100 (VPS) : : : : : : <DIL Table> Trunk No. Tenant (Time Table) No. DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night 01 1 101 100 (VPS) 101 100 (VPS) 02 2 102 100 (VPS) 102 100 (VPS) : : : : : : Explanation: If a trunk call with a DID number (123-4567) is received at 20:00; 1) Tenant (Time Table) number 1 will be used. 2) The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1. 3) The call will be routed to the extension 100 (VPS). 4. Holiday Mode The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode. Up to 24 holidays (start and end dates) can be stored, and one time mode can be selected for all holidays. 5. Time Service Button: A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons: a) b) c) d) Day/Night button Day/Night/Lunch button Day/Night/Break button Day/Night/Lunch/Break button Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes. For example, pressing the Day/Night button switches between day and night modes. All of these buttons show the current status as follows: Light Pattern Status Off Day mode Red on Night mode Green on Lunch mode Slow green flashing Break mode Slow red flashing 252 Feature Guide Holiday mode 2.2 System Configuration—Software Note Any extension user (except extension users allowed to change the mode) can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button. Conditions • System programming ( the following: a) b) c) d) Time Service Start Time) can set the Start and/or End time of Day-1 (Day Start time) Lunch (Lunch Start time) Day-2 (Lunch End time) Night (Night Start time) PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day. e) f) g) h) i) j) Break-1 Start Break-1 End (Day restart) Break-2 Start Break-2 End (Day restart) Break-3 Start Break-3 End (Day restart) Feature Guide 253 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.5 Operator Features Description This PBX supports a PBX operator and a tenant operator. Any extension and incoming call distribution group can be designated as a PBX and/or a tenant operator. Type Description PBX operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) ( Operator Assignment). Tenant operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant. [Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3. Operator Call: An extension user can call an operator with a simple operation. When an operator call is made, the call is routed to the tenant operator. If no tenant operator exists, the call will be routed to the PBX operator. The time mode depends on the tenant of the calling extension. If neither the tenant operator nor the PBX operator exists, the caller will hear reorder tone. Conditions • • 254 Feature Guide An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both the tenant and PBX operator. A tenant operator can be assigned for multiple tenants. 2.2 System Configuration—Software 2.2.6 Manager Features Description An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) is allowed to use the specified features. COS programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features ( Manager Assignment): Feature Manager Call Programm Charge ing Managem ent Manager Password Description Sees, clears, and prints the call charge data. Details in Required • 1.23.2 Charge Metre Remote Clears the personal password of an Password extension remotely, and a verified Clear code password. Password Lock is also unlocked. Required • 1.24.1 Personal Password • 1.7.6 Verified Code Entry Sets or cancels the Extension Lock Remote Extension on an extension remotely. Lock Required • 1.7.3 Extension Lock Dial Tone Transfer Changes the TRS/Barring level of the Not required extension temporarily. [Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call (e.g., international call). • 1.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer Outgoing Message (OGM) Records and plays back outgoing messages (OGMs). Not required • 1.14.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) Time Service Switches the time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) manually. Not required • 2.2.4 Time Service BGM—External Sets the External BGM on and off. Not required • 1.14.4 Background Music (BGM) Conditions • Manager Password One manager password can be assigned per PBX ( Manager Password). Feature Guide 255 2.3 System Data Control 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.1 PC Programming Description This PBX can be programmed and administered using a personal computer (PC). There are two programming methods: 1) On-site Programming: System programming/diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly. 2) Remote Programming: System programming/diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location. 1. On-site Programming: Method 256 Feature Guide Description Using the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port The PBX has a Serial Interface (RS-232C) port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR. Using the USB port The PC is connected to the PBX or a DPT using a USB port. Using the LAN interface A CTI-LINK Card must be installed. Using a modem through an SLT port Any trunk card and a RMT Card must be installed. Assign the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance ( Modem Floating Extension Number), and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX. Using an ISDN TA interface (64 kbps) through an ISDN Extension Line A BRI or PRI Card must be installed. Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance ( ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number), and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX. The RMT Card is not required for this method. 2.3 System Data Control 2. Remote Programming: Method Description Using a modem A RMT Card must be installed. The floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned ( Modem Floating Extension Number). PC programming, using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem, can be done in the following ways: • Direct Access Dial the DIL/DID/DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance. • Through DISA Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature. • Call Transfer Call an extension (probably the operator), and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance. Using an ISDN TA interface (64 kbps) through an ISDN Trunk A BRI or PRI Card must be installed. The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance must be assigned ( ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number), and dial the DIL/DID/DDI/ MSN number whose destination is the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance. The RMT Card is not required for this method. Conditions • • Access to system programming is allowed only one at a time. System Programming Password Level To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. There are two types of passwords, each of which is factory preprogrammed (default) and can be changed. If the wrong password is entered over a preprogrammed number of times remotely, access will be locked. Type • • Description Dealer Password All system programming is accessible ( Dealer). System Password for User Password Permitted system programming is accessible ( System Password for User). Each system programming can be determined whether to be accessed by the end users. Remote Programming Limitation It is possible to disable remote access through system programming ( Remote Programming Assignment). A name can be assigned to the floating extension numbers of the analogue/ISDN remote maintenance respectively. Feature Guide 257 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.2 PT Programming Description A PT user can perform the following programming: a) Personal Programming: Customising the extension according to his needs. b) System Programming: Customising the PBX according to organisational needs. c) Manager Programming: Customising specified frequently changing items (e.g., Charge Management and Remote Extension Lock). Conditions • COS programming determines what programming can be performed ( Mode Level): Programming a) System programming and personal programming b) Personal programming only c) No programming • • • • • The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS. The extension(s) assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming. During programming, the PT is considered to be busy. Access to system programming and manager programming is allowed only one at a time. However, one PBX supports up to 16 simultaneous programmers (one system programmer + 15 personal programmers, one manager programmer + 15 personal programmers, or 16 personal programmers). System Programming Password Level To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. There are two types of passwords, each of which is factory preprogrammed (default) and can be changed. Type • 258 Feature Guide Description Dealer Password All system programming available for PT programming is accessible ( System Password for Dealer). User Password Permitted system programming is accessible ( System Password for User). Each access to system programming can be controlled. Personal Programming Data Default Set A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default. 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.3 Automatic Setup Description There are two automatic setup features as follows: 1) Automatic ISDN Configuration 2) Automatic Time Adjustment 1. Automatic ISDN Configuration The ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically ( BRI Automatic Configuration). The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN (BRI) port: a) b) c) d) L1 Active Mode L2 Data Link Mode Access Mode (Point-to Point/Point-to-Multipoint) TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00-63/Automatic) 2. Automatic Time Adjustment It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways: a) Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) Setting: The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed. The PBX clock will be adjusted (one hour forward or backward) at 3:05AM of the programmed date, if enabled through system programming. It means 3:05 AM will become 4:05 AM on the start date of the summer time, and 3:05 AM will become 2:05 AM on the end date. Note If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set; – On the summer time start date, the setting between 3:05 AM and 4:05 AM will not happen. – On the summer time end date, the setting between 2:05 AM and 3:05 AM will ring twice. b) Time Information from Telephone Company: Time information can be received on the following calls: • An incoming call through an ISDN line • An incoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information. The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday when the first call after 3:05AM is received, if enabled through system programming. Note If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment. Conditions • SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer time. Feature Guide 259 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.4 Quick Setup Description It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a personal computer (PC). When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time, Quick Setup display will appear automatically. The following items can be programmed as desired: Item Parameter Description Date Set Year/Month/Date The date set on the PC will be used. Time Set Hour/Minute The time set on the PC will be used. Dealer Password 4-10 digits Enter the dealer password. All system programming items are accessible by entering this password. Extension Numbering 1. Automatic 2. Manual Extension numbers can be assigned automatically or manually. If "Automatic" is selected, extension numbers are automatically assigned. Operator & Manager Extension number (Only when in Automatic Extension Numbering mode) • Assign the PBX operator to all time modes (day/ lunch/break/night). • The PBX operator’s COS level will be set to COS 64. • Manager operation will be allowed on COS 64. Flexible Numbering Type 1. Pattern 1 (with ) 2. Pattern 2 (without ) If "Pattern 1 (with )" is selected, " " will prefix all feature numbers. [Example] Call Pickup feature number Pattern 1 (with ): 47 Pattern 2 (without ): 47 For default of the flexible numbers, refer to the [Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)] ( 2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering). Operator/ Local Access 260 1. 0/9 2. 9/0 The feature numbers for Operator Call and Idle Trunk Access/ARS can be selected. They will be "0" or "9". Language – Data Upload Select and upload multiple languages into five language areas. LCD Language Select the language used on each PT. This is only available when multiple languages are loaded. Feature Guide 1. English 2. ? 3. ? 4. ? 5. ? 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Description To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required. There are three types of numbering plans: 1) Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard) 2) Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard) 3) Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking) 1. Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard) Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use ( Flexible Numbering). The numbers must not conflict. It is also possible to use default (Pattern 1 or Pattern 2) shown in the following table: a) Extension numbers (Location numbers 1 through 32): Up to five-digit number including the extension numbering scheme (up to three-digits number consisting of "0 through 9" ) + additional digits (up to two digits, default: two digits) [Example] If the number "3" as a 1st extension numbering scheme and the "2" as an additional digit have been programmed, the extension number 300 through 399 are available. b) Feature numbers (Location numbers 33 through 250): Up to four-digit number consisting of "0 through 9", " ", and "#" [Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)] Location No. Feature Default Pattern 1 (with ) Pattern 2 (without ) 1 Extension numbering scheme -1 1 1 2 Extension numbering scheme -2 2 2 3 Extension numbering scheme -3 3 None 4 Extension numbering scheme -4 4 None 5 Extension numbering scheme -5 5 None 6 Extension numbering scheme -6 6 None Extension numbering scheme -7-32 None None 33 Operator Call 9/0 9/0 34 Idle Trunk Access/ARS 0/9 0/9 35 Trunk Group Access 8 8 36 TIE Line Access 7 None 7-32 Feature Guide 261 2.3 System Data Control Location No. Feature Guide Default Pattern 1 (with ) Pattern 2 (without ) # # 37 Redial 38 Speed Dialling—System/Personal 39 Personal Speed Dialling—Programming 30 30 40 Doorphone Call 31 31 41 Group Paging 33 33 42 External BGM on/off 35 35 43 Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record 36 36 44 Individual Trunk Access 37 37 45 Parallel Telephone Mode 39 39 46 Group Call Pickup 40 40 47 Directed Call Pickup 41 41 48 TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager 42 42 49 Group Paging answer 43 43 50 Reserved 51 Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel 46 46 52 User Remote Operation/Remote COS Access/ Verified Code Entry 47 47 53 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel 48 48 54 Account Code Entry 49 49 55 Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve 50 50 56 Call Hold Retrieve—Intercom Calls (held at other extension) 51 51 57 Call Park/Call Park Retrieve 52 52 58 Call Hold Retrieve—Trunk Calls (held at other extension) 53 53 59 Door Open 55 55 60-61 262 Feature Reserved 62 External Feature Access 63 Reserved 64 ISDN Hold — — 60 — 62 — — 60 — 62 2.3 System Data Control Location No. Feature Default Pattern 1 (with ) Pattern 2 (without ) 65 COLR 7 0 7 0 66 CLIR 7 1 7 1 67 CLIP/COLP 7 2 7 2 68 MCID 7 3 7 3 69 ISDN-FWD 7 5 7 5 70 Reserved — 71 Message Waiting set/cancel/callback 70 70 72 FWD/DND set/cancel—Both 710 710 73 FWD/DND set/cancel—External 711 711 74 FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal 712 712 75 FWD/DND No Answer Timer set 713 713 76 Group FWD/DND set/cancel—Both 714 714 77 Group FWD/DND set/cancel—External 715 715 78 Group FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal 716 716 79 Call Pickup Deny set/cancel 720 720 80 Paging Deny set/cancel 721 721 81 Walking Extension 727 727 82 Data Line Security set/cancel 730 730 83 Call Waiting for Intercom Calls set/cancel 731 731 84 Call Waiting for Trunk Calls (including doorphone calls, calls for an incoming call distribution group) set/cancel 732 732 85 Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel 733 733 86 Not Ready Mode/Ready Mode 735 735 87 Log-in/Log-out 736 736 88 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 739 739 89 Hot Line programme/set/cancel 740 740 90 Absent Message set/cancel 750 750 91 BGM set/cancel 751 751 — Feature Guide 263 2.3 System Data Control Location No. Feature Default Pattern 1 (with ) Pattern 2 (without ) — 92 Reserved — 93 Timed Reminder confirm/set /cancel 760 Reserved — 94-96 760 — 97 Extension Lock set/cancel 77 77 98 Time Service Switch 780 780 99 Reserved — 100 Remote Extension Lock off 782 782 101 Remote Extension Lock on 783 783 102 Personal Programme Clear 790 790 103 Personal Password set/cancel 799 799 104 Dial Information (CTI) 105-140 Reserved 141-156 Other PBX Extension Number (TIE) -1-16 157-170 Reserved 171-250 Quick Dialling 1-80 — None None — — None None — — None None 2. Flexible Numbering (available busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard) Feature numbers which are available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use. The numbers should be one digit ("0 through 9" , " " or "#" ) and must not conflict. For default, refer to the following table: [Flexible Numbering Table (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)] Feature Call Waiting/DND Override Default 1 or 2* Executive Busy Override 3 Message Waiting set 4 Call Monitor 5 Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS 6 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice *: To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default. 3. Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking) The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in 264 Feature Guide 2.3 System Data Control the following table: [Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)] Feature Fixed Numbering Pulse to Tone Conversion Conference 3 Door Open 5 Conditions • • • The PBX has default for numbers. The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc. Feature number + Additional number (Parameter) Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0". • If a feature number includes " " or "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it. Feature Guide 265 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.6 Floating Extension Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions. These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc. This feature is also known as Floating Station. Resource Device External Pager Description Used as the destination for TAFAS feature ( Pager Floating Extension Number). External Outgoing Message Used to send messages for DISA feature ( Outgoing (OGM) Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number). Group Analogue Remote Maintenance Used to access the PC programming mode through a modem on a personal computer ( Modem Floating Extension Number). ISDN Remote Maintenance Used to access the PC programming mode through the ISDN interface on a personal computer ( ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number). Incoming Call Used to call an incoming call distribution group ( Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number). DWX Ring Group Used to call a DWX ring group. VM (DPT) Group Used to call a VM (DPT) group ( Extension Number). VM (DTMF) Group Used to call a VM (DTMF) group. VM Group Floating Conditions • 266 Feature Guide It is possible to give names to floating extension numbers ( Group Name, Outgoing Message (OGM) Name). Incoming Call Distribution 2.3 System Data Control 2.3.7 Software Upgrading Description It is possible to upload software from a personal computer to the PBX to upgrade the following: Data File Main Central Processing (MPR) software data Storing Area Operating system data area on the MPR Card Country/area data area on the MPR Card Default data of system programming for each country/ area Language data for PT display/ Each language data area on the MPR Card. SMDR There are two types: Type 1: PT display and SMDR data, except for PT system programming (five languages max.) Type 2: PT system programming data (one language max.) LPR (software on a slot card) software data Flash ROM on the slot card (e.g., BRI8) Cell Station (CS) software data Flash ROM on the CS Conditions The software version of the MPR Card can be confirmed through system programming ( Main Processor Software Reference). Feature Guide 267 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer Description If a power failure should happen, or the PBX is in an off-line condition, specific SLTs are automatically connected to specific trunks (Auxiliary Connections). Conditions • • • • • 268 Feature Guide Auxiliary Connections between Trunk Cards and Extension Cards should be done as per system programming so that conversation is maintained when the power is restored or the MPR is recovering. The Trunk Cards and Extension Cards and the number of ports which can be used for Auxiliary Connections are as follows: Trunk Cards: LCOT16 (two ports), LCOT8 (one port), BRI8 (one port) and BRI4 (one port) Extension Cards: MSLC16 (two ports), SLC16 (two ports), DHLC8 (one port) and SLC8 (one port). The PBX changes the current connections to Auxiliary Connections automatically when the power supply fails. All other conversations except for the Auxiliary Connections are disconnected during a power failure. DC Power Source If the DC power is available from the backup batteries even if the AC power fails, the PBX will keep the current connections, not the Auxiliary Connections. Only the trunk conversations can operate during a power failure. All other features do not work. 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4.2 Power Failure Restart Description When turning the electricity back on, the PBX restarts the stored data automatically. Before restarting, the PBX can record the event in the error log. Conditions • In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) and Call Park. Feature Guide 269 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Description When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it, the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension assigned as the manager turns on red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest and then the date. [Error List (Priority Order)] Error Number 270 Error Cause Display indication Priority Alarm Light Cabinet Light 001 Calendar IC failure ALARM 001-x000 1 A ON 002 DC power down ALARM 002-x000 1 A ON 003 Cabinet fan alarm ALARM 003-x000 1 B ON 004 Basic shelf heat alarm ALARM 004-x000 1 B ON 005 TSW clock down ALARM 005-x000 1 A ON 006 CPU RAM battery alarm ALARM 006-x000 1 A ON 007 AC power down ALARM 007-x000 2 A ON 008 Option Card failure ALARM 008-xyy0 2 B ON 009 Card disconnect ALARM 009-xyy0 2 A ON 010 Digital trunk AIS reception ALARM 010-xyy0 2 C – 011 Digital trunk frame failure ALARM 011-xyy0 2 C – 012 Digital trunk RAI reception ALARM 012-xyy0 2 C – 013 Digital trunk out of synchronisation ALARM 013-xyy0 2 C – 014 Option Card RAM failure ALARM 014-xyy0 2 B ON 015 Option Card ROM failure ALARM 015-xyy0 2 B ON 016 Modem failure ALARM 016-xyye 2 B ON 017 DISA message is lost ALARM 017-xyy0 2 C – 018 CS over load (Forced OUS) ALARM 018-xyy0 2 C – 019 Printer is not connected 2 A ON Feature Guide ALARM 019-0000 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics [Explanation] • Display Indication x: Cabinet Number (1-4) yy: Slot Number (01-10) e: Error Number (Depends on the error cause) • Priority 1: Major Error 2: Minor Error • Alarm Light A: The System Alarm button light on the PT turns on red. B: The System Alarm button light on the PT turns on red and the alarm information is displayed automatically. C: The alarm information will only be recorded on SMDR and error log. Conditions • • • • System Alarm Button A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button. If a manager extension uses a PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be displayed on the PC. If a manager extension uses a PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be sent to the preprogrammed party via the PC Console or PC Phone. The PC Console and PC Phone use e-mail to send the information. The alarm information will be recorded on the SMDR. Feature Guide 271 2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 272 Feature Guide Section 3 Programming Instructions Feature Guide 273 3.1 Introduction 3.1 Introduction These Programming Instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. The PBX has a default setting. You can change the default to meet your requirements. System Programming controls the system features described in this Feature Guide. It allows the PBX to be customised to the requirements. Only one person can programme at a time. Another person trying to enter programming mode will be rejected. Ways to Programme There are two programming methods: • PC (Personal Computer) programming PC programming is described in Section 3.2 PC Programming • PT (Proprietary Telephone) programming PT programming is described in Section 3.3 PT Programming. The extension user can programme by entering 3 digits programming numbers from the PT. Password Security A password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent use of the PBX. Warning to the Dealer regarding the system password 1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers. 2. Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent use of the PBX. 3. Please change the password periodically. 4. We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers. 5. If the system password is forgotten you can examine the backup of the system • • 274 Feature Guide programming. If you have a backup system data, you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool. If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it. 3.2 PC Programming 3.2 PC Programming PC Programming Software Installation To programme and administer the KX-TDA100/200 by PC (Personal Computer), you need to install the PC programming software onto the computer from KX-TDA100/200 CD-ROM. The PC programming software starts the programme using the drive where you installed the software automatically. System Requirements: • Microsoft® Windows® 98, Windows NT® 4.0, 98SE, ME, 2000 or XP • Internet Explorer 5.0 or later • Minimum requirements (for installing TDA100/200 PC programming software only) CPU: Pentium® 133 MHz RAM: 64 MB HDD: 20 MB • Recommendation of the ISDN cards for the remote maintenance FRITZ!Card PCMCIA/AVM FRITZ!Card PCI/AVM FRITZ!Card classic/AVM ELSA MicroLinkTM ISDN USB/ELSA Xircom® CreditCardTM ISDN Adapter/Intel® Trademarks: • Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • Intel, Xircom, CreditCard and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in United States and other countries. • AVM and FRITZ! are either trademarks or trademarks of AVM Computersysteme Vertriebs GmbH & Co. KG in the United States and/or other countries. • ELSA and MicroLink are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ELSA AG in the United States and/or other countries. • All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners. Feature Guide 275 3.2 PC Programming Installation Procedure: 1. Start Windows. 2. After exiting all Windows programmes on your computer, insert the KX-TDA100/200 CDROM (included) into the CD-ROM drive. The KX-TDA100/200 CD-ROM will auto-run. 3. Click [Install PC Programming Software] on the initial screen. 4. Click [Next]. 276 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 5. Read the license agreement. Click [Yes] if you agree with the terms. If you choose [No], you cannot install the TDA100/200 PC programming software. 6. Select a folder to store the program. (You may accept the suggested folder.) Click [Next]. Feature Guide 277 3.2 PC Programming 7. Choose the model, the country/area and the language, and then click [Next]. 8. Select a start menu folder where the software will be held. (You can accept the suggested folder.) Click [Next] to start installing. 278 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 9. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 10. Run the PC programming software. 11. Enter the password to run the program in fully featured mode (TDA100/200), and click [OK]. Feature Guide 279 3.2 PC Programming 12. The initial screen is displayed. 280 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.1 Configuration Configuration–Slot Parameter Slot Description Value Range Note Refers to the slot no. PBX No.–Slot (Display only) No.1–11 Card Type Specifies the type of None/DHLC8/ card installed in each DLC16/DLC8/ slot of each cabinet. MSLC16/SLC8/ SLC16/CSIF8/ LCOT16/ LCOT8/BRI8/ BRI4/PRI23/ PRI30/T1/E1/ E&M8/IP-GW4/ OPB3/CTILINK None (No cards) DHLC8 (8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card) DLC16 (16-Port Digital Extension Card) DLC8 (8-Port Digital Extension Card) MSLC16 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card) SLC8 (8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card) SLC16 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card) CSIF8 (8-Port Cell Station Interface Card) LCOT16 (16-Port Analogue Trunk Card) LCOT8 (8-Port Analogue Trunk Card) BRI8 (8-Port BRI Card) BRI4 (4-Port BRI Card) PRI23 (PRI Card) PRI30 (PRI Card) T1 (T-1 Trunk Card) E1 (E-1 Trunk Card) E&M8 (8-Port E & M Trunk Card) IP-GW4 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) OPB3 (Optional 3-Slot Base Card) CTI-LINK (CTI Link Card) Feature Guide 281 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Status Command 282 Description Refers to the status of the card. (Display only) Specifies the operating card command. Feature Guide Value Range Note INS/OUS/Fault/ INS Fault-OVER/ OUS Fault-DIF/FaultUNACC/ Fault Preinstall/Idle Delete/INS/ OUS/Preinstall The card is in service. The card is out of service. Card was pulled out from the slot or the card is not communicating with the system. FaultOVER The number of trunk and/or extension ports exceeds the system capacity. Fault-DIF The card is different from the card specified in programming. FaultUNACC The card inserted in a slot where the resources are already in use. Preinstall There is no card fitted but the slot has been preprogrammed to accept a specific card. Idle There is no card fitted and the slot has not been preprogrammed with a card type. Delete Card has been removed from the system. INS It performs Automatic Configuration of the card, if the slot is in the "OUS" condition. OUS Operation is suspended. (If the port is on-hook, the port is disabled. Otherwise the system will wait until the port becomes idle.) Preinstall There is no card fitted but the slot has been preprogrammed to accept a specific card. 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–OPB3 Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. PBX No.–Slot (Display only) No. (OPB3 designates the number.) Location Refers to the optional 1–3 port position. (Display only) Feature Specifies the option Card Type card type. None/MSG4/ DPH4/DPH2/ EIO4/ECHO16 Note None (No cards) MSG4 (4-Channel Message Card) DPH4 (4-Port Doorphone Card) DPH2 (2-Port Doorphone Card) EIO4 (4-Port External Input/Output Card) ECHO16 (16-Channel Echo Canceller Card) Status Command Refers to the status of the card. (Display only) Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS/Fault/ INS Fault-OVER/ OUS Fault-DIF Fault Blank/Delete/ INS/OUS The card is in service. The card is out of service. Card was pulled out from the slot or the card is not communicating with the system. FaultOVER The number of trunk and/or extension ports exceeds the system capacity. Fault-DIF The card is different from the card specified in programming. Delete Card has been removed from the system. INS It performs Automatic Configuration of the card, if the slot is in the "OUS" condition. OUS Operation is suspended. (If the port is on-hook, the port is disabled. Otherwise the system will wait until the port becomes idle.) Doorphone No. (1–4) Port Refers to the port no. Automatic (Display only) setting/1–16 Feature Guide 283 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–LCOT Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only LCOT.) Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of outgoing guard time 3–6 s after receiving Reverse/Alert signal. First Dial Time (Trunk) Specifies the minimum waiting time after 0.5–8.0 s seizing the trunk line before sending dialled digits. Tone Feed Back Assigns whether to turn on or off the tone feedback. Yes/No Ring Start Detection Time Specifies the minimum duration for the starting ring detection. 24–1200 ms Ring Off Detection Time Specifies the minimum duration for the finishing ring detection. 1.0–15.0 s Ring Detection Pulse/DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Dialling DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. 64–304 ms Time Pulse Inter-digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter-digit Pause Time. Time 630/830/1030 ms Low Speed Pulse Dialling Pulse % Break Selects the % break for pulse digits. Other/60/67 % Break Width Specifies the width of Break signal. 24–80 ms Make Width Specifies the width of Make signal. 12–60 ms High Speed Pulse Dialling Pulse % Break Selects the % break for pulse digits. Other/60/67 % Break Width Specifies the width of Break signal. 16–72 ms Make Width Specifies the width of Make signal. 12–60 ms Selects the pulse dialling signal type. Normal/Sweden/ New Zealand Pulse Type 284 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type Selects Caller ID signal type. FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)/ FSK (with Visual Caller ID)/DTMF Max. Caller ID Selects the maximum number of time to receive Caller ID. 0/1/2/3 Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Assigns the detection of the carrier when Detection receiving Caller ID. Enable/Disable Caller ID (FSK) END Detection Length + Time/Time Selects the recognition of reception of Caller ID end. Caller ID (FSK) Header Assigns to check Caller ID header when Examination receiving Caller ID. Enable/Disable Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Time Specifies the length of time after receiving a None/80–1200 ms call before detecting Caller ID. Caller ID (FSK) Detection Time Specifies the length of time while detecting 1040–4000 ms Caller ID. Caller ID (DTMF) preamble Selects the Caller ID preamble. Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code Selects Caller ID (DTMF) information code. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the code signalling end of Caller ID. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code— Private Specifies Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code—Private/Out of Area/Technical Reason/Unknown Number/Restricted Number. Max. 16 digits Selects the third information block in the header. DDN/Caller ID Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code— Out of Area None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code— Technical Reason Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code— Unknown Number Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code— Restricted Number Information Header Feature Guide 285 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Dial Tone Dial Tone Detection Time Specifies the length of time to detect the dial tone. 0.5–20.0 s Dial Tone Waiting Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX should wait for dial tone to be presented. 400–2000 ms Dial Tone Allowable Noise Duration 8–200 ms Specifies the maximum length of allowed noise. Pay Tone Pay Tone Single Type Selects the frequency of pay tone. 12/16 KHz Pay Tone Gain 0–31 dB Specifies the pay tone gain. Pay Tone Pulse—Min. Specifies the minimum pulse width of pay tone. 8–2000 ms Pay Tone Pulse—Max. Specifies the maximum pulse width of pay None/8–2000 ms tone. 286 Pay Tone Pulse— Interval Specifies the minimum duration between pay tone signals. 8–2000 ms Sending Flash on call completion Assigns whether to send Flash on call completion and a demand for pay tone. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Port Parameter Description Slot Specifies the slot no. (Display only) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) Trunk Connection Refers to the status of port connection. (Display only) Value Range PBX No.–Slot No. (LCOT designates the number). INS/OUS Note To confirm the Trunk connection and programming using the PT, dial [ ] [3] [7] + Trunk Access number (3 digits). You will hear a dial tone if it is available and connected. Command Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode. DTMF/Pulse Gain Adjustment Selects the gain level applied to the trunk. 1–12 Outgoing Specifies the length of time to detect outgoing CPC signal. None/6.5/8–896 ms Incoming Specifies the length of time to detect incoming CPC signal. None/6.5/8–896 ms DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF signals sent to the line. 80/160 ms Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed. Low/High Reverse Detection Selects when to detect polarity reversal. Disable/Outgoing/ Both Incoming and Outgoing Caller ID Detection Assigns whether to detect the Caller ID. Enable/Disable Pay Tone Detection Assigns whether to detect the pay tone. Enable/Disable Dial Tone Detection Assigns whether to detect the dial tone. Enable/Disable Pause Time Selects the length of Pause Time. 1.5/2.5/3.5/4.5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time. None/16 × n (n=1–80) ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum length of waiting time 0.5/1.5/2.0/4.0/12.0 s after releasing the trunk line before getting it again. CPC Detection Feature Guide 287 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–BRI Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only BRI.) BRI ISDN Time Specifies the length of time for the ISDN protocol. Please refer to the next Protocol Timer. Protocol Timer Parameter 288 Description Value Range ISDN line/ T200 QSIG Master/ QSIG T202 Slave Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s Specifies the maximum waiting time after resending the TEI request to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T203 Specifies the maximum time to detect no communication status of L2. *0–600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–18000 s making a call to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to the overlap dialling. *0–600 s T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Setup message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to the overlap dialling. *0–3000 s T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–3000 s Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter ISDN line/ T308 QSIG Master/ QSIG T309 Slave Description Value Range Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s sending the Release message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. Specifies the maximum time that the system tries to disconnect the data link, before saving the call. *0–3000 s T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message, before expecting the continuance message. *0–3000 s T313 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Connect message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Restart message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–3000 s T318 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Resume message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T319 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Suspend message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Status enquiry message, before receiving the reply to it. *0–600 s T3D3 Specifies the time that the system tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. *0–3000 s T3D9 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. *0–3000 s Feature Guide 289 3.2 PC Programming Parameter ISDN Extension 290 Feature Guide Description Value Range T200 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T201 Specifies the maximum waiting time after resending the TEI check request to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T203 Specifies the maximum time to detect no communication status of L2. *0–600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–18000 s making a call to the ISDN, before receiving the reply to it. T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to the overlap sending. *0–600 s T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Setup message to the ISDN, before receiving the reply to it. *0–600 s T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to the overlap dialling. *0–3000 s T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–3000 s T306 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–3000 s sending the DISC message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. This setting is used when inband tone is supplied. T307 Specifies the maximum waiting time after Suspending, before restarting. T308 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s sending the Release message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T309 Specifies the maximum time that the system tries to disconnect the data link, before saving the call. *0–6000 s *0–3000 s 3.2 PC Programming Parameter ISDN Extension Description Value Range T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message, before expecting the continuance message. *0–3000 s T312 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Setup message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Restart message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–3000 s T320 Specifies the maximum time that the system waits for packet protocol. *0–3000 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Status enquiry message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T3D3 Specifies the maximum time that the *0–3000 s system tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. T3D9 Specifies the maximum time that the system tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. *0–3000 s * 0 s setting means that the system timer suspended. Feature Guide 291 3.2 PC Programming Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (BRI designates the number.) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) Port Type Selects the port type. Connection Refers to the status of the port connection. INS/OUS (Display only) Command Specifies the operating card command. Trunk line/Extn./ QSIG-Master/ QSIG-Slave INS/OUS Main LLC Information Enable/Disable Assigns whether the LLC (Low LevelCompatibility) Information will be sent to the network when the ISDN Bearer Mode of an outgoing call is "Speech" mode. Sending Status Message Selects whether to send Status Message to No Transmission/ the ISDN. When error detection (Mandatory)/ When error detection (Option/Mandatory) Receiving Status Message Selects the treatment of the call when the Ignore/ Status Message provided by ISDN does not Forced Disconnect/ match the actual status of the call. Disconnect DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF signals sent to the ISDN. 80/160 ms DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. 64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms 292 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN Trunk Trunk Number B1 Refers to the trunk number. (Display only) 1–512 (Auto-setting) Trunk Number B2 Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number. Max. 16 digits Ringback Tone Service Enable/Disable Assigns the ringback tone service. Note It is not available when Channel Type is LCO or G-CO. ISDN Outgoing Dial Selects ISDN outgoing dial type. Type Overlap/En bloc PBX Ringback Tone Assigns whether the system sends ringback tone to the extension user Enable/Disable ISDN Centrex Assigns whether the system sends an ISDN Flash signal to the ISDN while pressing the FLASH or EFA button. Enable/Disable CCBS (Completion Assigns whether the system accepts an ISDN Enable/Disable of Calls to Busy Flash signal. Subscriber) BRI Data Link (PMP) Mode Selects the data link mode on ISDN port basis. 1-link/2-link ISDN Extension Extension Number Specifies the extension number. Extension Number ISDN TE Power Assigns whether the system supplies an power Enable/Disable to TE (Terminal Equipment). MSN Mode (ISDN MSN 1 or 2 digits) Selects the ring mode for MSN number last 1 digit or 2 digits. Ring All Extensions for MSN/ Ring an Extension for MSN ISDN Extension Progress Tone Assigns whether the system sends the call progress tone to the ISDN extension. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 293 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Network Configuration 294 Network Type Selects ISDN network type. 0: NTT INS NET/ 1: Europe (Germany)/ 2: Europe (UK 1)/ 3: Australia/ 4: New Zealand/ 5: Europe (Netherlands)/ 6: Swiss/7: Swiss Net 3/ 8: Czech/ 9: North America/ 10: Spain/ 11: Europe (Italy)/ 12: Mexico/ 13: South Africa/ 14: France/15: Greece/ 16: Portugal/17: Austria/ 18: Sweden/19: Finland/ 20: Norway/21: Denmark/ 22: Belgium/23: Bulgaria/ 24: Rumania/25: Russia/ 26: Europe (UK)/ 27: Europe (Australia)/ 28–37/ 38: Luxembourg/ 39: Hong Kong (M_law)/ 40: Hong Kong (A_law)/ 41: Taiwan (M_law)/ 42: Singapore/ 43: Spain 2nd carrier/ 44: Slovakia/ 45: Euro (France)/ 46–50/ 51: USA National 1/ 52: USA National 2/ 53: USA National 3/ 54: USA AT&T 5ESS/ 55: USA Northern Telecom/ 56: USA AT&T Custom L1 Mode Selects L1 mode. Permanent/Call by Call L2 Mode Selects L2 mode. Permanent/Call by Call Access Mode Selects the access mode. P-P/P-MP TEI Mode Selects the TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) mode. Automatic/Fix 0–63 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Network Numbering Plan (Not available if Port Type is Extn.) Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute. Public/Private/VPN Refer to *1. Numbering Plan ID for Outgoing Public Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to Unknown/ outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Public Switched ISDN-Telephony/ Telephone Network. National Standard/ Private Private Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to Unknown/ outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Private Network. ISDN-Telephony/ National Standard/ Private Type of Number for Outgoing Public Selects the Type of Number applied to the Unknown/ outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Public Switched International/National/ Telephone Network. Network/Subscriber Private Selects the Type of Number applied to the Unknown/ outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN Private Network. International/National/ Network/Subscriber Numbering Plan ID for Incoming Public Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network. Unknown/ ISDN-Telephony/ National Standard/ Private Private Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Private Network. Unknown/ ISDN-Telephony/ National Standard/ Private Type of Number for Incoming *1 Public Selects the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network. Unknown/ International/National/ Network/Subscriber Private Selects the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN Private Network. Unknown/ International/National/ Network/Subscriber Value Range and Default of Trunk Attribute in Port Type. Port type Public Trunk line Default Extn. X QSIG-Master X QSIG-Slave X X: Not possible Private X X Default Default VPN Option X X X Feature Guide 295 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Supplementary Service 296 CLIP Assigns Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP). COLP Assigns Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP). CLIR Assigns CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction) feature. COLR Assigns COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction). CNIP Assigns Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP). CNOP Assigns Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNOP). CNIR Assigns Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR). CNOR Assigns Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNOR). CFB Assigns CFB (Call Forwarding Busy). CFNR Assigns CFNR (Call Forwarding No Reply). CFU Assigns CFU (Call Forwarding Unconditional). CD Assigns CD (Call Deflection). CT Assigns CT (Call Transfer). CCBS Assigns Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber (CCBS). AOC-S Assigns AOC-S (Advice of Charge At Call Setup Time). AOC-D Assigns AOC-D (Advice of Charge During Call). AOC-E Assigns AOC-E (Advice of Charge At End of Call). MWI Assigns Message Waiting Indication. TC Assigns Transit Counter. Feature Guide Yes/No 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–PRI Common Parameter Slot Description Specifies the slot no. Value Range PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only PRI.) Protocol Timer Parameter ISDN line/ T200 QSIG Master/ QSIG T202 Slave Description Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. Value Range *0–600 s Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s resending the TEI demanding to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T203 Specifies the time to detect no communication status of L2. *0–600 s T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–18000 s making a call to the ISDN, before receiving the reply to it. T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to the overlap receiving. T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s sending the SETUP message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to the overlap sending. *0–600 s *0–3000 s Feature Guide 297 3.2 PC Programming Parameter ISDN line/ T305 QSIG Master/ QSIG T308 Slave 298 Feature Guide Description Value Range Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–3000 s Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Release message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T309 Specifies the time that the system tries to *0–3000 s disconnect the data link, before saving the call. T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message, before expecting the continuance message. *0–3000 s T313 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Connect message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Restart message, before receiving the reply to it. *0–3000 s T318 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Resume message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T319 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Suspend message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Status enquiry message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T3D3 Specifies the time that the system tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. *0–3000 s T3D9 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. *0–3000 s 3.2 PC Programming Parameter ISDN Extension Description Value Range T200 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the L2 command to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T201 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s resending the TEI check demanding to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T203 Specifies the time to detect no communication status of L2. T301 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–18000 s making a call to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to the overlap receiving. T303 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s sending the SETUP message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to the overlap sending. *0–3000 s T305 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the DISC message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. (No tone/ announce) *0–3000 s T306 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–3000 s sending the DISC message to the ISDN, before receiving the reply to it. This setting is used when inband tone is supplied. T307 Specifies the time that the system waits after Suspending, before restarting. *0–6000 s T308 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Release message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T309 Specifies the time that the system tries to *0–3000 s disconnect the data link, before saving the call. *0–600 s *0–600 s Feature Guide 299 3.2 PC Programming Parameter ISDN Extension Description Value Range *0–3000 s T310 Specifies the maximum waiting time after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message, before expecting the continuance message. T312 Specifies the maximum waiting time after *0–600 s sending the SETUP message to the ISDN, before expecting the reply to it. T316 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Restart message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–3000 s T320 Specifies the time for packet protocol. *0–3000 s T322 Specifies the maximum waiting time after sending the Status enquiry message, before expecting the reply to it. *0–600 s T3D3 Specifies the time that the system tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. *0–3000 s T3D9 Specifies the time that the system tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. *0–3000 s * 0 s setting means that the system timer suspended. Port Parameter 300 Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (BRI designates the number.) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) 1 Port Type Selects the port type. Trunk line/Extn./ QSIG-Master/ QSIG-Slave Connection Refers to the status of the port connection. INS/OUS (Display only) Command Specifies the operating card command. Feature Guide INS/OUS 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Main Enable/Disable LLC Information Assigns whether the LLC (Low LevelCompatibility) Information will be sent to the network when the ISDN Bearer Mode of an outgoing call is "Speech" mode. Sending Status Message Selects whether to send the Status Message to No Transmission/ the ISDN. When error detection (Mandatory)/ When error detection (Option/Mandatory) Receiving Status Message Selects the treatment of the call when the Status Message provided by ISDN does not match the actual status of the call. CRC4 Mode Enable/Disable Assigns whether to use CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is an error checking control technique using a specified binary prime divisor that results in a unique reminder. It usually is a 16- to 32-bit character. (PRI30 only) Line Coding Selects the PRI line coding type. (PRI23 only) B8ZS/AMI Frame Sequence Selects the frame sequence type. (PRI23 only) 4-Frame Multiframe (F4)/12-Frame Multiframe (F12)/ Extend Multiframe (ESF) DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF signals sent 80/160 ms to the ISDN. DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time Specifies the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. Ignore/Disconnect/ Forced Disconnect 64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms ISDN Trunk Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number. Max. 16 digits telephone number Ringback Tone Service Enable/Disable Selects the ringback tone service. ISDN Outgoing Call Selects the ISDN outgoing call type. Type Overlap/En bloc ISDN Centrex Enable/Disable Assigns whether the system sends an ISDN Flash signal to the ISDN during conversation when pressing the FLASH or EFA button. CCBS (Completion Assigns whether the system accepts an ISDN Enable/Disable of Calls to Busy Flash signal. Subscriber) Feature Guide 301 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range ISDN Extension Extension Number Specifies the extension number. Extension Number MSN Mode (ISDN MSN 1 or 2 digits) Specifies the ring mode for MSN number last 1 Ring All Extensions for digit or 2 digits. MSN/Ring an Extension for MSN ISDN Extension Progress Tone Assigns whether the system sends the call progress tone to the ISDN extension. Enable/Disable Network Configuration 302 Network Type Specifies the ISDN network type. Refer to the network type of Page 294. L1 Mode Selects L1 mode. Permanent/Call by Call L2 Mode Selects L2 mode. Permanent/Call by Call Access Mode Selects the access mode. P-P/P-MP TEI Mode Specifies the TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) Automatic/Fix 0–63 mode . Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Network Numbering Plan (Not available if Port Type is Extn.) Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute. Public/Private/VPN Refer to *1 Numbering Plan ID for Outgoing Public Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN. Unknown/ ISDN-Telephony/ National Standard/ Private Private Selects the Numbering Plan ID applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN. Unknown/ ISDN-Telephony/ National Standard/ Private Type of Number for Outgoing Public Selects the Type of Number applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN. Unknown/ International/National/ Network/Subscriber Private Selects the Type of Number applied to the outgoing Trunk calls via ISDN. Unknown/ International/National/ Network/Subscriber Numbering Plan ID for Incoming Public Specifies the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Unknown/ISDNIncoming calls via ISDN. Telephony/National Standard/Private Private Specifies the Numbering Plan ID applied to the Unknown/ISDNIncoming calls via ISDN. Telephony/National Standard/Private Type of Number for Incoming *1 Public Specifies the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN. Unknown/ International/National/ Network/Subscriber Private Specifies the Type of Number applied to the Incoming calls via ISDN. Unknown/ International/National/ Network/Subscriber .Value Range and Default of Trunk Attribute in Port Type. Port type Public Trunk line Default Extn. X QSIG-Master X QSIG-Slave X X: Not possible Private X X Default Default VPN Option X X X Feature Guide 303 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Supplementary Service 304 CLIP Assigns Calling Line Identification Presentation Yes/No (CLIP). COLP Assigns Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP). CLIR Assigns CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction) feature. COLR Assigns COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction). CNIP Assigns Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP). CNOP Assigns Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNOP). CNIR Assigns Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR). CNOR Assigns Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNOR). CFB Assigns CFB (Call Forwarding Busy). CFNR Assigns CFNR (Call Forwarding No Reply). CFU Assigns CFU (Call Forwarding Unconditional). CD Assigns CD (Call Deflection). CT Assigns CT (Call Transfer). CCBS Assigns Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber (CCBS). AOC-S Assigns AOC-S (Advice of Charge At Call Setup Time). AOC-D Assigns AOC-D (Advice of Charge During Call). AOC-E Assigns AOC-E (Advice of Charge At End Of Call). MWI Assigns Message Waiting Indication. TC Assigns Transit Counter. Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–T1 Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only T1.) Line Coding Specifies the T1 PCM line cording. B8ZS/AMI Frame Sequence Specifies the T1 frame type. D4/ESF ESF Frame Option Specifies the values of C-bit and D-bit. C=A, D=B/C=0, D=0/ C=0, D=1/C=1, D=0/ C=1, D=1 Sending LIU Option Specifies the shape of the transmitted pulse. Mode 1–8 Receiving LIU Option Specifies the level of equalisation of the incoming line data. Automatic/6/12/18/24 dB First Dial Time (Trunk) Specifies the Pause Time between seizing 0.5 × n (n=1–16) s the trunk and sending dialled digits. First Dial Time (DID/ TIE) Specifies the Pause Time between seizing 32 × n (n=1–255) ms the DID/TIE channel and sending dialled digits. Answer Detection Time Specifies the duration time that the system 32 × n (n=1–255) ms requires to recognise the answer signal. Wink Signal Width Specifies the duration time of the Wink signal. 128/160/192/224/256/ 288 ms DTMF Tone DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. 64 + 16 × n (n=0–15) ms DTMF Transmitting Specifies the output power of the MFC-R2 3, 2, 1, 0, -1– -12 dB signals. (3-N dB, N=0 –15) DTMF Receiving Specifies the threshold of DTMF detection. -42–0, -41–0, -40–0, — -11 –0 dB (N-42 –0dB, N=0–31) Feature Guide 305 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Pulse Dialling Pulse % Break Selects the % break for pulse digits. 60/67 % Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling digit pattern. Normal/Sweden/ New Zealand Pulse Inter-digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter-digit Pause Time. 630/830/1020 ms Tone Feed Back Yes/No Selects whether to turn on or off tone feedback. Maximum Break Width Specifies the minimum Break Width. 72 + 8 × n (n=0–11) ms Maximum Make Width Specifies the minimum Make Width. 8 × n (n=1–5) ms Flash Flash Signal Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal (OPX) (OPX). Enable/Disable Minimum Break Width (OPX) Specifies the minimum Break Width (OPX). 24 + 8 × n (n=0–60) ms Flash Width (OPX) Specifies the duration time that the system 24 + 8 × n (n=0–188) will recognise as switchhook flash after the ms minimum BREAK width (OPX). Flash Signal Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal (TIE) (TIE). Enable/Disable Minimum Break Width (TIE) Specifies the minimum Break Width (TIE) 24 + 8 × n (n=0–60) ms Flash Width (TIE) Specifies the duration time that the system 24 + 8 × n (n=0–188) will recognise as switchhook flash after the ms minimum BREAK width. (TIE) Caller ID 306 Caller ID Start Code Selects the start code of Caller ID. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID Information End Code Selects the Caller ID information code. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID End Code Selects the end code of Caller ID. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Channel Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (T1 designates the number.) Channel number Refers to the channel number. (Display only) 1–24 Connection Refers to the connection status of port. (Display only) INS/OUS Command Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number. Max. 16 digits telephone number. Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode. DTMF/Pulse Channel Type Selects the channel type. Undefined/GCOT/ LCOT/DID/TIE/OPX Extension Number Set Specifies the extension number. Extension Number Trunk Attribute Public/Private Selects the trunk attribute. Note It is available only when Channel Type is TIE (E & M) CPC Detection (DID) Outgoing Specifies the CPC signal detection time— Outgoing. None/6.5(113)/80 × n (n=1–112) ms Incoming Specifies the CPC signal detection time— Incoming. None/6.5(113)/80 × n (n=1–112) ms CPC Detection (L-CO/G-CO) Outgoing Specifies the CPC signal detection time— Outgoing. None/8 × n (n=2–112)/ 6.5 (n=113) ms Incoming Specifies the CPC signal detection time— Incoming. None/8 × n (n=2–112)/ 6.5 (n=113) ms Feature Guide 307 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF time. 80/160 ms Trunk Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed. 10/20 pps Wink Signal Time-out Specifies the length of time that the system 64 × n (n=1–128) ms is to wait for the Wink Signal after seizing the trunk. Note It is available only when Start Signal Type is set to "Wink". Start Signal Type Selects the start signal type. Immediate/Wink • Wink: The wink signal is transmitted to the telephone company before the incoming calls are received. • Immediate: No wink signal is transmitted. Sending Caller ID to TIE Assigns whether to send TIE Caller ID to the other PBX. Yes/No Receiving Caller ID from TIE Assigns whether to receive TIE Caller ID from the other end. Yes/No Ringback Tone Service Assigns if the ringback tone is sent. Enable/Disable Note It is not available when Channel Type is L-CO or G-CO. 308 PBX Dial Tone Assigns whether the system sends dial tone to extension users who seize a T1 digital trunk line. Enable/Disable Pause Time Selects the length of the Pause Time. 1.5/2.5/3.5/4.5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of the Flash Time. None/16 × n (n=1–80) ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again. 0.5/1.5/2.0/4.0/12.0 s Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–E1 Common Common–Basic Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only E1.) Line Coding Selects the E1 PCM line cording. HDB3/AMI Frame Sequence Selects the E1 frame type. PCM30/PCM30-CRC Frame Option Specifies the values of C-bit and D-bit. C=A, D=B/C=0, D=0/ C=0, D=1/C=1, D=0/ C=1, D=1 First Dial Time (DID/ TIE) Specifies the Pause Time between seizing 32 × n (n=1–255) ms the DID/TIE channel and sending the dialled digits. Answer Detection Time Specifies the duration time that the system 32 × n (n=1–255) ms will accept as an answer signal. Seizure ACK Waiting Time Specifies the Seizure ACK waiting time for 0.5 × n (n=1–20) s DR2 (Digital System R2) signals. ACK is an ASCII or EBCDIC code character indicating a positive acknowledgement that a message has been received correctly. Sending LIU Option Selects the shape of transmitted pulse. Receiving LIU Option Selects the level of equalisation applied to Automatic/6/12/18/24 incoming calls. dB RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the mode to detect the RAI signal. Type 1/Type 2 Mode 1–8 DTMF Tone DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. 64 + 16 × n (n=0–15) ms Pulse Dialling Pulse % Break Selects the % break for pulse digits. 60/67 % Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling digit pattern. Normal/Sweden/ New Zealand Pulse Inter-digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter-digit Pause Time. 630/830/1030 ms Tone Feed Back Yes/No Assigns whether to turn on or off tone feedback. Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum Break Width 72 + 8 × n (n=0–11) ms Minimum Make Width 8 × n (n=1–5) ms Specifies the minimum Make Width Feature Guide 309 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Flash Flash Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal Enable/Disable Minimum Break Width Specifies the minimum Break Width 24 + 8 × n (n=0–60) ms Flash Width Specifies the duration time that the system 24 + 8 × n (n=0–188) requires to recognise a switchhook flash ms after the minimum BREAK width. Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the start code of Caller ID. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID Information End Code Selects the Caller ID information code. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID End Code Selects the end code of Caller ID. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Common–E1 Line Signal Setting Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only E1.) DR2 Signalling Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital Normal/Option-1/ System R2) signals. Option-2/Option-3 Inter-digit Time Specifies the pseudo-answer time. 3–15 s Note This parameter is available only when "Option-1" or "Option-3" is selected. Bit Position for Pulse Dialling Selects the position of the pulse dialling control bit in the DR2 Signals. A-bit/B-bit Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the Clear Back Signal Control bit in the DR2 Signals. A-bit/B-bit/A&B-bit Forced Release Assigns whether to send Forced Release. Enable/Disable Forced Release Pattern Selects the force release bit pattern. A=0:B=0/ A=0:B=1/ A=1:B=0/ A=1:B=1 E & M Signalling Type Selects the control bit of the E & M signals. Type-1: A bit=0/ (control bit in the idle condition.) Type-2: A bit=1/ Type-3: B bit=0/ Type-4: B bit=1/ Type-5: A and B bit=1 Wink Signal Width 310 Feature Guide Specifies the duration time of the Wink signal. 128/160/192/224/256/ 288 ms 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range E & M-P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of the Seizure signal. 150/600 ms Answer Selects the length of the Answer signal. 150/600 ms Clear Selects the length of the Clear signal. 150/600 ms E & M-P Seizure ACK Assigns whether the system waits for the E Yes/No & M-P Seizure ACK signal. Metre Pulse Detection for DR2 Mode Selects whether to detect the Metre Pulse signal transmitted from the telephone company. No Detection/ Outgoing call only/ Both Incoming and Outgoing calls Bit Position Selects the bit position of the Metre Pulse. A-bit/B-bit/C-bit/D-bit Length Specifies the duration time the system will recognise as a Metre Pulse signal. 8–640 ms (N=1–80, N × 8 ms) DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Gain Adjustment DTMF Transmitting Specifies the output power of the DTMF signals. 3, 2, 1, 0, -1– -12 dB (3-N dB, N=0 –15) DTMF Receiving Specifies the threshold of DTMF detection. -42–0, -41–0, -40–0, – -11–0 dB (N-42–0dB, N=0 –31) MFC-R2 Transmitting Specifies the output power of the MFC-R2 0, -1, -2, -3 – -31 dB signals transmitted from the DSP. (-N dB, N=0 –31) MFC-R2 Receiving Specifies the threshold of MFC-R2 signal detection. -38–0, -37–0, -36–0 – -23–0 dB (N-38–0 dB N=0–15) Frame Error Detection Error Detection Assigns whether the system detects frame Yes/No synchronisation problems. Note "Yes" setting enables the Error Rate programming. Error Rate Specifies the number of frame errors per No limit/ second which the system requires to trigger 16 errors per second/ a remote alarm. 32 errors per second/–/ 112 errors per second/ (16 × N, N=0 –7) Feature Guide 311 3.2 PC Programming Common–E1 MFC-R2 Setting 1 Parameter Slot Description Specifies the slot no. Value Range PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only E1.) ANI (Automatic Number Identification) Service Mode Used to control the ANI service. When utilising the ANI service, one of three presentation methods (incoming Trunk calls only/outgoing Trunk calls only/both) can be selected. None/ Incoming call only/ Outgoing call only/ Both Incoming and Outgoing calls ANI Max. digits Specifies the maximum digits of the ANI number the system can receive. None/1–16 MFC-R2 Time Forward Specifies the maximum waiting time for the 1–30 s MFC-R2 Forward signal from the telephone company. Backward Specifies the maximum waiting time for the 1–30 s MFC-R2 Backward signal from the telephone company. Disappearance Specifies the maximum waiting time for the 1–30 s MFC-R2 Disappearance signal from the telephone company. Group-I Code Assignment ANI Start Specifies the code which indicates the start Undefined/1–15 of the ANI number. ANI Complete (1–4) Specifies the code which indicates the end Undefined/1–15 of the ANI number. ANI Complete (1) is 1– 15 ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject the ANI number. End of Digit Specifies the confirmation of the end of the Undefined/1–15 ANI number. End of Digit Sending Timer Specifies the duration time to send the end Undefined/1–15 of the ANI number. 1–15 Group-II Code Assignment 312 Group-II Code Outgoing Call Specifies the destination of each Group-II Code transmitted to the telephone company. Group-II Code Incoming Call (1–15) Specifies the destination of incoming Trunk Undefined/Subscriber/ calls for each Group-II Code respectively. Operator/Collect Call Group-II ANI Specifies the Group-II ANI code Feature Guide 1–15 1–15 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range MFC-R2 Group-I [ ] [#] E1 MFC-R2 Group-I [ ] code Specifies the function of [ ] (DTMF) signal. 11–15 E1 MFC-R2 Group-I [#] Specifies the function of [#] (DTMF) signal. 11–15 code Common–E1 MFC-R2 Setting 2 Parameter Description Slot Specifies the slot no. Address Group-A Complete Code Assignment Specifies the Address Complete (completion of dial) code transmitted to the telephone company. ANI Request Specifies the ANI code (requesting the caller’s number) transmitted to the telephone company. Value Range PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only LCOT.) 1–15 1–15 ANI (N + 1) Specifies the ANI next code 1–15 Set up Speech Path Specifies the Set up Speech Path code transmitted to the telephone company. Undefined/1–15 (First) Request Specifies the code requesting the telephone company to transmit the first digit of the ANI number. Undefined/1–15 (N) Request Specifies the code requesting the telephone company to transmit the (N)th digit of the ANI number. Undefined/1–15 (N-1) Request Specifies the code requesting telephone company to transmit the (N-1)th digit of the ANI number. Undefined/1–15 (N-2) Request Specifies the code requesting telephone company to transmit the (N-2)th digit of the ANI number. Undefined/1–15 (N-3) Request Specifies the code requesting telephone company to transmit the (N-3)th digit of the ANI number. Undefined/1–15 Feature Guide 313 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Group-B Idle (1) Code Assignment Undefined/1–15 Specifies the idle code (1). Used in the normal circumstances to inform the telephone company that the destination is idle. Idle (2) Undefined/1–15 Specifies the idle code (2). Used as an alternative, for example an international call, to inform the telephone company that TIE destination is idle. Idle (3) Undefined/1–15 Specifies the idle code (3). This code is used in the special sequence, for example when the current call is completed, to inform the telephone company that the destination is idle. Busy Specifies the code used to inform the Undefined/1–15 telephone company that the destination is busy. Unallocated Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that there is no extension specified. Undefined/1–15 Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested. Undefined/1–15 Out-ofService Specifies the code used to inform the Undefined/1–15 telephone company that the destination is in out of service. No Billing Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not billed. Collect Call Specifies the code used to inform the Block telephone company that the collect call has been rejected. 314 Value Range Feature Guide Undefined/1–15 Undefined/1–15 3.2 PC Programming Channel Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (E1 designates the number.) Channel number Refers to the channel number. (Display only) Connection Refers to the status of port connection. (Display only) INS/OUS Command Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS Subscriber Number Specifies the trunk access number. Max. 16 digits telephone number Channel Type Selects the channel type. Undefined/DR2/ E & M-P/E & M-C Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute. Public/Private Note It is available only when Channel Type is "E & M-P" or "E & M-C". Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode. DTMF/Pulse/MFC-R2 E1 Receiving Type Selects the dial type when receiving incoming call. Undefined (Same as Trunk Dialling Mode)/ DTMF/Pulse/MFC-R2 Receiving Digits Selects the maximum number of digits accepted on incoming call. 0–7 CPC Detection Time— Specifies the CPC signal duration Outgoing call recognised on outgoing calls None/80 × n (n=2–75) ms CPC Detection Time— Specifies the CPC signal duration Incoming call recognised on incoming calls None/80 × n (n=2–75) ms DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF time. 80/160 ms Trunk Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed. 10/20 pps Feature Guide 315 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Wink Signal Time Out Description Value Range Specifies the length of time that the system 64 × n (n=1–128) ms is to wait for the Wink Signal after seizing the trunk. Note It is assignable only when Start Signal Type is set to "Wink". Start Signal Type Immediate/Wink Selects the start signal type. • Wink: The wink signal is transmitted to the telephone company before the incoming calls are received. • Immediate: No wink signal is transmitted. Sending Caller ID to TIE Assigns whether to send TIE Caller ID. Yes/No Receiving Caller ID from TIE Assigns whether to receive TIE Caller ID. Yes/No Ringback Tone Service Assigns the ringback tone service. 316 Enable/Disable PBX Dial Tone Enable/Disable Assigns whether the system sends a dial tone to the extension user who seizes a T1 digital trunk line. Answer Waiting Time Selects the length of waiting time to cancel None/1/2/3/4 min the outgoing Trunk call. Pause Time Selects the length of Pause Time. 1.5/2.5/3.5/4.5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time. None/16 × n (n=1–80) ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again. 0.5/1.5/2.0/4.0/12.0 s Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–E & M Common Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only E & M.) Interface Selects E & M signal type. Continuous/ Pulsed with Answer/ Pulsed without Answer/ Continuous No Answer Note If you select "Pulsed with Answer" or "Pulsed without Answer", you must select "Wink" in Start Signal Type on Page 319. First Dial Time (DID/ TIE) Specifies the waiting time after seizing the 32 × n (n=1–255) ms DID/TIE channel, before sending the dialled digits. Note It is available only when Start Signal Type is set to "Immediate" on Page 319. Answer Detection Time Specifies the duration time that the system 32 × n (n=1–255) ms requires to recognise the answer signal. Inter-digit Time Specifies the pseudo-answer time. 3–15 s DTMF Tone DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. 64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms Pulse Dialling Pulse % Break Selects the % break for pulse digits. 60/67 % Pulse Type Selects the pulse dialling signal type. Normal/Sweden/ New Zealand Pulse Inter-digit Pause Selects the Pulse Inter-digit Pause Time. 630/830/1030 ms Pulse Feed Back Tone Selects whether to turn on or off the pulse feedback tone. Yes/No Pulse Maximum Break Specifies the maximum Break Width. Width 72 + 8 × n (n=0–11) ms Pulse Minimum Make Width 8 × n (n=1–5) ms Specifies the minimum Make Width. Feature Guide 317 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Flash Flash Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal. Enable/Disable Minimum Break Width Specifies the minimum BREAK width. 24 + 8 × n (n=0–60) ms Flash Width Specifies the duration time that the system 24 + 8 × n (n=0–188) requires to recognise as a switchhook flash. ms Line Signal Setting E & M-P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of the Seizure pulse. 150/600 ms Answer Selects the length of the Answer pulse. 150/600 ms Clear Selects the length of the Clear pulse. 150/600 ms E & M-P Seizure ACK Selects whether the system waits for the E Yes/No & M-P Seizure ACK signal. Wink Signal Width Specifies the duration time of the Wink signal. 128/160/192/224/256/ 288 ms Caller ID Start Code Selects the start code of Caller ID. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID Information End Code Selects the Caller ID information end code. None/ /#/A/B/C/D Caller ID End Code Selects the code of ending Caller ID. Caller ID None/ /#/A/B/C/D Port Parameter 318 Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (E & M designates the number.) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) 1–8 Connection Refers to the status of port connection. (Display only) INS/OUS Command Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS Trunk Attribute Selects the trunk attribute. Public/Private Trunk Dialling Mode Selects the trunk dialling mode. DTMF/Pulse Gain Adjustment Selects the gain level table during a call. 1–12 DTMF Duration Selects the duration of the DTMF time. 80/160 ms Trunk Pulse Speed Selects the pulse speed. 10/20 pps Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Wink Signal Time Out Description Selects the length of waiting time for the Wink Signal after seizing a trunk. Value Range 64/128/256/512/1024/ 2048/4096/8128 ms Note It is assignable only when Start Signal Type is set to "Wink". Start Signal Type Immediate/Wink Selects the start signal type. • Wink: The wink signal is transmitted to the telephone company before the incoming calls are received. • Immediate: No wink signal is transmitted. E & M TIE Line Type Selects the type of E & M connection. 2/4 wires E & M Sensitivity Out Selects the voice level for transmission. -6/-3/0/+3 dB Sending Caller ID to TIE Selects whether to send the Caller ID to the Yes/No TIE line. Receiving Caller ID from TIE Selects whether to receive the Caller ID to Yes/No the TIE line. E & M Sensitivity In Selects the voice level for reception. -6/-3/0/+3 dB Ringback Tone Service Assigns the ringback tone service. Enable/Disable PBX Dial Tone Assigns whether the system sends dial tone to extension users who seize a T1 digital trunk line. Enable/Disable Pause Time Selects the length of Pause Time. 1.5/2.5/3.5/4.5 s Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time. None/16 × n (n=1–80) ms Disconnect Time Selects the maximum waiting time after releasing the trunk line before getting it again. 0.5/1.5/2.0/4.0/12.0 s Feature Guide 319 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–Extension Common Parameter 320 Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only extension.) KX-T7250 Transfer/ Hold Key Mode Selects T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode. Mode1/Mode2 (NE/SL/FR Reverse) SLT Pulse Dialling Mode Selects the digit translation appropriate to your area. Normal/Sweden/ New Zealand SLT Off-hook Time Specifies the minimum time that the system 8 × n (n=3–255) ms will recognise as an off-hook signal sent from the SLT. SLT Off-hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time preventing the system from mistaking an off-hook signal as a dial. SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum Pulse Break Width. 8 × n (n=9–120) ms SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum Pulse Make Width. 8 × n (n=1–5) ms SLT Flash Detection Assigns the detection of a flash signal. 8 × n (n=12–63) ms Enable/Disable Hooking Flash Time— Specifies the minimum duration of a flash Min. signal. 8 × n (n=3–63) ms Hooking Flash Time— Specifies the maximum duration of a flash Max. signal. 8 × n (n=3–191) ms Minimum DTMF Detection Time Specifies the minimum to defect the DTMF 2 × n (n=1–31) ms tone. SLT Power Supply Selects the power supply voltage of the SLT. Feature Guide 85 V/145 V 3.2 PC Programming Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only extension.) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) 1–8/16/32 Port Type Refers to the port type. (Display only) None/DPT/DPT (DXDP)/SLT/ S-Hybrid (XDP)/ S-Hybrid (SLT) Telephone Type Specifies the telephone type. (In the interactive mode, display only) Unknown/(SLT) (APT) T7020/T7030/T7033/ T7050/T7055/T7130/ T7320/T7330/T7350/ (NEW DPT) T7220/T7230/T7235/ T7250/T7420/T7425/ T7431/T7433/T7436/ T7450/T7451/T7520/ T7531/T7533/T7536/ T7550/T7560/T7565/ T7625/T7630/T7633/ T7636/T7660/T7665/ (NEW DSS) T7040 /T7240/T7340/ T7440/T7441/T7540/ T7541/T7640 Note It is displayed only in the interactive mode. Connection Refers to the connection status of port. (Display only) INS/OUS Command Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS Status Refers to the status. (Display only) • INS: PT or SLT is connected. • OUS: Not connected. • Fault: Not connected to the port only for DPT. INS/OUS/Fault Extension Number Specifies the extension number. Extension Number Extension Name Specifies the extension name. Max. 20 characters XDP Assignment Assigns the XDP mode. On/Off Feature Guide 321 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range DPT Attribute Type Specifies the DPT port attribute. Normal/D-XDP/DSS/ VM (DPT)/ PC Console Cabinet Specifies the cabinet number required only 1–4 when DPT port attribute is DSS or PC Console. Location No. Specifies the location number required only 1–8 when DPT port attribute is DSS or PC Console. DSS Console pair extension Specifies the DSS Console pair extension. Extension Number VM Group No. Specifies VM group no. required when DPT 1–8 port attribute is VM (DPT). VM Port No. Specifies the VM port no. required when DPT port attribute is VM (DPT). 1–16 Note It can not be split between cards. 322 SLT MW Mode Specifies the SLT-MWL (Message Waiting Disable/MW-Lamp Lamp) feature. Internal Caller ID Assigns the internal Caller ID. Enable/Disable DPT T74/T75/T76 Level Selects the DPT gain level. 1–8 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–CSINF Common Parameter Description Value Range Master CS Port Specifies the Master CS port location. CS port location Radio System ID Specifies the radio system ID (Master CS ID). (Display only) ID informed from CS. Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to the slot no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. (CSINF designates the number.) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) 1–8 Status Specifies the port status. (Display only) INS/OUS/Fault Configuration–Slot–CTI-LINK Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. (Card type is only CTILINK). IP Address Specifies the IP address. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Subnet Mask Specifies the Subnet Mask. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Gateway Specifies the gateway address. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx FTP Account Specifies the FTP account. 4–10 characters FTP Password Specifies the FTP password. 4–10 characters Maintenance Port Number Specifies the maintenance port no. 10000–65535 CTI Port Number Specifies the CTI port no. 10000–65535 Feature Guide 323 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–Slot–IP-Gateway Port Parameter Description Value Range Slot Specifies the slot no. PBX No.–Slot No. Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) Trunk Number Refers to the trunk number. (Display only) 1–512 (Auto-setting) Connection Refers to the status of port connection. (Display only) INS/OUS Command Specifies the operating card command. INS/OUS Name Specifies the trunk name. Max. 20 characters Configuration–Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Parameter Description Value Range Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) (1–128) DWX Number 324 Specifies the DWX number. Extension Number (4 digits) DWX PIN Registration Specifies the DWX registration password. 4 digits Status Specifies the status. (Display only) Registered: Checked mark/ Not registered: Blank Registration Assigns the registration button. Select/No Select Termination Assigns the termination button. Select/No Select Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Configuration–External Clock Priority Parameter Description Value Range Clock Configuration Priority No. 1–No. 8 Specifies the physical number of the BRI/ None/Slot no. PRI/T1/E1 card that provides External Clock pulse to the system in priority order. Note This programming is required to be installed if one BRI/PRI/T1/E1 card is installed. Configuration–Option Parameter Description Value Range Extension Numbering Mode Selects the extension numbering mode. Automatic/Manual Status after Card Installation Selects the initial status after installing the card. INS/OUS Feature Guide 325 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.2 System System–Basic System–Basic–Date & Time Parameter Description Value Range Year Enters the number of the year.*1 2000–2099 Month Enters the number of the month.*1 1–12 Date Enters the number of the day.*1 1–31 Week Selects the day of the week.*1 Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/ Thu/Fri/Sat Hour Enters the number of the hour.*1 0–23 Minute Enters the number of the minute.*1 0–59 Second Enters the number of the second.*1 0–59 Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) Table (1–20) Summer Time Table *1 Assigns whether to use Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) table. Enable/Disable Summer Time Start Specifies Summer Time (Daylight Saving date Time) start date. Year/Month/Day Summer Time End date Year/Month/Day Specifies Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) end date. It is not saved as part of a backup. It is not available in batch mode. System–Basic–Operator Parameter 326 Description Value Range Day Assigns the Day mode operator. Extension Number Lunch Assigns the Lunch mode operator. Extension Number Break Assigns the Break mode operator. Extension Number Night Assigns the Night mode operator. Extension Number Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming System–Basic–Music Parameter Description Value Range Music Source Selection for Port 2 Selects the source of Music Source 2 (Background Music 2). External/Internal 1/ Internal 2 Music Source Selection for Hold Selects the source of music on hold. Beep/Background Music1–8 Music Source Selection for Transfer Selects the source of music during Transfer. Hold Music/Ringback System–System Timer Parameter Description Value Range Extension Timer Hot Line Start Time Specifies the start time when hot line starts. 0–15 s Extn. First Digit Time 0–15 s Specifies the maximum time allowed between the start of an extension dial tone and the first digit being dialled on an extension call. Extn. Inter-digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an extension call. 0–15 s Call Duration Start Time Specifies the duration start time for PT display and SMDR. 0–60 s Personal Password Lock Time Specifies the maximum time to prohibit password entry following incorrect password entry. 1–15 s Automatic Redial Repeat Times Specifies the number of time to repeat redials. 0–15 Automatic Redial Interval Specifies the interval between redial attempts. 10 × n (n=1–120) s Automatic Redial Call Duration Time Specifies the duration of redial calls if unanswered. 10 × n (n=1–30) s Timed Reminder Alarm Specifies the number of time of Timed Repeat Times Reminder calls. 1–15 Timed Reminder Alarm Specifies the interval between Timed Interval Reminder calls. 10 × n (n=1–120) s Timed Reminder Alarm Specifies the duration of ringing of the Ringing Duration Time Timed Reminder alarm. 10 × n (n=1–30) s Message Waiting Specifies the duration of the message Ringing Duration Time waiting ring for SLTs. 10 × n (n=1–300) s Message Waiting Ringing Interval n (n=1–60) min Specifies the interval between message waiting rings. Feature Guide 327 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Busy/Do Not Disturb (DND) Reorder Tone Duration Time Description Specifies the duration of Busy/Do Not Disturb (DND) Reorder Tone. Value Range Continue/0–15 s Reorder Tone Duration Specifies the reorder tone duration (PT Time (PT Handset Handset Mode). Mode) 1–15 s Reorder Tone Duration Specifies the reorder tone duration (PT Time (PT Hands Free Hands Free Mode). Mode) 1–15 s PT On-hook Display Time Specifies the length of time to display [Idle] 1–15 s after going on-hook. DTMF Duration while talking Specifies the duration of the DTMF signal while talking. 80/160/240/320 ms DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of time of DTMF Inter- 64 + 16 × n (n=0–15) Time while talking digit Pause Time while talking. ms 328 Pause Time while talking Specifies the length of the Pause Time while talking. 1.5/2.5/3.5/4.5 ms Unattended Conference Recall Start Time Specifies the length of recall start time of unattended extension. None/1–60 min 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time of the first recall of unattended extension. None/1–240 s 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time of None/1–240 s the second recall of unattended extension. Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Timer Held Trunk Force Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time to disconnect the held trunk forcedly. 5–30 min Intercept Time Specifies the length of waiting time before 1–240 s activating IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer). If an incoming trunk call directed to a single extension is not answered within this time, IRNA redirects the call to another preprogrammed destination. Trunk First Digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed 1–15 s between the start of an Trunk dial tone and the first digit dialled on an trunk call. Trunk Inter-digit Time Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an trunk call. 1–15 s No Answer Disconnect Specifies the length of time to disconnect in None/1–15 min no answer for ISDN incoming calls. Time for ISDN Incoming Call CCBS/MCID Receiving Specifies the duration to recieve CCBS/ Duration Time MCID. 5–20 s Receiving TIE Dial Specifies the maximum time to recieve TIE 3–30 s call. TRS/Barring Guard Time Specifies the TRS/Barring guard time. 10 × n (n=1–240) s DID/DDI Receiving Dial Inter-digit Time Specifies the DID/DDI receive dial interdigit time. 0–30 s Caller ID Waiting Time Specifies the length of waiting time to for Analogue line receive the analogue Caller ID. 0–15 s Feature Guide 329 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Recall Timer 1–240 s Hold Recall Time Specifies the length of waiting time before alerting the holding extension user using Held Call Reminder. A reminder tone is emitted every 5 seconds until the held call is retrieved, or until the caller hangs up. Transfer Recall Time on Trunk Calls Specifies the length of time before transfer 1–240 s recall occurs. If a transferred Trunk call is not answered before the programmed number of rings, the call returns to the extension user who originally transferred it. Transfer Recall Time on Intercom Calls Specifies the length of time before transfer 1–240 s recall occurs. If a transferred Intercom call is not answered before the programmed number of rings, the call returns to the extension user who originally transferred it. Call Park Recall Time Specifies the length of waiting time before alerting (Call Park Recall) the extension who parked the call. ISDN Hold Recall Time Specifies the length of time to recall the hold on ISDN. 1–240 s 0–15 min DISA Timer 330 DISA Delayed Answer Specifies the length of waiting time after Time receiving a DISA call before answering it. 0–30 s DISA Mute & Outgoing Specifies the maximum waiting time after Message (OGM) Start playing the DISA message. Time 0.0–12.0 s DISA First digit time Specifies the maximum time allowed 0–120 s between the start of DISA dial tone and the first digit DISA Automated Attendant Time Specifies the length of waiting time before 0–5 s recognising the first digit as a DISA AA number. If this timer expires before the second digit is dialled, the system assumes that the first digit is a DISA built-in AA number. DISA Intercept time Specifies the length of waiting time before activating DISA. If an incoming trunk call directed to a single extension is not answered within this time, DISA redirects the call to another preprogrammed destination 0–60 s DISA Disconnect time after Intercept Specifies the disconnect time after Intercept. 0–60 s Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Times Specifies number of time to prolong the DISA trunk-to-trunk call. No Limit, 1–15 DISA Extend Time Specifies the length of time to prolong the DISA trunk-to-trunk call. 0–7 min DISA Progress tone Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time to send the progress tone before starting DISA recording. 0–7 s DISA Reorder Tone Continuation Time Specifies the length of continuing time that Continue/0–15 s DISA Reorder Tone is heard. Doorphone Timer Doorphone Call Ring Duration Time Specifies the duration of the doorphone call. 10 ×n (n=1–15) s Doorphone Call Time Specifies the maximum time of the doorphone call. 10 × n (n=1–30) s Door Open Duration Time Specifies the door opening duration. 1–15 s Specifies the length of waiting time before sending the internal Caller ID after receiving it. 10 × n (n=1–15) s Others SLT Suspend Time Feature Guide 331 3.2 PC Programming System–Time Service System–Time Service–System Parameter Description Value Range Table (1–8) Switch Mode Week (SundaySaturday) Specifies the Day/Night switching mode. Day & Day Start Lunch Setting & Night Day Start Manual/ Automatic Assigns if Day mode is used. Enable/Disable Specifies the start time for Day. 00:00–23:59 Setting Assigns if Lunch mode is used. Enable/Disable Lunch Start Specifies the start time for Lunch. 00:00–23:59 Setting Assigns if Lunch time ends. Enable/Disable Lunch End Specifies the end time for Lunch. 00:00–23:59 Setting Sets the Night start time. Enable/Disable Night Start Specifies the start time for Night. 00:00–23:59 Assigns if Break 1 is used. Enable/Disable Lunch Start Night Start Break Break 1 Start Setting Break 1 Start Specifies the start time for Break 1. 00:00–23:59 Setting Assigns if Break 1 ends. Enable/Disable Break 1 End Specifies the start time for Break 1. 00:00–23:59 Assigns if Break 2 is used. Enable/Disable Break 2 Start Setting Break 2 Start Specifies the start time for Break 2. 00:00–23:59 Setting Assigns if Break 2 ends. Enable/Disable Break 2 End Specifies the end time for Break 2. 00:00–23:59 Assigns if Break 3 is used. Enable/Disable Break 3 Start Setting 332 Feature Guide Break 3 Start Specifies the start time for Break 3. 00:00–23:59 Setting Assigns if Break 3 ends. Enable/Disable Break 3 End Specifies the end time for Break 3. 00:00–23:59 3.2 PC Programming System–Time Service–Holiday Parameter Holiday Mode Description Value Range Specifies the holiday mode. Day/Lunch/Break/ Night Holiday Schedule (1–24) Holiday Setting Assigns whether the Holiday schedule is used. Enable/Disable Start Date Specifies the start date. Month/Day End Date Specifies the end date. Month/Day System–Numbering Plan System–Numbering Plan–Extension Parameter Description Value Range N Block Extension (N=1–32) Dial 1–3 digits consisting of Specifies the leading 1 or 3 digits of the extension number. Any number 0–9 can be 0–9 set. Additional Digits Selects the additional digits. None/X/XX Feature Guide 333 3.2 PC Programming System–Numbering Plan–Feature Parameter Operator Call Description Specifies the feature number for calling the 1–4 digits consisting of operator. 0–9, or # Idle Trunk Access/ARS Specifies the feature number for making an outside call by ARS or Idle Trunk Access. 334 Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number for making an outside call by specifying a Trunk Group (1–48). TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number for making a TIE line call. Redial Specifies the feature number for dialling the last dialled number. Speed Dialling— System/Personal Specifies the feature number for making a call using System/Personal Speed Dialling number. Personal Speed Dialling— Programming Specifies the feature number for programming Personal Speed Dialling at each extension. Doorphone Call Specifies the feature number for making a call to a doorphone. Group Page Specifies the feature number for paging the Paging Group. External BGM on/off Specifies the feature number for turning External BGM on/off. Outgoing Message (OGM) Playback/ Record Specifies the feature number for Outgoing Message (OGM) Playback/Record Individual Trunk Access Specifies the feature number for Individual Trunk Access. Parallel Telephone Mode Specifies the feature number for Parallel Telephone Mode. Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number for creating call pickup groups. Feature Guide Value Range 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Directed Call Pickup Description Value Range Specifies the feature number for picking up 1–4 digits consisting of the directed call. 0–9, or # TAFAS—Calls through Specifies the feature number for TAFAS— an External Pager Calls through an External Pager. Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number for answering Group Paging. Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel Specifies the feature number for cancelling Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS. User Remote Operation/Remote COS Access/Verified Code Entry Specifies the feature number for Remote Operation, User Remote COS Access/ Verified Code Entry. Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Wireless XDP Parallel Mode. Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number for Account Code Entry. Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number for Call Hold/ Call Hold Retrieve. Call Hold Retrieve— Intercom Calls Specifies the feature number for Call Hold Retrieve—Intercom Calls. Call Park/Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number for Call Park/ Call Park Retrieve. Call Hold Retrieve— Trunk Calls Specifies the feature number for Call Hold Retrieve—Trunk Calls. Door Open Specifies the feature number for opening the door. External Feature Access Specifies the feature number for External Feature Access. ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number for holding an ISDN call. COLR Specifies the feature number for COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction). CLIR Specifies the feature number for CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction). Feature Guide 335 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description CLIP/COLP 1–4 digits consisting of Specifies the feature number for CLIP/ COLP (Calling Line Identification 0–9, or # Presentation/Connected Line Identification Presentation). MCID Specifies the feature number for MCID (Malicious Call Identification). ISDN-FWD Specifies the feature number for Call Forwarding (CF) on ISDN. ISDN-Call Waiting Specifies the feature number for ISDN— Call Waiting. Message Waiting set/ cancel/callback Specifies the feature number for Message Waiting set/cancel/callback. FWD/DND set/ cancel—Both Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) for all incoming calls. FWD/DND set/ cancel—External Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) for incoming Trunk calls. FWD/DND set/ cancel—Internal Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Single Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) for incoming intercom calls. FWD/DND No Answer Specifies the feature number for setting the Timer set duration time to activate the Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) feature. Group FWD/DND set/ cancel—Both Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Group Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) for all incoming calls. Group FWD/DND set/ cancel—External Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Group Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) for incoming Trunk calls. Group FWD/DND set/ cancel—Internal Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Group Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) for incoming intercom calls. Call Pickup Deny set/ cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Call Pickup Deny. Paging Deny set/ cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Paging Deny. Walking Extension Specifies the feature number for Walking Extension. Data Line Security set/ Specifies the feature number to set/cancel cancel Data Line Security. 336 Value Range Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Waiting—Intercom Specifies the feature number to enable Call 1–4 digits consisting of Calls Waiting on intercom calls. 0–9, or # Call Waiting—Trunk Calls Specifies the feature number to enable Call Waiting on trunk calls. Executive Override Deny set/cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Executive Override Deny. Not Ready Mode/ Ready Mode Specifies the feature number for Not Ready Mode/Ready Mode. Log-in/Log-out Specifies the feature number for Log-in/ Log-out. Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number for Incoming Call Queue Monitor. Hot Line programme/ set/cancel Specifies the feature number to programme/set/cancel Hot Line. Absent Message set/ cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Absent Message. BGM set/cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel BGM. Timed Reminder confirm/set/cancel Specifies the feature number to confirm/set/ cancel Timed Reminder. Extension Lock set/ cancel Specifies the feature number to set/cancel Extension Lock. Time Service Switch Specifies the feature number to switch Time Service. Remote Extension Lock off Specifies the feature number to turn off the Remote Extension Lock. Remote Extension Lock on Specifies the feature number to turn on the Remote Extension Lock. Personal Programme Clear Specifies the feature number to clear any features you have set. Personal Password set/cancel Specifies the feature number to set a Personal Password. Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number for Dial Information (CTI). Feature Guide 337 3.2 PC Programming System–Numbering Plan–Other PBX Access Code Parameter Other PBX 1–16 Access code Description Value Range Specifies the access code to reach another Max. 3 digits consisting PBX on the network. of 0–9, or # System–Numbering Plan–Quick Dialling Parameter Description Value Range Quick Dialling (1–80) Quick Dialling Access Specifies the feature number for Quick dialling features. Quick Dialling Number Specifies the number to dial. 1–4 digits consisting of 0–9, or # (Default: Blank) Max. 32 digits System–Numbering Plan–One Digit Parameter Description Assigns the feature number for Call Call Waiting/OHCA/ Whisper OHCA/Do Not Waiting/OHCA/Whisper OHCA/Do Not Disturb (DND) Override. Disturb (DND) Override 338 Executive Busy Override Assigns the feature number for Executive Busy Override. Alternate Calling— Ring/Voice Assigns the feature number for Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice. Message Waiting Set Sets the number to control the message waiting lamp. Call Monitor Specifies the call monitor feature number. Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS Specifies the Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) activation code. Conference Sets up the conference call. Feature Guide Value Range One digit consisting of 0–9, or # 3.2 PC Programming System–Class of Service System–Class of Service–Basic Parameter Description Value Range Class of Service (1–64) TRS/Barring TRS/Barring Level Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. 1–7 Extension Lock TRS/ Barring Level Specifies the TRS/Barring level for extension lock. 1–7 TRS/Barring Level for Speed Dialling Specifies the TRS/Barring level by using System Speed Dialling. 1–7 Trunk Setting Trunk Call Duration Time Specifies whether to restrict the Trunk calls Enable/Disable by the duration. Call Transfer on Trunk Assigns Call Transfer on Trunk Calls. Calls Enable/Disable Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls Assigns Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls. Enable/Disable Account Code Mode Specifies the feature number for entering Option/Forced account codes which may be forced or optional depending on COS programming. CFU Assigns the ability to perform CFU (Call Forwarding Unconditional) feature. Receiving Collect Call Assigns whether to enable or disable Enable/Disable receiving the collect calls via the trunk line. Outgoing Call Printed out (SMDR) Assigns the type of outgoing calls which will Enable/Disable be printed out by SMDR. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 339 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Operation Executive Busy Override Assigns to override the executive busy status. Enable/Disable Do Not Disturb (DND) Override Assigns to override the Do Not Disturb (DND) status. Enable/Disable OHCA Assigns to operate OHCA. Enable/Disable Door Open Assigns to operate Door Open. Enable/Disable Call Monitor Assigns to operate Call Monitor. Enable/Disable Call Pickup by DSS Assigns to operate Call Pickup by pushing Enable/Disable the DSS button. Setting Time Mode Assigns to switch the time mode. Enable/Disable Executive Busy Override Deny Assigns to deny Executive Busy Override. Enable/Disable Group FWD Selects whether Group FWD may be used. Enable-Group/ Enable-All/Disable Condition Remote Operation Deny Assigns to deny Remote Operation from other extension. Enable/Disable DISA Destination Assigns the extension to receive DISA calls. Enable/Disable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Assigns which extensions may set Wireless Enable/Disable XDP Parallel Mode. Programming 340 Programming Mode Level Selects the programming mode level. Disable/ Personal Programming/ Enable-All Manager Assignment Assigns to permit Manager operation. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming System–Class of Service–Trunk Group Parameter Description Value Range Class of Service (1–64) Day Time (1–64) Outgoing Setting Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls. Double-click to enable Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls. Double-click to enable Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls. Double-click to enable Assigns a trunk group for outgoing calls Double-click to enable Lunch Time (1–64) Outgoing Setting Break Time (1–64) Outgoing Setting Night Time (1–64) Outgoing Setting System–Class of Service–Internal Call Block Parameter Description Value Range Class of Service (Outgoing) (1–64) Class of Service (Incoming) (1–64) Internal Call Block Selects whether the internal calls are blocked. Non Block/Block System–SLT Parameter Description Value Range SLT Call Hold Mode Selects the SLT call hold mode. Mode1/Mode2/Mode3/ Mode4 Message Waiting Lamp Pattern Specifies the message waiting lamp pattern. 1–12 Feature Guide 341 3.2 PC Programming System–PT System–PT–Common Parameter Description Value Range Time Display (12H/ 24H) Assigns the time mode on the display. 12H/24H Personal Password & Display Mode Selects the display mode of personal password. Secret/Indicate Date Display Selects the date format. Day-Month/Month-Day LED Indication—Call Forwarding (FWD) Selects the LED indication pattern of Call Forwarding (FWD). On/Flash LED Indication—Do Not Disturb (DND) Selects the LED indication pattern of Do Not Disturb (DND). On/Flash OHCA (KX-T7235) Assigns to operate OHCA on KX-T7235. Enable/Disable Assigns to operate Whisper OHCA to be Whisper OHCA (Models before KX-T72 used by the models before KX-T72 series series) and SLTs. Enable/Disable Off-hook Monitor for Old PT Assigns to operate Off-hook Monitor on a system-wide basis. (For Proprietary Telephones prior to 74 series) Enable/Disable Off-hook Monitor for KX-T74/75/76 Assigns Off-hook Monitor on a system-wide Enable/Disable basis. (For KX-T74/75/76 PT) CO Button during Trunk Calls Selects a CO button operation during trunk Privacy release/LCD calls. switch Automatic Answer Ring Times Specifies the number of rings before answering. 0–3 rings Jog Dial Speed Selects the jog dial speed. Normal/High Speed PT Ring Off Assigns to set the PT ringer off. Enable/Disable System Feature Access Menu 342 No.1 Display list 1 No.2 Display list 2 No.3 Display list 3 No.4 Display list 4 No.5 Display list 5 No.6 Display list 6 No.7 Display list 7 No.8 Display list 8 Feature Guide Callback Cancel/ C.Pickup Direct/ C.Pickup Group/ Doorphone Call/ Door Open/ External Background Music/ Paging (It is available to set the same features on multiple lists.) 3.2 PC Programming System–Ring System–Ring–Common Parameter Description Value Range SLT Ring Mode Selects the SLT ring mode. 5120/4992/3840/2976 ms SLT Ring Type Selects the SLT ring frequency. 20/25 Hz System–Ring Pattern Table Ring Pattern Table Trunk Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Table (1–8) Trunk Call Ring Type Trunk Group (1–64) Selects the ring type for trunk group. Single/Double/Triple/ Option1/Option2 Ring Pattern Table Doorphone Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Table (1–8) Doorphone Call Ring Type Door (1–16) Selects for each doorphone. Single/Double/Triple (S-Double)/Option1/ Option2 Feature Guide 343 3.2 PC Programming Ring Pattern Table Others Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Table (1–8) Ring Type Extension Selects the ringing pattern for the extension. Single/Double/Triple/ Option1/Option2 Timed Reminder Alarm Selects the ringing pattern for Timed Reminder Alarm. Single/Double/Triple/ Option1/Option2 Callback Selects the ringing pattern for Callback. Single/Double/Triple/ S-Double/Option1/ Option2 Live Call Screening Selects the ringing pattern for Live Call Screening. Single/Double/Triple/ Option1/Option2 Message Waiting Selects the ringing pattern for Message Waiting. Single/Double/Triple/ Option1/Option2 System–Ring–Ring Pattern Table Detail Parameter Description Value Range Ring Pattern Option (32 ms x 40) Single (1–40) Assigns Single ringing pattern. Double (1–40) Assigns Double ringing pattern. Triple (1–40) Assigns Triple ringing pattern. S-Double (1–40) Assigns S-Double ringing pattern. Option1 (1–40) Assigns Option1 ringing pattern. Option2 (1–40) Assigns Option2 ringing pattern. On/Off 344 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming System–Tone System–Tone–Common Parameter Description Value Range Confirmation Tone 1 (Voice Call/ Doorphone) Assigns the confirmation tone 1 (Voice Call/ Enable/Disable Doorphone). Confirmation Tone 2 (Paging/Auto Answer) Assigns the confirmation tone 2 (Paging/ Auto Answer). Enable/Disable Confirmation Tone 3–1 Assigns the confirmation tone 3–1 when sending a call. Enable/Disable Confirmation Tone 3–2 Assigns the confirmation tone 3–2 when receiving a call. Enable/Disable Confirmation Tone 4–1 Assigns the confirmation tone 4–1 (When starting the conference call). Enable/Disable Confirmation Tone 4–2 Assigns the confirmation tone 4–2 (When ending a conference call). Enable/Disable Confirmation Tone 5 Assigns the confirmation tone 5 (While holding). Enable/Disable Distinctive Dial tone Assigns the distinctive dial tone. Enable/Disable Dial Tone Type (Extension) Selects the dial tone type for extensions. Type A/Type B Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone for ARS. Type A/Type B Feature Guide 345 3.2 PC Programming System–Tone–Tone Pattern Assignment Parameter Description Value Range Tone Pattern Assignment [0–6] Confirmation Tone (1, 2, 3–1, 3–2, 4–1, 4–2 and 5), [7] Warning Tone, [8–15] Dial Tone (1–A, 1–B, 2–A, 2–B, 3–A, 3–B, 4–A and 4–B), [16, 17] Busy Tone 1 and 2, [18, 19] Reorder Tone 1 and 2, [20, 21] Ringback Tone 1 and 2, [22] Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone, [23] Trunk Warning Tone, [24] Hold Alarm, [25] Call Waiting Tone, [26, 27] Conference Tone 1 and 2, [28] Hold Tone, [29–39] Reserved 346 Start Pattern Selects the start pattern. On/Off Cyclic Mode Selects the tone cyclic pattern. Cyclic/Single Sampling Time Selects the length of time of the sampling. 32/64 ms Tone Control Selects the tone control mode. Common Control/ Individual Control Frequency Selects the frequency. Type 1: 400 Hz/ Type 2: 440 Hz + 480 Hz/ Type 3: 480 Hz + 620 Hz/ Type 4: 620 Hz/ Type 5: 425 Hz/ Type 6: 1000 Hz/ Type 7: 440 Hz + 450 Hz Use count Specifies the number of the patterns to use. 0–10 Detail count Specifies the number of the Detail. Feature Guide 0–255 3.2 PC Programming System–Outgoing Message (OGM) Parameter Description Value Range Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording Time and Number Specifies the length time and number of time to record the outgoing message (OGM). 15 s × 64/30 s × 32/ 60 s × 16 DISA Security Mode Selects the security mode for DISA calls. Trunk/All/None DISA Destination Busy Selects the treatment of DISA callers when Busy Tone/Intercept/ Mode they dial a busy extension. Outgoing Message (OGM) DISA Destination DND Selects the treatment of DISA callers when Do Not Disturb (DND) Mode they dial a extension in DND mode. Tone/Intercept/ Outgoing Message (OGM) DISA dial Cyclic Tone Detection Selects what happens when the caller dials Retry/DTMF . Selects cyclic tone detection. Fixed/Option Tone On Maximum Specifies the tone required for detection. Time 10 × n (n=11–400) ms Tone Off Maximum Specifies the amount of silence following Time the tone to be recognised. 10 × n (n=11–400) ms Detection Times 3–16 Specifies the number of cycles required. System–Option Parameter Description Value Range Line Codec Selects the encoding technique. A-Law/µ-Law Carrier Codec Selects the encoding technique. A-Law/µ-Law Extension Clear—Call Waiting Clears Call Waiting feautre. Clear/No Clear Extension Clear—Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Clears Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) feature. Clear/No Clear Extension Clear—Hot Line Clears Hot Line feature. Clear/No Clear Automatic Redial for Analogue Trunk Assigns Automatic Redial for Analogue Trunk feature. Enable/Disable Automatic Redial—No Selects if the redial occurs when the called Retry/Disconnect Answer number rings but is not answered. Call Hold Mode Selects the Call Hold mode. Hold/Exclusive Hold Feature Guide 347 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Trunk Call Limitation Description Value Range Selects the trunk call limitation which is a Outgoing/ Outgoing + Incoming system programmable feature that disconnects an Trunk call when a specified timer expires. Automatic Call Hold by Selects the treatment for the caller in Hold/Disconnect INTERCOM/CO/G-DN Automatic Call Hold by INTERCOM/CO/Gbutton DN button. Dialled Digits during the Call Selects whether digits dialled during the call Yes/No are included in the redial number. SLT Ringing for CTI Selects the operation when making a call to Ring/No Ring the SLT using CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) code. End of Dialling Code Selects the end of dialling by dialling #. Yes/No ISDN Service End Method Selects the method to end the ISDN service. Dialling inter-digit Time out/Designated code ISDN Service End Code Specifies the code to end the ISDN service. Max. 2 digits Automatic Time Adjustment Assigns whether to adjust the time automatically. Enable/Disable System–Background Music (BGM) Parameter Description Internal Music on Hold Specifies the internal Music on Hold input Input Level level. Value Range -6/-3/0/3/6 dB External Music on Hold Input Level Background Music 1–8 Specifies BGM 1–8. -6/-3/0/3/6 dB System–Echo Cancel Parameter Description Value Range Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for for Conference conference. Enable/Disable Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for SLT to for SLT to Digital Line digital line. Enable/Disable Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for APT to Enable/Disable for APT to Digital Line digital line. Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for DPT to Enable/Disable for DPT to Digital Line digital line. Echo Canceller Control Assigns Echo Canceller control for trunk-to- Enable/Disable for Trunk-to-Trunk trunk. 348 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.3 Group Group–Trunk Group Group–Trunk Group–Main Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Group (1–64) Group Name Specifies the trunk group name. Max. 20 characters Class of Service Specifies COS. 1–64 Line Hunting Order Specifies the hunting sequence of idle lines High to Low/ on a trunk group basis. Low to High/ Rotation Automatic Disconnect after Dialling Assigns whether to disconnect the line automatically with no answer. Common Enable/Disable DISA Tone Detection Enable/Disable Silence Assigns whether to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects no signal during a trunk-to-trunk line call by DISA or AGC (Automatic Grain Control). Continuous Enable/Disable Assigns whether to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects a continuous signal during a trunk-to-trunk line call by DISA or AGC. Cyclic Enable/Disable Assigns whether to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects a cyclic signal during a trunk-to-trunk line all by DISA or AGC. IRNA IRNA Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Host PBX Access Code Code (1–10) Specifies the access code. Max. 10 digits including and # Feature Guide 349 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Timer Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Time Specifies the maximum time allowed for a trunk-to-trunk call. None/1–60 min Extn.-to-Trunk Call Duration Time Specifies the maximum time allowed for a extension-to-trunk call. None/1–60 min Forced Disconnection Time (No Response) Specifies the maximum time allowed for making a call with no response. None/1–4 min Collect Call (only for Brazil) Collect Call Block Assigns whether to reject the collect call. Enable/Disable Collect Call Block Waiting Time Specifies the maximum waiting time to reject the collect call. 512 × n (n=0–4) ms Collect Call Block Flash Time Specifies the length of Flash Time to reject 512 × n (n=0–4) ms the collect call. Caller ID Caller ID Modification Table Number Specifies Caller ID modification table number. 1–4 Group–Trunk Group–Local Access Priority Parameter Description Value Range Local Access Priority (1–64) Group No. Specifies the trunk group number. Group Name Refers to the trunk group name. (Display only) 1–64 (Trunk Group Number) Group–Trunk Group–Charge Rate Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Group (1–64) 350 Group Name Refers to the trunk group name. (Display only) Rate Specifies the charge rate per metre pulse. Feature Guide (0).0000001–9999999. 3.2 PC Programming Group–Extension Group Parameter Description Value Range Extension Group (1–128) Extn. Group Name Specifies the extension group name. Max. 20 characters Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number. 1–8 Group–Pickup Group Parameter Description Value Range Pickup Group (1–64) Extension Group (1–128) Pickup Group Member Selects whether the extension group belongs to the pickup group. Y/N Group–Paging Group Group–Paging Group–Common Parameter Description Value Range Paging for Do Not Disturb (DND) Extension Selects if the Do Not Disturb (DND) Do Not Disturb (DND)/ extension receives paging announcement. Paging Extension Paging Volume Specifies the paging volume level. -15/-12/-9/-6/-3/0/3/6 dB Group–Paging Group–Assign Extension Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group (1–32) Extension Group (1–128) Paging Group Specifies whether the extension group belongs to the paging group. Double click to enable Group–Paging Group–Assign External Pager Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group (1–32) External Pager (1–8) Paging Group Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the paging group. Double click to enable Feature Guide 351 3.2 PC Programming Group–Paging Group–Assign Output Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group (1–32) Output (1–8) Paging Group Specifies whether output port belongs to the paging group. Double click to enable Group–Paging Group–Assign Outgoing Message (OGM) Parameter Description Value Range Paging Group (1–32) Outgoing Message (OGM) Specifies the outgoing message number for None/1–64 emergency paging. Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group–Group Parameter Description Value Range Incoming Call Distribution Group (1–64) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Group Name Specifies the incoming call distribution group name. Max. 20 characters Type Selects the group type for each incoming call distribution group. Ring/UCD/Hunt Selects the way to distribute Call Waiting. All/Destination Basic Call Waiting Distribution 352 Call Forwarding (FWD) Selects if the extension rings when a call Mode reaches the group if FWD is set. Skip/Ring Do Not Disturb (DND) Mode Selects if the extension rings when a call reaches the group if DND is set. Skip/Ring Tenant Number Specifies the tenant which you are going to 1–8 programme. COS Level Specifies the COS level. CLIP/COLP Specifies the CLIP/COLP number used for Max. 16 digits the incoming call. Feature Guide 1–64 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Queuing Overflow Intercept Routing Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Queuing Call Limit Specifies the number of calls that may queue. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF None/1–30 Time out & Hurry-up Intercept Routing Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Overflow Time Assignment Specifies the maximum time to wait in a queue. No/10 × n (n=1–125) s Hurry-up Level Specifies the hurry-up level. None/1–30 Queuing Time Table Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. None/Table 1–64 Agent Operation No Answer Time Specifies the length of time before Idle Extension Hunting works if no answer. None/10 × n (n=1–15) s Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of time before Automatic Log-out works if no answer. None/1–15 Maximum Number of Agents Specifies the maximum number of active extensions. Max./1–32 Log-out All Assigns all extensions may log-out. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 353 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Forwarding (FWD) Setting Trunk Call Forwarding Assigns if Trunk calls are forwarded. (FWD) Set On/Off Trunk Call Forwarding Specifies the destination to forward the (FWD) Number trunk call. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Intercom Call Assigns if intercom calls are forwarded. Forwarding (FWD) Set On/Off Intercom Call Forwarding (FWD) Number Specifies the destination to forward the intercom call. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF VIP Call Assigns the VIP call. Enable/Disable Supervisor Specifies the extension of the supervisor. Extension Number ACD (CTI) Mode Assigns the ACD (CTI) mode. ACD is Automatic Call Distribution. Enable/Disable ACD (CTI) Waiting Time Specifies the length of waiting time for ACD 1–15 s (CTI) mode. ACD is Automatic Call Distribution. Mailbox Access ID Specifies the mailbox access ID required to Max. 16 digits including access the mailbox of the VPS. and # Incoming Call Log (for the Incoming Call Distribution Group) Specifies the maximum number of the incoming calls to be recorded in the incoming call log. Others 0–100 Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group–Member Parameter 354 Description Value Range Group Member Specifies the Group member number. Max. 32 members Extension Number Specifies the extension number. Extension Number Extension Name Refers to the name. (Display only) Delayed Ringing Specifies the number of rings the system is Immediate/1/2/3/4/5/6/ to wait to ring first one extension or group of No Ring extensions short time later if the first is unanswered. Wrap-up Time Specifies the wrap-up time. Feature Guide 10 × n (n=0–300) s 3.2 PC Programming Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group–Queuing Time Table Parameter Description Value Range Queuing Time Table (1–64) ( = Incoming Call Distribution Group) Sequence (1–16) Specifies the sequence of events during queuing. None/Intercept/ Disconnect/ Sequence 1–16/ Outgoing Message (OGM) 1–64/ Wait 5 × n (n=1–16) s Group–Idle Extension Hunting Parameter Description Value Range Idle Extension Hunting (1–64) Idle Extension Hunting Selects the Idle Extension Hunting type. Type Circular/Terminate Overflow Destination Specifies the destination extension when all Max. 32 digits including extensions in the Extension Group are , # and PF unavailable. Member (1–16) Specifies the member of the hunting. Extension Number Group–VM (DPT) Group Group–VM (DPT) Group–Common Parameter Description Value Range VPS Queuing Mode Assigns the queuing operation when VPS ports are busy. Enable/Disable Notification Mailbox Assigns to send a transfer notification when Enable/Disable VPS receives a call by Intercept Routing. Recall Notification Assigns to send recall notification. Enable/Disable Group–VM (DPT) Group–Group Information Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail (VM) Group 1–2 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Group Name Specifies the group name. Max. 20 characters Feature Guide 355 3.2 PC Programming Group–VM (DPT) Group–VPS Trunk Group No. (for Recall) Parameter Description Value Range VPS Trunk Group (1–48) VPS Trunk Group No. for Recall Specifies the trunk group number when a call returns to the VPS by Recall. 1–48 Group–VM (DTMF) Group Group–VM (DTMF) Group–Common Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail (VM) DTMF Status Ringback Tone Busy Tone Specifies the code indicating ringback tone. Max. 4 digits including 0–9, and # Specifies the code indicating busy tone. Reorder Tone Specifies the code indicating reorder tone. Do Not Disturb (DND) Specifies the code used for Do Not Disturb (DND) tone. Answer Specifies the extension answer code. Confirm Specifies the message waiting lamp control. Disconnect Specifies the disconnection code. Call Forwarding (FWD) Specifies the FWD to VM Ringback Tone to VM Ringback Tone code sent to the VM port when the extension dialled is forwarded to VM and the VM port is available to accept the call. Call Forwarding (FWD) Specifies the FWD to VM Busy Tone code to VM Busy Tone sent to the VM port when the extension dialled is forwarded to VM and no other VM ports are available to accept the call. Call Forwarding (FWD) Specifies the FWD to Extension Ringback to Extension Ringback Tone code sent to the VM port when the Tone extension dialled is forwarded to another, no voice mail extension. 356 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail (VM) DTMF Command Recording Message Max. 16 digits including Specifies the Recording Message command. This command is transmitted to 0–9, and # a VM port when a call is forwarded, intercepted or rerouted to the VM port. Listening Message Specifies the Listening Message command. This command is transmitted to a VM port when the message receiver presses the Message button to listen to the voice message. AA Service Specifies the AA (Automated Attendant) Service command. This command is sent to a VM port when an incoming trunk call is answered by the VM port. VM Service Specifies the VM Service command. Duration Time DTMF Duration for VM Selects the duration of the DTMF signals sent to the VM. 80/160 ms DTMF Inter-digit Pause Selects the DTMF Inter-digit Pause Time. Time 80/160 ms Pause Time Follow on Selects the length of waiting time after VM 0.5/1.0/1.5/2.0 s ID port answers a call before sending DTMF signals (such as Follow-on ID) to VM port. Pause Time VM (DTMF) Status Selects the length of waiting time before sending DTMF integration signals (Extension/System status). 0.5/1.0/1.5/2.0 s Others VM (DTMF) Queuing Mode Assigns the queuing mode when VPS ports Enable/Disable are busy. Call Forwarding (FWD) Selects call handling when calls are to VM (DTMF) forwarded to VPS. Sequence None/ Answer by Mailbox/ AA Intercept to VM (DTMF) Sequence Selects how calls are handled when intercepted to VPS. None/ Answer by Mailbox/ AA Mailbox Number for Extension Specifies whether an extension’s mailbox number is substituted by the extension number or Mailbox Access ID. Extension Number/ Mailbox Access ID Message Waiting Lamp Control Selects whether the system or the VM port By PBX/By VM turns off the Message Waiting lamp after the extension user retrieved a message recorded in his mailbox. Feature Guide 357 3.2 PC Programming Group–VM (DTMF) Group–Group Information Parameter Description Value Range Voice Mail (VM) Group 1–2 Floating Extension Number Specifies VM Floating extension number. Extension Number Group Name Specifies the group name. Max. 20 characters Type Selects the service type. AA/VM VM Port (1–12) Specifies the VM port number. Extension Number Group–DWX Ring Group Parameter Description Value Range DWX Ring Group (1–32) 358 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Name Specifies the floating extension name. Max. 20 characters Digital Wireless Extension (1–128) Assigns the digital wireless extension. Y (Belonging to a Group)/N Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.4 Line Line–Trunk Line Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Number (1–128) Physical Location Slot Refers to the slot position. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) Channel number Specifies the channel number. BRI4/BRI8 (0, 1)/ PRI23 (0–22)/ PRI30 (0–29)/ Other cards (0) Port Type Refers to the port type. (Display only) Trunk line/Extn. Trunk Name Specifies the trunk name. Max. 20 characters Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group. 1–64 Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension–Setting Parameter Description Value Range Extension Setting Physical Location Slot Refers to the slot position. (Display only) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. Extension Number Specifies the extension number. Extension Number Extension Name Specifies the extension name. Max. 20 characters Port Type Refers to the port type. (Display only) S-Hybrid/SLT/DPT/ ISDN/Wireless/IP Telephone Type Refers to the telephone type. (Display only) Telephone code Reference Feature Guide 359 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Basic Extension Group Assignment Specifies the extension group. PBX1:1–32/ PBX2:33–64/ PBX3:65–96/ PBX4:97–128 Group Name Refers to the group name. (Display only) Max. 20 characters COS Specifies the COS. 1–64 Ring Pattern Specifies the ringing pattern table for incoming calls. 1–8 Intercept Extension Intercept Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Option 1 360 Mailbox Access ID Specifies the codes required to access the Max. 16 digits including VM service. and # Transfer and Recall Destination Specifies the Transfer and Recall destination. CLIP/COLP Number Assignment Specifies the CLIP/COLP number used for Max. 16 digits the extension. Call Waiting for direct extension calls Specifies the Call Waiting mode for direct extension calls. Call Waiting from Trunk & Incoming group Assigns whether Call Waiting from Trunk & On/Off Incoming group is On or Off. Call Pickup Set Assigns whether Call Pickup is On or Off. On/Off Hot Line Specifies the telephone number for Hot Line. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Data Mode Assigns whether Data Line Security mode is enabled. On/Off Feature Guide Extension Number/ Blank(=Your own extension number) Off/Call Waiting/ OHCA/ Whisper-OHCA 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Option 2 Call Pickup Deny Assigns Call Pickup Deny mode. set/cancel Executive Busy Override Deny Assigns Executive Busy Override Deny feature. set/cancel Incoming Call Log Lock Assigns whether to lock the incoming call log. Unlock/Lock Paging Deny Assigns the Paging Deny feature. set/cancel CLIP/COLP Specifies the CLIP/COLP number. Trunk line/Extension CLIR Assigns the CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction) feature. Enable/Disable COLR Assigns the COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction) feature. Enable/Disable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Sets up Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to work with a wired telephone. None/Extension Number Preferred Line— Outgoing Selects the line to which the extension is connected automatically when making a call. No Line/Idle/ INTERCOM/Flexible key 1–36 Preferred Line— Incoming Selects which line the extension is No Line/Ringing Line/ connected automatically when answering a Flexible key1–36 call. On-hook Dial Mode Selects the operation when dialling in onhook status. * This program is not intended for DWX. Predial/Hot Key Dial Intercom Alerting Selects the intercom alerting mode. * This program is not intended for DWX. Tone Call/Voice Call/ Voice Call Deny Option 3 (PT) Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone for PT Call Waiting Tone/ extensions. Ringing tone Live Call Screening Recording Mode Selects whether to close the mailbox or Stop Recording/Keep keep recording the conversation after a call Recording is interrupted. Live Call Screening Answer Mode Selects whether the voice message being Hands-free/Private recorded is monitored automatically through the built-in speaker (Hands-free mode) or an alarm tone is sent (Private mode) while an incoming caller is leaving a message in the mailbox of the extension. * This program is not intended for DWX. Headset Set Selects headset mode. * This program is not intended for DWX. On/Off Feature Guide 361 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Display Language Specifies the LCD display language (5 languages). English (Second language is displayed as a factory default.) Character input mode Selects the character input mode. Alphabet/ Expansion alphabet/ Greek alphabet/ Cyrillic alphabet Incoming Call Information Display Selects the incoming call displayed information. Caller ID and Name/ Trunk Name/Called Number and Name Automatic LCD Status Assigns whether to change the LCD status Enable/Disable Change when making a trunk call. Key Click Tone Assigns the use of the key click tone. * This program is not intended for DWX. On/Off Automatic Answer Mode Specifies the object of Automatic Answer mode. Extn./Extn. + Trunk Key Programming Mode Selects the key programming mode of One- One-touch Dialling touch Dialling in PT programming. Only/No Limitation Flash mode during Trunk conversation Selects the flash mode during a conversation with an outside party. EFA/Terminate/ Flash Recall Intercom Tone Specifies the Intercom tone. 1–48 Ringing Tone Selects the ringing tone type. * This program is not intended for DWX. A/B/C/D Note KX-T75xx, KX-T74xx, KX-T7451 and APT are not available. Option 4 362 Log Memory Specifies the maximum number of the calls 0–100 to the incoming call distribution group to record in memory. ISDN Bearer Specifies the ISDN bearer mode on an extension basis. Automatic/Speech/ 3.1 K Audio Personal Password Specifies the personal password. Max. 10 digits Budget Management (0).0000001–9999999. Specifies the total telephone charge allowed to extension users on an extension basis. If the telephone charge on the extension exceeds the limit, further call cannot be made anymore from that extension. Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Setting Trunk Call Forwarding Assigns the Call Forwarding (FWD) set on On/Off (FWD) Set trunk calls. Trunk Do Not Disturb (DND) Set Assigns the Do Not Disturb (DND) set on trunk calls. On/Off Trunk Call Forwarding Selects the Call Forwarding (FWD) mode (FWD) Mode on trunk calls. Blank/All/Busy/ No Answer/ Busy & No Answer/ WR (Double Ring) Trunk Call Forwarding Specifies the destination number of Call (FWD) Number Forwarding (FWD) on trunk calls. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Intercom Call Assigns the Call Forwarding (FWD) set on On/Off Forwarding (FWD) Set intercom calls. Intercom Do Not Disturb (DND) Set Assigns the Do Not Disturb (DND) set on intercom calls. On/Off Intercom Call Forwarding (FWD) Mode Specifies the Call Forwarding (FWD) mode Blank/All/Busy/ on intercom calls. No Answer/ Busy & No Answer/ WR (Double Ring) Intercom Call Forwarding (FWD) Number Specifies the destination number of Call Forwarding (FWD) on intercom calls. Call Forwarding—No Answer Time Specifies the length of time before the Call 0–120 s Forwarding No Answer feature is activated. Max. 32 digits including , # and PF Message Extension LCD Message Specifies the extension LCD message. Max. 16 characters Specifies the Itemised Billing code. Max. 10 digits ARS Itemised Code Itemised Billing Code Feature Guide 363 3.2 PC Programming Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension–Personal Speed Dialling Parameter Description Value Range Extension * This program is not intended for DWX. Extension Number Specifies the extension number. Extension Number Extension Name Specifies the extension name. Max. 20 characters Personal Speed Dialling (0–9) Name Specifies Personal Speed Dialling name. Max. 20 characters Number Specifies Personal Speed Dialling number. Max. 32 digits Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension–CO Button Parameter 364 Description Extension Number Refers to the extension number. (Display only) Name Refers to the extension name. (Display only) Telephone type Refers to the telephone type. (Display only) CO button (1–12/24/36) Specifies the feature assigned to a CO button. Feature Guide Value Range Not Stored/S-CO/G-CO/L-CO/DSS/ One-touch/Message/(FWD/DND Both)/ (FWD/DND External)/ (FWD/DND Internal)/ (Group FWD/DND Both)/ (Group FWD/DND External)/ (Group FWD/DND Internal)/Account/ Conference/Voice Mail Transfer/ Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer/ LCS/LCS Cancel/System Alarm/G-DN/ Answer/Release/ISDN Service Access/ Call Log/EmergencyPaging/Log-in/ Log-out/Time Service/Terminate/EFA/ Charge/Call Park/CLIR/COLR/Hurry-up/ Wrap-up/(Toll Restriction/Call Barring)/ ISDN Hold/Headset 3.2 PC Programming Detail Parameter Description Value Range S-CO button Trunk Number Specifies the trunk number. 1–512 Tone Specifies the tone type. 1–48 Trunk Group Number Specifies the trunk group number. 1–64 Tone Specifies the tone type. 1–48 Specifies the tone type. 1–48 Specifies the extension number. Extension Number G-CO button *1 L-CO button *1 Tone DSS button Extension Number One-touch Dialling button *1 Dial Specifies the dialled number. Max. 32 digits Extension Number Specifies the incoming call distribution group floating number. Incoming call distribution group floating extension number. Tone Specifies the tone type. 1–48 Specifies the extension number. None/ Extension Number Target Specifies the target extension type. Extension/Group Call Type Specifies the target call type. Both/External/Internal Group DN button *1 Message button Extension Number FWD/DND button Account Code Entry Specifies the Account Code Entry button. Conference Specifies the Conference button. Terminate Specifies the Terminate button. External Feature Access Specifies the EFA button. Feature Guide 365 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Call Park button Park Type Specifies the park type. None/Automatic/ Specify Park Number Specifies the park number. None/0–99 Specifies the extension number. None/ Extension Number Log-in Type Specifies the log-in type. None/All/ Incoming call distribution group Extension Number Specifies the incoming call distribution group extension number. None/ / Incoming call distribution group extension number Specifies the incoming call distribution group extension number. Incoming call distribution group extension number Call Log button Extension Number Log-in button Hurry-up button Extension Number Wrap-up Specifies the Wrap-up button System Alarm Specifies the System Alarm button Time Service button Selection Specifies the switching time mode. Answer Specifies an Answer button *1 Release Specifies a Release button *1 All/ (Day/Night/Break)/ (Day/Night/Lunch)/ (Day/Night) Toll Restriction/Call Barring button TRS/Barring Level Specifies TRS/Barring level. 1–7 ISDN Service Access button *1 Feature Number 366 Specifies the feature number. Max. 32 digits CLIR Specifies the CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction) button. COLR Specifies the COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction) button. Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Two-way Record button Voice Mail (VM) Extension Specifies the VM extension number. Extension Number Extension Number Specifies the extension number of message recording. None/Extension Number LCS Specifies the Live Call Screening (LCS) button LCS Cancel Specifies the LCS Cancel button Voice Mail Transfer button Extension Number Specifies the VM extension number. Wrap-up Specifies the Wrap-up button. Charge Specifies the Charge button. ISDN Hold Specifies the ISDN Hold button. Headset Specifies the Headset button. Extension Number *1 Those buttons can be assigned to one or more CO buttons. Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension–PF Button Parameter Description Extension Number Specifies the extension number. (Display only) Name Refers to the extension name. (Display only) Telephone type Refers to the telephone type. (Display only) PF Button (1–12) Specifies the PF buttons. Value Range Extension Number Not Stored/One-touch Note This feature can be assigned to one or more PF buttons. Feature Guide 367 3.2 PC Programming Line––DSS Console Line–DSS Console–Setting Parameter Description Value Range DSS Console 1–8 (Cabinet 1) Paired Extension Refers to the paired extension number and name. (Display only) DSS Console Refers to the DSS console type. (Display only) KX-T7040/KX-T7240/ KX-T7440/KX-T7441/ KX-T7540/KX-T7541/ KX-T7640 Line–DSS Console–DSS Key Parameter Description Value Range DSS Console 1–8 (Cabinet 1) DSS/PF Button (1–) Key n 368 Feature Guide Specifies the feature on the DSS/PF button. Not Stored/S-CO/G-CO/L-CO/DSS/ One-touch/Message/(FWD/DND Both)/ (FWD/DND External)/ (FWD/DND Internal)/ (Group FWD/DND Both)/ (Group FWD/DND External)/ (Group FWD/DND Internal)/Account/ Conference/Voice Mail Transfer/ Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer/LCS/ LCS Cancel/System Alarm/G-DN/Answer/ Release/ISDN Service Access/Call Log/ EmergencyPaging/Log-in/Log-out/ Time Service/Terminate/EFA/Charge/Call Park/CLIR/COLR/Hurry-up/Wrap-up/ (Toll Restriction/Call Barring)/ISDN Hold/ Headset 3.2 PC Programming Line–Doorphone Parameter Description Value Range Doorphone (1–64) Physical Location Slot Refers to the slot position. (Display only) PBX No.–Slot No. Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) 1–4 Specifies the doorphone name. Max. 20 characters Name Doorphone destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Extension Number/ Trunk number Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number. 1–8 COS Specifies the COS number. 1–64 VPS Trunk Group Number Specifies the VPS trunk group number. 1–64 Line–External Pager Parameter Description Value Range External Pager (1–8) Floating Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Name Specifies the name. Max. 20 characters Tenant (1–8) Selects the tenant to which the External Pager is assigned. IN/OUT Background Music Specifies whether BGM is sent when the External Pager is idle. None/1–8 Volume Specifies the volume of the external pager. -6/-3/0/3 dB Feature Guide 369 3.2 PC Programming Line–Outgoing Message (OGM) Parameter Description Value Range Outgoing Message (OGM) (1–64) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Name Specifies the name. Max. 20 characters Tenant (1–8) Assigns the tenant to which you are going to assign this outgoing message (OGM). IN/OUT DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Destination (Dial 0–9) Dial (0–9) DISA Message 370 Feature Guide Specifies the extension numbers to each DISA AA number. Extension Number Selects the DISA outgoing message (OGM). None/1–64 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.5 Feature Feature–Speed Dialling & Caller ID Table Parameter Description Value Range System Speed Dialling & Caller ID Caller ID Specifies Caller ID of the originating party. Max. 32 digits Name Specifies the name of the originating party. Max. 20 characters Destination Specifies CLI destination. Extension Number Caller ID Modification Table Parameter Description Value Range Caller ID modification table (1–4) Table for Local Area (1–10) Area Code Specifies the area code. Max. 6 digits Additional Dial Specifies the added number. Max. 4 digits (0–9, and #) Digits to delete Specifies the deleted digits. 0–9 Table for Long Distance Additional Dial Specifies the added number. Max. 4 digits (0–9, and #) Digits to delete Specifies the deleted digits. 0–9 Feature–Emergency Dialling Parameter Description Value Range Emergency Dialling Number (1–10) Dial Specifies the number. Max. 32 digits including and # Feature Guide 371 3.2 PC Programming Feature–Verified Code Parameter Description Value Range Verified Code (1–1000) Verified User Code Specifies the user code that must be used. Max. 4 digits Verified User Name Specifies the user name of the verified code. Max. 20 characters Verified Password Specifies the acceptable password. Max. 10 digits COS for Verified Code Specifies the COS for verified codes. 1–64 Itemised Billing code for ARS Specifies the Itemised Billing code for ARS. Max. 10 digits Budget Management 0–99999999 Used to determine the total telephone charges allowed to extension users on an extension basis. If the telephone charge on the extension exceeds the limit, trunk calls cannot be made anymore from that extension. Feature–Second Dial Tone Parameter Description Value Range Second Dial Tone Waiting Code (1–100) Dial Specifies the carrier code. Max. 4 digits Pause Count Specifies the number of pause required to ensure that the dial tone is received. 0–4 Feature–LCD Message Parameter LCD Message (1–9) Description Specifies the LCD message. There can be a maximum of seven % characters in an LCD message. Value Range Max. 16 characters Feature–Printed Message Parameter Printing Message (1–9) 372 Feature Guide Description Specifies the printing message. There can be a maximum of seven % characters in an LCD message. Value Range Max. 24 characters 3.2 PC Programming Feature–Charge Parameter Charge Margin Description Value Range Specifies a margin to be applied to the telephone charges when printed on the Check-out sheet. 0–99.99 Tax 1 Specifies a tax rate which applies to telephone charges. 0–99.99 Tax 2 Specifies a tax rate which applies to minibar 0–99.99 charges. Tax 3 Specifies a tax rate which applies to other charges. Tax rate 0–99.99 Decimal Point Specifies the decimal point position. This 0–7 programme is available in rate and charge settings. Currency Specifies the currency. Max. 3 characters Currency Display Position Selects the currency display position. Before/After Budget Management Over Selects how the extension is treated when Alarm/ the extension exceeds the limit. Alarm + Disconnect Charge Counting on Answer Detection Assigns whether to start counting the charge when detecting an answer. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 373 3.2 PC Programming Feature–Hotel Parameter Description Value Range Hotel Operator Operator 1 Specifies the operator 1. Extension Number Operator 2 Specifies the operator 2. Extension Number Operator 3 Specifies the operator 3. Extension Number Operator 4 Specifies the operator 4. Extension Number Hotel Telephone Cost Detail Print Assigns if call details are printed with the telephone charges. Enable/Disable Cleaning Status at Check out Specifies the status of the hotel room at check-out. Not Ready/Ready Contents 1 Specifies the contents 1. Max. 12 characters Contents 2 Specifies the contents 2. Contents 3 Specifies the contents 3. Charge Title Printout Header Header 1 Print Assigns printing or not printing. Printing/Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data. Max. 80 characters Header 2 Print Assigns printing or not printing. Printing/Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data. Max. 80 characters Header 3 374 Feature Guide Print Assigns printing or not printing. Printing/Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data. Max. 80 characters 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Printout Footer Footer 1 Print Assigns printing or not printing. Printing/Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data. Max. 80 characters Footer 2 Print Assigns printing or not printing. Printing/Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data. Max. 80 characters Footer 3 Print Assigns printing or not printing. Printing/Not Printing Data Specifies the sentence in the print out data. Max. 80 characters Printout Location Header Line Specifies the header start line. 0–99 Column Specifies the header start column. 0–99 Line Specifies the data start line. 0–99 Column Specifies the data start column. 0–99 Line Specifies the footer start line. 0–99 Column Specifies the footer start column. 0–99 Data Footer Timed Reminder Message Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. None/1–64 VPS and COS Check- Assigns to change VPS and COS check-in Enable/Disable in Status status when checking-in. Feature Guide 375 3.2 PC Programming Feature–Tenant Parameter Description Value Range Tenant (1–8) System Speed Dialling Boundary From Specifies the start number. To Specifies the last number. The last number must be larger than the start number. 000–999 Verified Code Boundary From Specifies the start number. To Specifies the last number. The last number must be larger than the start number. 000–999 Call Hold Music Specifies the Music Source port to be used System/BGM 1–8/ for Music on Hold for the tenant. Beep Tenant Operator Specifies the tenant operator extension. Extension Number ARS Specifies the ARS mode. Off/Local Access/ All Access/System Feature–ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit Parameter Description Value Range ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit table (1–50) 376 Leading Digit Specifies the leading digits recognised for en bloc dialling. 7 digits including 0–9, and # Dial Digits Specifies the recognised dialled digits. 0–30 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.6 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS/Barring–Denied Code Parameter Description Value Range TRS/Barring Level Selects a TRS/Barring level. 2–6 Deny Code (1–100) Specifies the TRS/Barring deny codes. Max. 7 digits TRS/Barring–Exception Code Parameter Description Value Range TRS/Barring Level Selects a TRS/Barring level. 2–6 Exception Code (1–100) Specifies the TRS/Barring exception codes. Max. 16 digits TRS/Barring–Special Carrier Access Exception Code Parameter Description Value Range Special Carrier Access Code (1–20) Exception Code Specifies the exception code of the carrier Max. 16 digits access code. TRS/Barring–Option Parameter TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling Description Assigns whether to override TRS/Barring by System Speed Dialling. Value Range Enable/Disables Check " " and "#" data Selects whether the system checks for " " No Check/Check and "#" as a part of the TRS/Barring procedure. Trunk Seizure after Selects the status of the Trunk when the TRS/Barring Time Out TRS/Barring check times out. Keep/Disconnect TRS/Barring Dial Digits—Incoming Call None/1–7 Specifies the maximum number of dialled digits allowed while receiving incoming calls. Dialling Mode Selects the dialling mode during a Selection while talking conversation with an outside party. All/Tone/Pulse/ Key Pad TRS/Barring Check after EFA Enable/Disable Assigns whether to restrict the call after utilising EFA (External Feature Access). Feature Guide 377 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.7 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ARS–System Parameter Description Value Range ARS Mode Selects whether to use ARS (Automatic Route Selection) or not. Off/Local Access/ All Access No Carrier Access code Operation Selects what happens when the system does not find the carrier code. Local Access/ Disconnect ARS–Leading Digit Parameter Description Value Range ARS Leading Digits (1–1000) Leading Digits Specifies the leading digits of the telephone Max. 16 digits number which will be routed by the ARS (Wild card is not available.) procedure. Additional Dial Digits Specifies any additional digits. Routing Plan Specifies the Routing Plan which is used for 1–16 routing the telephone number registered in leading digit. 0–5 digits ARS–Routing Plan Time Table Parameter Description Value Range Routing Plan Time Table (1–16) Time Table (Sun–Sat) 378 Feature Guide Time-A Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a first time Enable/Disable each day. Time-A Specifies Time-A. Time-B Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a second Enable/Disable time each day. Time-B Specifies Time-B. 00:00–23:59 Time-C Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a third time each day. Enable/Disable Time-C Specifies Time-C. 00:00–23:59 Time-D Setting Assigns whether the plan is used a fourth time each day. Enable/Disable Time-D Specifies Time-D. 00:00–23:59 00:00–23:59 3.2 PC Programming ARS–Routing Plan Priority Parameter Description Value Range Routing Plan (1–16) Time Table (Sun–Sat) Time-A Priority (1–6) Specifies the carrier priority (1–6). None/1–10 Specifies the carrier priority (1–6). None/1–10 Specifies the carrier priority (1–6). None/1–10 Specifies the carrier priority (1–6). None/1–10 Time-B Priority (1–6) Time-C Priority (1–6) Time-D Priority (1–6) ARS–Carrier Parameter Description Value Range Carrier (1–10) Name Specifies the carrier name. Max. 20 characters Digits to delete Assign the number of digits to delete from the beginning of the user dialled number. 0–15 Carrier Access Code Assign the code to access its carrier. Max. 32 digits Outgoing Trunk Group Assigns the trunk groups which access or (1–64) are connected to this carrier. Enable/Disables Authorisation Code Tenant (1–8) Specifies the authorisation code for each tenant. Max. 10 digits Trunk Group (1–64) Specifies the authorisation code each trunk Max. 10 digits group. Modified Command Specifies the modified command. Max. 16 digits including 0–9, "A", "S", "C", "P", "I", "H", "Z", " " and "#" ARS–Exception Code Parameter Description Value Range ARS Exception Code (1–200) Code Number Specifies the number. Max. 16 digits Feature Guide 379 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.8 Private Network Private Network–Common Parameter PBX Code Description Specifies the identity of PBX. Value Range Max. 7 digits Private Network–TIE Routing Plan Table Parameter Description Value Range TIE Routing Plan Table (1–32) Leading Digits Max. 3 digits consisting Specifies the leading one, two or three digits of the number for TIE calls. Used to of 0–9 or X (Wild card) determine the trunk group for routing a TIE call. Priority (1–8) Digits to delete Specifies the number of digits to be deleted 0–15 from the dialled digits. Additional Digits Specifies the digits to be added to the dialled number. Max. 32 digits Trunk Group for TIE Specifies the trunk group to be used when None/1–64 Call making a TIE call. 380 Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.9 Incoming Call Incoming Call–DIL/DDI/DID/TIE Parameter Description Value Range Trunk Port (1–128) Slot Refers to PBX No.–Slot No. (Display only) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) Channel number Specifies the channel number. BRI4/BRI8 (0, 1)/ PRI23 (0–22)/ PRI30 (0–29)/ Other cards (0) Card Type Refers to the card type. (Display only) BRI/PRI/LCOT/T1/E1/ E & M/IP-GW Port Type Refers to the port type. (Display only) L-CO/Trunk line/ Extn./ QSIG-Master/ QSIG-Slave/G-CO/ DID/E & M-C/E & M-P/ OPX Trunk Attribute Refers to the trunk attribute. Public/Private/VPN Incoming Type Selects how the incoming trunk call is DIL/DDI(DID)/MSN/ routed to the destination within the system. TIE*1 *1 Value Range of Incoming Type. Card Type LCOT T1 E1 E&M BRI PRI IP-Gateway Port Type L-CO L-CO G-CO DID E & M-C DR2 E & M-C E & M-P E & M-C E & M-P Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Value Range DIL DIL DIL DIL, DID DIL, DID DIL, DID DIL, DID DIL, DID DIL DIL DIL, DID, MSN DIL, DID DIL, DID Feature Guide 381 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range CLI (Calling Line Identification) Ring Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Enable/Disable DIL Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Extension Number Tenant Number for DIL Specifies the tenant number for DIL. 1–8 VPS Trunk Group Number 1–48 Specifies the trunk group number for the VPS. DDI/DID/TIE/MSN dial information 382 Feature Guide Digits to delete Specifies the number of digits to be deleted 0–15 from the number received from the DDI/ DID/TIE/MSN lines. Additional Dial Specifies the number of digits to be added Max. 8 digits consisting to the number received from the DDI/DID/ of 0–9 TIE/MSN lines. 3.2 PC Programming Incoming Call–DDI/DID Table Parameter Description Value Range DID/DDI Table (1–1000) Number Specifies DID/DDI number Max. 32 digits Name Specifies DID/DDI name Max. 20 characters Day In Day mode. Enable/Disable Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. CLI Ring Routing DID/DDI Destination Day In Day mode. Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Extension Number Tenant Number for DDI/DID Specifies the tenant number for incoming DDI/DID calls. 1–8 VPS Trunk Group Number Specifies the trunk group number for the VPS. 1–48 Feature Guide 383 3.2 PC Programming Incoming Call–MSN Parameter Description Value Range Slot Refers to PBX No.–Slot No. (Display only) Port Refers to the port no. (Display only) Incoming Type Selects how the incoming trunk call is DIL/DDI(DID)/MSN routed to the destination within the system. Location (1–10) Number Specifies the MSN number. Max. 16 digits Name Specifies the name. Max. 20 characters CLI Ring Routing Day In Day mode. Enable/Disable Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. MSN Destination Day In Day mode. Extension Number Lunch In Lunch mode. Break In Break mode. Night In Night mode. Tenant Number for Specifies the tenant number for incoming MSN MSN calls. 1–8 VPS Trunk Group Number 1–48 Specifies the trunk group number for the VPS. Incoming Call–Option Parameter 384 Description Value Range Intercept Busy Assigns Intercept on Busy. Intercept Do Not Disturb (DND) Assigns Intercept on Do Not Disturb (DND). Disable (Busy Tone)/ Enable Intercept Illegal Dial Assigns Intercept on invalid number. Feature Guide Disable (Busy Tone)/ Enable Disable (Reorder Tone)/Enable 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.10 Maintenance Maintenance–SMDR Parameter Description Value Range Type Specifies the type of SMDR printout. Type A/Type B/Type C Port Specifies the port used for SMDR. None/ RS-232C 1/ RS-232C 2/ RS-232C 3/ RS-232C 4/ USB 1/USB 2/ USB 3/USB 4 Page Length Specifies the number of lines per page. Used to match the SMDR output to the paper being used in the printer. 4–99 Skip Perforation Specifies the number of lines to be skipped 0–95 at the end of every page. Outgoing Call Printing Assigns whether SMDR will print out the information about outgoing calls. Printing/Not Printing Incoming Call Printing Assigns whether SMDR will print out the information about incoming calls. Printing/Not Printing Intercom Call Printing Assigns whether SMDR will print out the information about intercom calls. Printing/Not Printing Log-in/out Printing Printing/Not Printing Assigns whether the Log-in/Log-out of Extension Groups/Incoming Call Distribution Groups members and Phantom extensions will be printed out on the SMDR. Room Status Printing Assigns whether room status will be printed Printing/Not Printing out on the SMDR. (For the hotel.) Timed Reminder Printing Assigns whether SMDR will print out the Printing/Not Printing information about Timed Reminder feature. (For the hotel.) ARS Dial Selects printing of the user-dialled number User Dial/ARS Dial or the modified number as dialled by ARS on the SMDR. CLIP/Caller ID Printing Selects the printed format of CLIP/Caller format ID. None/Number/Name/ Name + Number DDI/DID Printing format Selects the printed format of the DDI/DID subscriber number. None/Number/Name/ Name + Number Speed Dialling Name Assigns whether the Speed Dialling Name Printing/Not Printing will be printed on the SMDR. Secret Dial Selects printing of secret numbers. Secret/Print Feature Guide 385 3.2 PC Programming Parameter Description Value Range Privacy Mode Specifies the printing type of dialled number. Dialled Number/ Print "X" Display Language Specifies the language shown on SMDR. English/4 Other Preinstalled Languages Date Format Selects the date format in SMDR. Month-Day-Year/ Day-Month-Year/ Year-Month-Day/ Year-Day-Month Character Code Selects the character code. IBM ASCII/ISO-8859-1 Maintenance–Remote Parameter Description Value Range Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Name Specifies the name. Max. 20 characters Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number Name Specifies the name. Max. 20 characters ISDN Remote Remote Programming Assigns the remote programming. Assignment Enable/Disable Remote Password Lock Times None/1–15 Specifies the number of time you are allowed to enter the wrong remote password. Maintenance–PT Programming by User Parameter Description Value Range User Programming List (000–999) 386 Programming number Refers to the programming number. (Display only) Programming Name Refers to the programming name. (Display only) User Operation Assigns whether to allow the user to programme. Enable/Disable Dealer & User Operation Assigns whether to allow the dealer and user to programme. Enable/Disable Feature Guide 3.2 PC Programming Maintenance–RS-232C Port Parameter Description Value Range RS-232C Port Parameter (1–4) New Line Selects the new line code. CR + LF/CR Baud Rate Selects the baud rate. 2400/4800/9600/ 19200/38400/57600/ 115200 bps Data Bits Selects the word length. 7/8 Parity Selects the parity bit. None/Mark/Space/ Even/Odd Stop bits Selects the stop bit. 1/2 Flow Control Selects the flow control type. None/Hardware/ (Xon/Xoff) Maintenance–Daily Test Setting Parameter Description Value Range Setting Assigns testing. Enable/Disable Start Time Specifies the start time of testing. 00:00–23:59 Maintenance–External Modem Control Parameter External Modem Command Description Value Range Specifies the external modem command for Max. 80 characters the initial setting. consisting of 0–9, A–Z, a–z or the other marks Maintenance–Power Failure Transfer Control Parameter Description Value Range PFT Card Position (1–6) Trunk Card Slot Number Specifies the trunk card location. Extension Card Slot Specifies the extension card location. Number *1 1–11*1 1–11*1 The same number for each of the trunk and extension card is not available. Feature Guide 387 3.2 PC Programming Maintenance–Error–Alarm Information Parameter Error Log Information Print Description Value Range Assigns whether the error log information is Printing/Not Printing printed. Local Alarm Floating Number 388 Feature Guide Specifies the floating extension number. Extension Number 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.11 Software Version Parameter Description MPR (Main Central Processing) software data (Display only) PBX No. Specifies the PBX number. Version Specifies the MPR (Main Central Processing) version. LPR (1–11) software data (Display only) Slot Specifies the slot no. Type Specifies the card type. Version Specifies the software version. Feature Guide 389 3.2 PC Programming 3.2.12 Password Change Parameter 390 Description Value Range System Password Specifies the system password. 4–10 digits User Password Specifies the user password. 4–10 digits Manager Password Specifies the manager password. 4–10 digits Feature Guide 3.3 PT Programming 3.3 PT Programming Required Telephone/Extension A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the system programming. The extension must be in a COS permitted "System & Personal Programming" or the extension connected to the smallest port number. System programming allows only one extension user to enter at any time. Buttons and Functions Fixed Button Functions T76XX Previous PT PREV (PREVIOUS) REDIAL SP-PHONE NEXT FWD/DND /Page up CONF /Page down AUTO DIAL ENTER STORE Back to previous menu — HOLD END CLEAR TRANSFER AUTO ANSWER SELECT MUTE PROGRAM/ Pause Flash PROGRAM PAUSE FLASH/ RECALL INTERCOM Secret SOFT KEY Feature Guide 391 3.3 PT Programming Entering System Programming mode System Programming enables the extension user to set the time, call destination and all sorts of system conditions within the limits of available programming. The dealer or manager can also set up a desired parameters for user programming. It is necessary to enter the relevant password to start programming. Programming has two levels, Dealer level and User level. Dealer Level PROGRAM Programming No. Dealer Password # = 1234 3 digits User Level PROGRAM Programming No. User Password = 1234 3 digits Note means default value through this manual. Programming Structure Programming Programming Group Title Number [0XX] Basic Programming [1XX] System Programming [2XX] System Timer Programming [3XX] TRS/Barring/ARS Table Programming Global system parameters. Flexible system timers. TRS/Barring and Automatic Route Selection (ARS). Setting of trunk, trunk group, or BRI line features. [5XX] COS Programming Class of Service parameters. [6XX] Extension Programming [7XX] Resource/Interface Programming [8XX] SMDR & Maintenance Programming [9XX] Feature Guide Frequently used programming steps. Trunk Programming [4XX] 392 Description Card Programming Assignment of the extension features Assignment of the various interfaces on the PBX. Setting of SMDR and maintenance features. The programming used to refer to or delete the Card. 3.3 PT Programming Entering Characters To store a name or message, you can enter the following characters. Those tables show you the characters available on each button. To change to another table, press the Message button. Table 1 (Standard Display) Times Buttons 1 2 3 4 1 ! ? " 1 2 A B C 3 D E 4 G 5 5 6 7 8 9 a b c 2 F d e f 3 H I g h i 4 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r s 7 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 . , ' : ; 0 / + — = < > $ % & @ ( ) £ # Times Buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 ! ? " ä ö ü 1 2 A B C a b c À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç 2 3 D E F d e f Ð È É Ê Ë 3 4 G H I g h i Ì Í Î Ï 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ø Œ 6 7 P Q R S p q r s ß 7 8 T U V t u v Ù Ú Û Ü 9 W X Y w x y Ý 9 . , ' : ; 0 / + — = < > $ % & @ ( ) 0 # Table 2 0 # £ Ö 8 # Feature Guide 393 3.3 PT Programming Basic Programming Date & Time [000] NEXT ENTER ENTER NEXT Year Month Day 00–99 01–12 01–31 Hour Minute 00–23 00–59 END (HOLD) ENTER System Speed Dialling Number [001] Speed Dialling No. Telephone No. 000–999 32 digits All–Not stored ENTER END ENTER To the Next Speed Dialling No. To the Desired Speed Dialling No. NEXT CANCEL System Speed Dialling Name [002] Name Speed Dialling No. ENTER 000–999 20 characters All–Not stored ENTER END Extension Number [003] ENTER Current Extn. No. New Extn. No. 1–5 digits 1–5 digits 101– END ENTER Extension Name [004] Extn. No. ENTER 394 Feature Guide Max. 5 digits Name 20 characters All–Not stored END ENTER 3.3 PT Programming Personal Password [005] ENTER Extn. No. Password Max. 5 digits Max. 10 digits END ENTER Operator Assignment [006] ENTER Time No. Extn. No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night 1–5 digits END ENTER Console and Paired Telephone Assignment [007] Console No. ENTER 01–08 Extn. No. 1–5 digits All consoles–Not stored ENTER END Absent Message [008] Location No. ENTER 1–8 Message Max. 16 characters 1:Will Return Soon ENTER 2:Gone Home 3:At Ext %%% 4:Back at %%:%% 5:Out until %%/%% 6:In a meeting 7–9:Blank(Not stored) END Charge Margin [010] MarginXX.YY% ENTER 2+2 decimal places 00.00 END ENTER Charge Tax [011] Location No. ENTER 1–3 Tax XX.YY% 2+2 decimal places 00.00 ENTER END Feature Guide 395 3.3 PT Programming Charge Rate per Unit [012] Trunk Group No. ENTER 396 Feature Guide 01–64 Charge Rate Max. 8 digits including decimal point All trunk lines–1.00 ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming System Programming Flexible Numbering [100] ENTER Location No. Feature No. 01–36 4 digits (Default)List END (HOLD) ENTER To the Next Location No. To the Desired Location No. NEXT CANCEL Time Service Switching Mode [101] SELECT (AUTO ANS) Manual/Auto ENTER END ENTER Time Service Start Time [102] Week No. ENTER Hour:Minute Time No. 0 Sun/1 Mon/ 1 Day-1/2 Lunch/ 2 Tue/3 Wed/ 3 Day-2/4 Night 4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat 00:00–23:59 Different by the country/area END ENTER To the Next Time No. To the Next Week No. NEXT CANCEL Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment [103] Location No. ENTER 01–64 Trunk Group No. 01–64 Location No.=Trunk Group No. END ENTER System Password for Dealer [110] Password ENTER 4–10 digits 1234 END ENTER Feature Guide 397 3.3 PT Programming System Password for User [111] Password ENTER 4–10 digits 1234 END ENTER Manager Password [112] Password ENTER 4–10 digits 1234 END ENTER Verified Code Number [120] Location No. Verified code 0001–1000 Max. 4 digits ENTER END ENTER Verified Code Name [121] ENTER Location No. Name 0001–1000 Max. 20 characters END ENTER Verified Code Password [122] ENTER Location No. Password 0001–1000 Max.10 digits END ENTER Verified Code COS Number [123] ENTER Location No. COS No. 0001–1000 01–64 01 END ENTER Decimal Point for Currency [130] Desired No. ENTER 398 Feature Guide 0–7 2 END ENTER 3.3 PT Programming Currency [131] Currency ENTER 3 chracters END ENTER Main Processor Software Reference [190] MPR Version ENTER Reference END Feature Guide 399 3.3 PT Programming Time Programming Hold Recall Time [200] Time ENTER 0–240 s 60 s ENTER END (HOLD) Transfer Recall Time [201] Time ENTER 1–240 s 60 s ENTER 1–240 s 60 s END ENTER Intercept Time [203] Time END ENTER Hot Line Waiting Time [204] Time ENTER 0–15 s 1s END ENTER Automatic Redial Repeat Times [205] Number of Times ENTER 1–15 Different by the country/area END ENTER Automatic Redial Interval [206] Time ENTER 400 Feature Guide (1–120) ×10 s Different by the country/area END ENTER 3.3 PT Programming Door Open Duration Time [207] Time ENTER 2–7 s 5s END ENTER Call Duration Count Start Time [208] Time ENTER 0–60 s 0s END ENTER DISA Delayed Answer Time [209] Time ENTER 0–30 s 5s END ENTER DISA Extend Time [210] Time ENTER 0–7 min 3 min END ENTER DISA Intercept Time [211] Time ENTER 0–60 s 20 s END ENTER Feature Guide 401 3.3 PT Programming TRS/Barring Line Routing Table Programming TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling [300] ENTER SELECT (AUTO ANS) Disable/Enable END (HOLD) ENTER TRS/Barring Denied Code [301] ENTER Level No. Location No. Denied code 2–6 001–100 Max. 16 digits END ENTER To the Next Location No. To the Desired Location No. NEXT CANCEL Exception Code [302] Level No. ENTER Location No. 2–6 Exception Code 001–100 END Max. 16 digits ENTER Special Carrier Access Code [303] ENTER Location No. Carrier Access Code 01–20 Max. 16 digits END ENTER Emergency Dialling Number [304] ENTER Location No. Emergency No. 01–10 Max. 32 digits ARS Mode [320] ENTER 402 Feature Guide SELECT OFF/Idle Trunk/All Access END ENTER ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming ARS Leading Digits [321] Location No. Leading Digit No. 0001–1000 ENTER END 32 digits ENTER ARS Routing Plan Number [322] ENTER Location No. ARS Plan No. 0001–1000 01–16 Location No. Exception No. END ENTER ARS Exception Number [325] 001–200 ENTER Max. 16 digits END ENTER ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330] Plan No. 01–16 ENTER ARS Time No. Week No. 0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/ 3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat 1 TimeA/2 TimeB/ 3 TimeC/4 TimeD Hour:Minute END 0–23/0–59 ENTER ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) Assignment [331–346] Week No. ARS Time No. 1 Sun/2 Mon/3 Tue/ 4 Wed/5 Thu/6 Fri/7 Sat ENTER 1 TimeA/2 TimeB/ 3 TimeC/4 TimeD Priority 1–6 Carrier Access code END 1–10/None ENTER ARS Carrier Name [350] ENTER Carrier Table No. Name 01–10 20 character All–Not stored ENTER END Feature Guide 403 3.3 PT Programming ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351] Carrier Table No. ENTER 01–10 Trunk Group 16 digits SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER END ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code [352] ENTER Carrier Table No. Digits to delete 01–10 0–15 0 ENTER END ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code [353] ENTER 404 Feature Guide Carrier Table No. Carrier Access code 01–10 32 digits ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming Trunk Programming Trunk Connection [400] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–64 SELECT (AUTO ANS) No Connect/ Connect END (HOLD) ENTER To the Next Port No. To the Desired Port No. CANCEL NEXT Note To confirm the Trunk connection and programming using a PT, dial [ ] [3] [7] + Trunk Access number (3 digits). You will hear a dial tone if it is available and connected. Trunk Name [401] ENTER Slot No. Port No. Name 101–110 01–64 20 characters Slot No. Port No. Trunk Group No. 101–110 01–64 01–64 01 END ENTER Trunk Group [402] ENTER ENTER END Trunk Access Number Reference [409] ENTER Slot No. Port No. Trunk Access No. 101–110 01–64 Reference only END LCOT Dialling Mode [410] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 SELECT DTMF/Pulse END ENTER Feature Guide 405 3.3 PT Programming LCOT Pulse Speed [411] Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 SELECT Low/High ENTER END ENTER LCOT DTMF Duration [412] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 SELECT 80/160ms END ENTER LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing [413] ENTER Slot No. Port No. Mode No. 101–110 01–16 0:None/1:6.5/ 2–113:(N–1)×8 ms 400 ms END ENTER LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming [414] ENTER Slot No. Port No. Mode No. 101–110 01–16 0:None/1:6.5/ 2–113:(N–1)×8 ms 400 ms END ENTER LCOT Reverse Circuit [415] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 SELECT Disable/ Outgoing/Both Call ENTER END LCOT Pause Time [416] ENTER 406 Feature Guide Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 SELECT 1.5/2.5/ 3.5/4.5 s END ENTER 3.3 PT Programming LCOT Flash Time [417] Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–16 ENTER SELECT None/80/96/112/ 300/ 600/900/ 1200 ms/option END ENTER LCOT Disconnect Time [418] ENTER SELECT 0.5/ 1.5/ 2.0/4.0/12.0 s END ENTER BRI Automatic Configuration [420] ENTER Slot No. Port No. Subscriber No. 101–110 01–08 Max. 16 digits ENTER END BRI DIL/DID/MSN Selection [421] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 SELECT DIL/ DDI/ MSN END ENTER BRI Subscriber Number [422] ENTER Slot No. Port No. Subscriber No. 101–110 01–08 Max. 16 digits ENTER END BRI Port Type [423] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 SELECT Trunk/ ENTER Extension/ QSIG-M/QSIG-S END BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 SELECT Permanent/ Call by call END ENTER Feature Guide 407 3.3 PT Programming BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 SELECT Permanent/ Call by call END ENTER BRI Configuration [426] ENTER SELECT P-P/P-MP END ENTER BRI TEI Mode [427] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 TEI Fix 00–63/Automatic Fix 00 ENTER END BRI Network Type [428] ENTER Network Type 00–99 Different by the country/area END ENTER BRI Extension Tone [429] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–110 01–08 SELECT Disable/ Enable END ENTER DIL 1:1 Destination [450] ENTER END ENTER 408 Feature Guide Time No. Slot No. Port No. Destination No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night 101–110 01–16 Max. 5 digits 3.3 PT Programming DID Number [451] Location No. DDI No. 0001–1000 32 digits ENTER END ENTER DID Name [452] Location No. Name 0001–1000 20 characters ENTER END ENTER DID Destination [453] ENTER Time No. Location No. Destination No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night 0001–1000 1–5 digits END ENTER Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470] Time No. Trunk Group No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night ENTER Destination No. 01–64 1–5 digits END ENTER Host PBX Access Code [471] Trunk Group No. Location No. 01–64 ENTER 1–8 Host PBX Access Code END Max.10 digits ENTER Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration Time [472] Trunk Group No. ENTER 01–64 Time 01–60 min 10 min END ENTER Feature Guide 409 3.3 PT Programming Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Time [473] Trunk Group No. Time 01–64 01–60 min 10 min ENTER END ENTER DISA Silence Detection [475] Trunk Group No. 01–64 ENTER SELECT No Detect/ Detect ENTER END DISA Continuous Tone Detection [476] Trunk Group No. 01–64 ENTER SELECT No Detect/ Detect ENTER END DISA Cyclic Tone Detection [477] Trunk Group No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT No Detect/ Detect END ENTER Caller ID Signal Type [490] Slot No. ENTER 101–110 SELECT FSK/Visual Caller ID/DTMF ENTER END Pay Tone Signal Type [491] Slot No. ENTER 410 Feature Guide 101–110 SELECT 12/16 KHz END ENTER 3.3 PT Programming COS Programming Outgoing Trunk Group Number [500] ENTER Time No. COS No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night 01–64 Trunk Group No. SELECT (AUTO ANS) Disable/ Enable 01–64 END (HOLD) ENTER To the Next Trunk Group No. To the Desired Trunk Group No. NEXT CANCEL TRS/Barring Level [501] Time No. ENTER 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night COS No. 01–64 Level No. 1–7 1 ENTER END Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502] COS No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT Disable/ Enable END ENTER Call Transfer on Trunk Calls [503] COS No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER END Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls [504] COS No. ENTER 01–64 END Feature Guide 411 3.3 PT Programming Executive Busy Override [505] COS No. ENTER SELECT Disable/ Enable 01–64 ENTER END Executive Busy Override Deny [506] COS No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER SELECT Option/ Forced ENTER END DND Override [507] COS No. ENTER 01–64 END Account Code Mode [508] COS No. ENTER 01–64 END Speed Dialling TRS/Barring Level [509] ENTER COS No. TRS/Barring Level 01–64 1–7 1 END ENTER Extension Lock TRS/Barring Level [510] ENTER COS No. TRS/Barring Level 01–64 1–7 7 END ENTER Manager Assignment [511] COS No. ENTER 412 Feature Guide 01–64 SELECT Disable/Enable *Only COS no.64 is set to Enable. END ENTER 3.3 PT Programming Door Open Assignment [512] COS No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER SELECT Disable/ Enable ENTER END Time Service Switching Mode [514] COS No. ENTER 01–64 END Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone [515] COS No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT Disable/ Enable END ENTER Programming Mode Level [516] COS No. ENTER 01–64 SELECT Disable/Personal/ System&Personal END ENTER Feature Guide 413 3.3 PT Programming Extension Programming XDP Assignment [600] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–111 01–08 SELECT (AUTO ANS) Off/On ENTER END (HOLD) To the Next Port No. To the Desired Port No. NEXT CANCEL VPS/DSS Console/PC Console Assignment [601] ENTER Slot No. Port No. 101–111 01–08 SELECT Normal/ DSS 1–8 VPS 1–(1–12)/ VPS 2–(1–12)/ PC-CNS 1–8 END ENTER Class of Service [602] ENTER Extn. No. COS No. 1–5 digits 01–64 01 END ENTER Extension Group Assignment [603] ENTER Extn. No. Extension Group No. 1–5 digits 001–032 001 END ENTER Extension Intercept Destination [604] ENTER 414 Feature Guide Time No. Destination No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night 1–5 digits ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605] ENTER Extn. No. Time 1–5 digits 1–120 s 15 s END ENTER CLIP/COLP Number Assignment [606] ENTER Extn. No. CLIP/COLP No. 1–5 digits Max. 16 digits END ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [620] ENTER Location No. Extn. No. 01–32 1–5 digits 01–64 ENTER END Delayed Ringing Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [621] ENTER Location No. 01–32 01–64 ENTER SELECT Immediate/ 1–6 (rings)/ No ring END Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622] ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group No. Extn. No. 1–5 digits END ENTER 01–64 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623] ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group No. Name 20 characters ENTER END 01–64 Feature Guide 415 3.3 PT Programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Type Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [624] ENTER SELECT Ring/ UCD/Hunt END ENTER 01–64 Overflow Destination on Time Out Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [625] ENTER Time No. Destination No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night Max. 32 digits 01–64 ENTER END Overflow Time Assignment Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [626] ENTER Overflow Time (1–125)×10 s 60 s END ENTER 01–64 Overflow Destination by Busy Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [627] ENTER Time No. Destination No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night 1–5 digits 01–64 END ENTER Queuing Call Limit [628] ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group No. 01–64 416 Feature Guide Number in Queuing 0–30 30 ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming Queuing Hurry-up Level Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [629] ENTER Hurry-up Level None/0–30 30 ENTER Time No. Table No. 1 Day/2 Lunch/ 3 Break/4 Night None, 01–64 END 01–64 Queuing Time Table Number Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [630] ENTER 01–64 END ENTER Queuing Time Table [631] ENTER ENTER Table No. Location No. 1–64 01–16 SELECT None/Disconnect/ Overflow/A×5 s/ seqB/Message C END Maximum Number of Agents Incoming Call Distribution Group No. [632] ENTER Number of Agents None (32)/1–32 None (32) ENTER END 01–64 Paging Group for Extension Group [640] Paging Group No. 01–32 ENTER ENTER Extn. Group No. 001–128 SELECT No/ Yes END Feature Guide 417 3.3 PT Programming Paging Group for External Pager [641] Paging Group No. ENTER ENTER External Pager No. SELECT No/ Yes 1–2 01–32 END Pickup Group for Extension Group [650] Pickup Group No. Extn. Group No. 1–64 001–128 ENTER SELECT No/ Yes END ENTER VM Group Floating Extension Number [660] VPS (DPT) Group No. 1–2 ENTER Extn. No. 1–5 digits 01:100, 02:200 ENTER SELECT Circular/ Terminate ENTER END Idle Extension Hunting Type [680] Hunting Group No. ENTER 01–64 END Hunting Floating Extension Number [681] Hunting Group No. ENTER 01–32 01–64 Extn. No. 1–5 digits 418 Feature Guide ENTER Location No. END 3.3 PT Programming DWX (Digital Wireless Extension) Registration [690] DWX No. Extn. No. 001–128 1–5 digits ENTER END ENTER Using the KX-TD7690 When the DWX has not been registered yet. Push F3 key for 2 seconds Push power button for 2 seconds. C.Tone When the DWX has been already registered. MENU SEL Push power button F1 key for 2 seconds. Select "DWX PROGRAM". SEL SEL Select "SYSTEM SETTING". F1 key SEL Choose "SYSTEM No. 1–4". F1 key Select F1 key "REGISTRATION". C.Tone F1 key Assigns to set the System Lock by using KX-TD7690 MENU SEL SEL Select "DWX F1 key Select "SYSTEMF1 key PROGRAM". SETTING". F1 key SEL System Lock Password Select "SYSTEM LOCK". ENTR SEL CHNG F1 key F1 key Choose "Enable/Disable". System Lock Password ENABLE 4 digits F1 key DISABLE 4 digits F1 key ENTR C.Tone F1 key Using the KX-TD7590 F Push on-hook button Function for 5 seconds. Twice SELECT / Choose "DECT SYSTEM No." 1–4 SELECT PS PIN System Lock Password 4 digits SELECT / Select "INITIAL SETTING". 4 digits ENABLE SELECT / Select "REGISTRATION". / /OK C.Tone /OK Choose System Lock "ENABLE/DISABLE". System Lock Password 4 digits DISABLE /OK Using the KX-TD7580 Feature Guide 419 3.3 PT Programming / Push power button Function for 2 seconds. button / Select "Setting Handset". Select "REGISTRATION". PS PIN / / Select "Register H/set". 4 digits Choose "Base unit No. 1–4". Function C.Tone button DWX Termination [691] DWX No. ENTER 001–128 END ENTER DWX PIN Registration [692] ENTER DWX No. DWX PIN 001–128 4 digits 1234 ENTER END Changing DWX PIN using the KX-TD7690. MENU F1 key DWX PIN 4 digits 420 Feature Guide SEL Select "DWX PROGRAM" Select "SYSTEM F1 key SETTING" F1 key ENTR F1 key SEL C.Tone SEL Select "CHANGE PIN" F1 key 3.3 PT Programming Resource/Interface Programming External Pager Floating Extension Number [700] Pager No. Extn. No. 1–2 1–5 digits ENTER ENTER END (HOLD) To the Next Pager No. To the Desired Pager No. NEXT CANCEL Music Source Selection for Port 2 [710] ENTER SELECT (AUTO ANS) External/ Internal1/ Internal2 ENTER END Music Source Selection for Call Hold [711] Music Source No. Beep/Music1–8 Music 2 ENTER ENTER END Music Source Selection for Transfer [712] ENTER SELECT Hold Music/ Ring back ENTER END Doorphone Call Destination [720] SELECT Day1/Lunch/ Break/Night ENTER Door No. 01–4×16 Destination No. 1–5 digits ENTER END Door Number Reference [729] ENTER Slot No. Card No. Port No. Door No. 101–111 1–3 1–4 Reference only END Feature Guide 421 3.3 PT Programming Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730] Message No. ENTER Extn. No. 01–64 1–5 digits ENTER END Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731] ENTER Message No. Name 01–64 Max. 20 characters DISA Security Mode [732] ENTER 422 Feature Guide SELECT None/ Trunk/All ENTER END ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming SMDR & Maintenance Programming New Line [800] Location ENTER 1 SELECT (AUTO ANS) CR+LF/CR ENTER END (HOLD) Baud Rate [800] Location ENTER 2 SELECT 2400/4800/ 9600/ 19200/38400/57600/ 115200 bps END ENTER Data Bits [800] Location ENTER 3 SELECT 7/ 8 bits END ENTER Parity [800] Location ENTER 4 SELECT None/ Mark/ Space/Even/Odd END ENTER Stop Bits [800] Location ENTER 5 SELECT 1bit/2bits END ENTER SMDR Port [801] ENTER SELECT None/RS232C1–4/ USB1–4 ENTER END Feature Guide 423 3.3 PT Programming SMDR Page Length [802] Page length ENTER END 4–99 line 66 ENTER SMDR Skip Perforation [803] Skip Perforation ENTER 0–95 lines 0 END ENTER SMDR Outgoing Call Printing [804] ENTER SELECT No print/ Print ENTER END SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805] ENTER SELECT No print/ Print END ENTER Remote Programming Assignment [810] ENTER SELECT Disable/ Enable END ENTER Modem Floating Extension Number [811] Extn. No. ENTER 1–5 digits END ENTER ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number [812] Extn. No. ENTER 424 Feature Guide 1–5 digits ENTER END 3.3 PT Programming Slot Card Programming Slot Card Type Reference [900] ENTER Slot No. Card Name 101–111 Reference only END (HOLD) Reference only Slot Card Deletion [901] ENTER Slot No. Delete 101–111 101–111 ENTER END To the Next Slot No. To the Desired Slot No. OPB3 Option Card Type Reference [902] ENTER Slot No. Card No. Option Card Type 101–111 1-3 Reference only END Reference only OPB3 Option Card Deletion [903] ENTER Slot No. Card No. 101–111 1–3 Delete ENTER END Feature Guide 425 3.3 PT Programming 426 Feature Guide Index Section 4 Index 427 Index A B Absent Message 151, 395 Account Code Entry 78 Account Code Mode 412 Administrative Information Output Features 201 Advice of Charge (AOC) 166 Agent Operation 353 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 70 Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override 64 Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 70 ANI (Automatic Number Identification) Service 312 Answering Features 61 Answering Features—SUMMARY 61 ARS Added Number for Carrier Access code 404 ARS Carrier Name 403 ARS Exception Code 379 ARS Exception Number 403 ARS Itemised Code 363 ARS Leading Digits 378, 403 ARS Mode 402 ARS Outgoing Trunk Group for Carrier Access 404 ARS Removed Digits for Carrier Access code 404 ARS Routing Plan Number 403 ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) Assignment 403 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 403 ARS–Carrier 379 ARS–Exception Code 379 ARS–Leading Digit 378 ARS–Routing Plan Priority 379 ARS–Routing Plan Time Table 378 ARS–System 378 Audible Tone Features 214 Authorisation Code 106 Automatic Call Hold 120 Automatic Call Park 122 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) 68 Automatic Extension Release 66 Automatic Log-out 52 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 144 Automatic Privacy 127 Automatic Redial 88 Automatic Redial Interval 400 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 400 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 4, 101, 378 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 101 Automatic Setup 259 Automatic Trunk Group Access Assignment 397 Auxiliary Connections 268 Background Music (BGM) 134 Basic Programming 394 Baud Rate 423 BGM—External 134 Boss & Secretary feature 59 BRI Automatic Configuration 407 BRI Configuration 408 BRI DIL/DID/MSN Selection 407 BRI Extension Tone 408 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 407 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 408 BRI Network Type 408 BRI Port Type 407 BRI Subscriber Number 407 BRI TEI Mode 408 Budget Management 4, 96 Busy on Busy 50 Buttons and Functions 391 428 C Call Directory—Extension Dialling 70 Call Directory—Speed Dialling 89 Call Duration Count Start Time 401 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 167 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 169 Call Forwarding (FWD) 57 Call Forwarding (FWD) Setting 354 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 55 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features—SUMMARY 55 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Setting 363 Call Forwarding on Trunk Calls 411 Call Forwarding—No Answer Time 415 Call Handling Features 13 Call Hold 120 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN 170 Call Hold Retrieve Deny 120 Call Park 122 Call Park Recall 122 Call Park Retrieve Deny 122 Call Pickup 63 Call Splitting 123 Call Transfer 118 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 171 Call Transfer on Trunk Calls 411 Call Transfer with Announcement 118 Call Transfer without Announcement 118 Call Waiting 37 Call Waiting Tone 72 Caller ID 4, 144, 285, 306, 310, 318, 350 Caller ID Features 144 Caller ID Modification Table 371 Caller ID Signal Type 410 Index Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 25 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 144 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 117 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 172 Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR) 173 Carrier 379 Channel 307, 315 Charge Margin 395 Charge Metre 206 Charge Rate per Unit 396 Charge Tax 395 Circular Hunting 38 Class of Service 414 Class of Service (COS) 243, 339, 341 CLIP/COLP Number Assignment 415 Clock Configuration Priority 325 Collect Call Block (only for Brazil) 30, 350 Common 284, 288, 297, 305, 309, 317, 320, 323 Common–Basic 309 Common–E1 Line Signal Setting 310 Common–E1 MFC-R2 Setting 1 312 Common–E1 MFC-R2 Setting 2 313 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 175 Conference 126 Conference Features 125 Conference Features—SUMMARY 125 Configuration 281 Configuration–Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) 324 Configuration–External Clock Priority 325 Configuration–Option 325 Configuration–Slot 281 Configuration–Slot–BRI 288 Configuration–Slot–CSINF 323 Configuration–Slot–CTI-LINK 323 Configuration–Slot–E & M 317 Configuration–Slot–E1 309 Configuration–Slot–Extension 320 Configuration–Slot–IP-Gateway 324 Configuration–Slot–LCOT 284 Configuration–Slot–OPB3 283 Configuration–Slot–PRI 297 Configuration–Slot–T1 305 Confirmation Tone 215 Console and Paired Telephone Assignment 395 Consultation Hold 113, 115, 123 Conversation Features 107 COS Programming 411 Currency 399 D Data Bits 423 Data Line Security 111 Date & Time 394 Decimal Point for Currency 398 Delayed Ringing 43, 415 Denied Code Tables 92 Detail 365 Dial Tone 214, 286 Dial Tone Detection 80 Dial Tone Transfer 98 Dial Type Selection 79 Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 114 DID Destination 409 DID Name 409 DID Number 409 DID/DDI Table 383 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) 324 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Connection 195 Digital Wireless Extension (DWX) Features 195 DIL 1:1 Destination 408 Direct In Line (DIL) 17 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling Inward (DDI) 19 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 137 Direct One-touch Answering 61 Direct Trunk Access 75 Directed Call Pickup 63 DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service) 137 DISA Continuous Tone Detection 410 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection 410 DISA Delayed Answer Time 401 DISA Extend Time 401 DISA Intercept Routing—Busy/DND 138 DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer 139 DISA Intercept Time 401 DISA Intercept—No Dial 137 DISA Security Mode 422 DISA Security Mode and Available Features 137 DISA Silence Detection 410 DISA Timer 330 Display Information 160 DND Override 60, 412 Do Not Disturb (DND) 60 Door Number Reference 421 Door Open 132 Door Open Assignment 413 Door Open Duration Time 401 Doorphone Call 131, 369 Doorphone Call Destination 421 Doorphone Call Ring Type 343 Doorphone Timer 331 429 Index DSP (Digital Signal Processor) Gain Adjustment 311 DSS Console 368 DTMF Tone 305, 309, 317 DWX (Digital Wireless Extension) Registration 419 DWX Directory 198 DWX Feature Buttons 199 DWX PIN Registration 420 DWX Ring Group 196, 358 DWX Termination 420 E E & M-P Pulse Length 311, 318 E1 Line Service 4, 178 E1 Line Service Features 178 Emergency Call 77 Emergency Dialling Number 371, 402 Entering Characters 393 Entering System Programming mode 392 Exception Code 402 Exception Code Tables 92 Exclusive Call Hold 120 Executive Busy Override 69, 412 Executive Busy Override Deny 69, 412 Extension Controlling Features 209 Extension Group 351 Extension Group Assignment 414 Extension Intercept Destination 414 Extension Lock 97 Extension Lock TRS/Barring Level 412 Extension Name 394 Extension Number 394 Extension Port Configuration 242 Extension Programming 414 Extension Setting 293, 302, 359 Extension Timer 327 Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration 114 Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration Time 409 External Feature Access (EFA) 113 External Pager 351, 369 External Pager Floating Extension Number 421 EXtra Device Port (XDP) 242 F Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 268 Feature 371 Feature Guide References 2 Feature–Charge 373 Feature–Emergency Dialling 371 Feature–Hotel 374 Feature–ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit 376 Feature–LCD Message 372 Feature–Printed Message 372 Feature–Second Dial Tone 372 430 Feature–Speed Dialling & Caller ID 371 Feature–Tenant 376 Feature–Verified Code 372 Fixed Buttons 152 Flash 306, 310, 318 Flash/Recall/Terminate 112 Flexible Buttons 156 Flexible Numbering 397 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering 261 Floating Extension 266 Frame Error Detection 311 Full One-touch Dialling 87 FWD—All Calls 57 FWD—Busy 57 FWD—Busy/No Answer 57 FWD—Follow Me 57 FWD—No Answer 57 G Group 244, 349 Group Call Distribution 43 Group Call Pickup 63 Group-I Code Assignment 312 Group-II Code Assignment 312 Group–DWX Ring Group 358 Group–Extension Group 351 Group–Idle Extension Hunting 355 Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group 352 Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group– Group 352 Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group– Member 354 Group–Incoming Call Distribution Group– Queuing Time Table 355 Group–Paging Group 351 Group–Paging Group–Assign Extension 351 Group–Paging Group–Assign External Pager 351 Group–Paging Group–Assign Outgoing Message (OGM) 352 Group–Paging Group–Assign Output 352 Group–Paging Group–Common 351 Group–Pickup Group 351 Group–Trunk Group 349 Group–Trunk Group–Charge Rate 350 Group–Trunk Group–Local Access Priority 350 Group–Trunk Group–Main 349 Group–VM (DPT) Group 355 Group–VM (DPT) Group–Common 355 Group–VM (DPT) Group–Group Information 355 Group–VM (DPT) Group–VPS Trunk Group No. (for Recall) 356 Group–VM (DTMF) Group 356 Group–VM (DTMF) Group–Common 356 Group–VM (DTMF) Group–Group Information 358 Index H Handover 195 Hands-free Answerback 64 Hands-free Operation 107 Headset Operation 110 Hold Recall 120 Hold Recall Time 400 Holding Features 120 Holiday Schedule 333 Host PBX Access Code 409 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 82 Hot Line 91 Hot Line Waiting Time 400 Hunting 43 Hunting Floating Extension Number 418 Hurry-up Redirection 47 I Idle Extension Hunting 38, 355 Idle Extension Hunting Type 418 Idle Line Preference 67 Idle Trunk Access 75 Incoming Call 381 Incoming Call Distribution Group 352 Incoming Call Distribution Group Extension Number 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features— SUMMARY 40 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 415 Incoming Call Distribution Group Type 416 Incoming Call Features 14 Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY 34 Incoming Call Log 148 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 148 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 53 Incoming Call–DDI/DID Table 383 Incoming Call–DIL/DDI/DID/TIE 381 Incoming Call–MSN 384 Incoming Call–Option 384 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 14 Individual Trunk Access 75 Installation Manual References 2 Installation Procedure: 276 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features 161 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)— SUMMARY 161 Intercept 360 Intercept Routing 27 Intercept Routing—Busy/DND 27 Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 27 Intercept Routing—No Destination 29 Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 49 Intercept Time 400 Intercom Call 70 Internal Call Block 33 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY 32 Interrupt Redial 88 Introduction 274 IRNA 349 ISDN Centrex Service 163 ISDN En bloc Dialling Leading Digit table 376 ISDN Extension 176 ISDN Line Service 4 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number 424 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 165 Itemised Billing Code 106 L Last Number Redial 88 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming 406 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing 406 LCOT Dialling Mode 405 LCOT Disconnect Time 407 LCOT DTMF Duration 406 LCOT Flash Time 407 LCOT Pause Time 406 LCOT Pulse Speed 406 LCOT Reverse Circuit 406 LED Indication 158 Line 359 Line Preference Override 67 Line Preference—Incoming 62 Line Preference—Outgoing 67 Line–Doorphone 369 Line–DSS Console–DSS Key 368 Line–DSS Console–Setting 368 Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension 359 Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension– CO Button 364 Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension– Personal Speed Dialling 364 Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension–PF Button 367 Line–Extension/Digital Wireless Extension– Setting 359 Line–External Pager 369 Line–Outgoing Message (OGM) 370 Line–Trunk Line 359 Line––DSS Console 368 Live Call Screening (LCS) 193 Live Call Screening Password Control 194 Local Access Priority 350 Local Alarm Information 270 Log-in/Log-out 51 Log-in/Log-out Monitor 52, 53 431 Index Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote Control 53 M Main Processor Software Reference 399 Maintenance 385 Maintenance–Daily Test Setting 387 Maintenance–Error–Alarm Information 388 Maintenance–External Modem Control 387 Maintenance–Power Failure Transfer Control 387 Maintenance–PT Programming by User 386 Maintenance–Remote 386 Maintenance–RS-232C Port 387 Maintenance–SMDR 385 Making Call Features 65 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 174 Manager Assignment 412 Manager Features 255 Manager Password 398 Maximum Number of Agents 417 Memory Dialling Features 85 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY 85 Message Features 150 Message Waiting 150 Metre Pulse Detection for DR2 311 MFC-R2 Group-I 313 MFC-R2 Time 312 Modem Floating Extension Number 424 Multiple FWD 59 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 23 Music on Hold 124 Music Source Selection for Call Hold 421 Music Source Selection for Port 2 421 Music Source Selection for Transfer 421 Mute 109 N Network Configuration 294, 302 Network Numbering Plan 295, 303 Networking Features 216 New Line 423 No Line Preference 62, 67 O Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 73 Off-Hook Monitor 108 One-touch Dialling 87 One-touch Transfer 119 OPB3 Option Card Deletion 425 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference 425 Operator Assignment 395 Operator Call 254 Operator Features 254 Optional Device Features 131 Outgoing Call Log 88 432 Outgoing Message (OGM) 135, 137, 370 Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number 422 Outgoing Message (OGM) Name 422 Outgoing Trunk Group Number 411 Overflow Destination by Busy 416 Overflow Destination on Time Out 416 Overflow Feature 49 Overflow Time Assignment 416 P Paging 128 Paging Deny 128 Paging DND 60, 130 Paging Features 128 Paging Group 128, 351, 352 Paging Group for Extension Group 417 Paging Group for External Pager 418 Parallelled Telephone 115 Parity 423 Password Change 390 Pause Insertion 81 Pay Tone 286 Pay Tone Signal Type 410 PC Programming 256, 275 PC Programming Software Installation 275 Personal Password 209, 395 Personal Password Lock 99, 209 Personal Programme Clear 210 Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock 89 Pickup Group 351 Pickup Group for Extension Group 418 Port 287, 292, 300, 318, 321, 323, 324 Power Failure Restart 269 Power Failure Transfer 268 Predialling 65 Prime Line Preference 62, 67 Privacy Release 127 Private Network 380 Private Network–Common 380 Private Network–TIE Routing Plan Table 380 Programming Instructions 273 Programming Mode Level 413 Programming Structure 392 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 152 Protocol Timer 288, 297 PT Programming 258, 391 Pulse Dialling 306, 309, 317 Pulse to Tone Conversion 79 Pulse/DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Dialling 284 Q QSIG Network 237 Queuing Call Limit 416 Queuing Feature 46 Index Queuing Hurry-up Level 417 Queuing Overflow 353 Queuing Time Table 355, 417 Queuing Time Table Number 417 Quick Dialling 90, 338 Quick Setup 260 R Recall Timer 330 Receiving Group Features 38 Remote Control 53 Remote COS Access 99 Remote Extension Control by User 213 Remote Extension Lock 4, 97 Remote Programming Assignment 424 Required Telephone/Extension 391 Resource/Interface Programming 421 Ring 43 Ring Detection 284 Ring Pattern Option 344 Ring Pattern Table Doorphone 343 Ring Pattern Table Others 344 Ring Pattern Table Trunk 343 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 35 Ringing Line Preference 62 Routing Plan Time Table 378 RS-232C Port Parameter 387 S Second Call Notification to Busy Extension— SUMMARY 71 Second Dial Tone Waiting Code 372 Slot Card Deletion 425 Slot Card Programming 425 Slot Card Type Reference 425 SMDR 139, 201 SMDR & Maintenance Programming 423 SMDR Incoming Call Printing 424 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 424 SMDR Page Length 424 SMDR Port 423 SMDR Skip Perforation 424 Software Upgrading 267 Software Version 389 Special Carrier Access Code 84, 402 Speed Dialling TRS/Barring Level 412 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 89 Stop Bits 423 Subaddressing 176 Subaddressing (SUB) 162 Supervisory Feature 53 System 326 System Configuration and Administration Features 241 System Configuration—Hardware 242 System Configuration—Software 243 System Data Control 256 System Password for Dealer 397 System Password for User 398 System Programming 397 System Speed Dialling & Caller ID 371 System Speed Dialling Name 394 System Speed Dialling Number 394 System–Background Music (BGM) 348 System–Basic 326 System–Basic–Date & Time 326 System–Basic–Music 327 System–Basic–Operator 326 System–Class of Service 339 System–Class of Service–Basic 339 System–Class of Service–Internal Call Block 341 System–Class of Service–Trunk Group 341 System–Echo Cancel 348 System–Numbering Plan 333 System–Numbering Plan–Extension 333 System–Numbering Plan–Feature 334 System–Numbering Plan–One Digit 338 System–Numbering Plan–Other PBX Access Code 338 System–Numbering Plan–Quick Dialling 338 System–Option 347 System–Outgoing Message (OGM) 347 System–PT 342 System–PT–Common 342 System–Ring 343 System–Ring Pattern Table 343 System–Ring–Common 343 System–Ring–Ring Pattern Table Detail 344 System–SLT 341 System–System Timer 327 System–Time Service 332 System–Time Service–Holiday 333 System–Time Service–System 332 System–Tone 345 System–Tone–Common 345 System–Tone–Tone Pattern Assignment 346 T T1 Line Service 180 T1 Line Service Features 180 Table 371 Tenant 376 Tenant Service 247 Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block 249 Terminated Hunting 38 Terms used in this Feature Guide 2 TIE Line Service 4, 216 TIE Routing Plan Table 380 Time Programming 400 Time Service 250 Time Service Start Time 397 Time Service Switching Mode 397, 413 433 Index Timed Reminder 212 Timer 350 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 92, 377 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 92 Tone Pattern Assignment 346 Transfer Recall 118 Transfer Recall Time 400 Transferring Features 118 TRS/Barring Denied Code 402 TRS/Barring Level 93, 411 TRS/Barring Line Routing Table Programming 402 TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 92, 402 TRS/Barring–Denied Code 377 TRS/Barring–Exception Code 377 TRS/Barring–Option 377 TRS/Barring–Special Carrier Access Exception Code 377 Trunk Access 75 Trunk Access Number Reference 405 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 4, 133 Trunk Call Duration Limitation 411 Trunk Call Limitation 114 Trunk Call Ring Type 343 Trunk Connection 405 Trunk Group 349, 350, 405 Trunk Group Access 75 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 409 Trunk Name 405 Trunk Number 359 Trunk Port 381 Trunk Programming 405 Trunk Setting 293, 301, 339 Trunk Timer 329 Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration 114 Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Time 410 Two-way Recording into the VPS 193 U Unattended Conference 126 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 43 User Manual References 2 User Programming List 386 User-to-user Signalling Type 1 through 3 (UUS-1 through UUS-3) 162 V Verified Code 372 Verified Code COS Number 398 Verified Code Entry 100 Verified Code Name 398 Verified Code Number 398 434 Verified Code Password 398 VIP Call 48 Virtual Private Network (VPN) 235 Visual Caller ID 37 VM Group Floating Extension Number 418 Voice Mail (VM) DTMF Command 357 Voice Mail (VM) DTMF Status 356 Voice Mail (VM) Group 182, 355, 358 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 191 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 185 Voice Mail Features 182 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 239 VPS Data Control by the PBX 194 VPS Trunk Group 356 VPS/DSS Console/PC Console Assignment 414 W Walking Extension 211 Whisper OHCA 74 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 200 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone 413 Wrap-up 51 X XDP Assignment 414 Index 435 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan Copyright: This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). Under the applicable copyright laws, this manual may not be reproduced in any form, in whole or part,without the prior written consent of KME. Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 2000 Printed in Japan PSQX2230ZA KS0302NS0 (Version 0.120)